This commit was manufactured by cvs2svn to create tag

'BEFORE_INIT_REFACTORING'.

git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/tags/BEFORE_INIT_REFACTORING@21512 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775

include/.cvsignore

@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Makefile.in
+*.mch

include/wx/.cvsignore

@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Makefile.in
+

include/wx/accel.h

@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/accel.h
+// Purpose:     wxAcceleratorEntry and wxAcceleratorTable classes
+// Author:      Julian Smart, Robert Roebling, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     31.05.01 (extracted from other files)
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_ACCEL
+
+#include "wx/object.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAcceleratorTable;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuItem;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxKeyEvent;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// wxAcceleratorEntry flags
+enum
+{
+    wxACCEL_NORMAL  = 0x0000,   // no modifiers
+    wxACCEL_ALT     = 0x0001,   // hold Alt key down
+    wxACCEL_CTRL    = 0x0002,   // hold Ctrl key down
+    wxACCEL_SHIFT   = 0x0004    // hold Shift key down
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// an entry in wxAcceleratorTable corresponds to one accelerator
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAcceleratorEntry
+{
+public:
+    wxAcceleratorEntry(int flags = 0, int keyCode = 0, int cmd = 0,
+                       wxMenuItem *item = NULL)
+        : m_flags(flags)
+        , m_keyCode(keyCode)
+        , m_command(cmd)
+        , m_item(item)
+        { }
+
+    wxAcceleratorEntry(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry)
+        : m_flags(entry.m_flags)
+        , m_keyCode(entry.m_keyCode)
+        , m_command(entry.m_command)
+        , m_item(entry.m_item)
+        { }
+
+    wxAcceleratorEntry& operator=(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry)
+    {
+        Set(entry.m_flags, entry.m_keyCode, entry.m_command, entry.m_item);
+        return *this;
+    }
+    
+    void Set(int flags, int keyCode, int cmd, wxMenuItem *item = NULL)
+    {
+        m_flags = flags;
+        m_keyCode = keyCode;
+        m_command = cmd;
+        m_item = item;
+    }
+
+    void SetMenuItem(wxMenuItem *item) { m_item = item; }
+
+    int GetFlags() const { return m_flags; }
+    int GetKeyCode() const { return m_keyCode; }
+    int GetCommand() const { return m_command; }
+
+    wxMenuItem *GetMenuItem() const { return m_item; }
+
+    bool operator==(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry) const
+    {
+        return m_flags == entry.m_flags &&
+               m_keyCode == entry.m_keyCode &&
+               m_command == entry.m_command &&
+               m_item == entry.m_item;
+    }
+
+    bool operator!=(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry) const
+        { return !(*this == entry); }
+
+#if defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    // Implementation use only
+    bool MatchesEvent(const wxKeyEvent& event) const;
+#endif
+    
+private:
+    int m_flags;    // combination of wxACCEL_XXX constants
+    int m_keyCode;  // ASCII or virtual keycode
+    int m_command;  // Command id to generate
+
+    // the menu item this entry corresponds to, may be NULL
+    wxMenuItem *m_item;
+
+    // for compatibility with old code, use accessors now!
+    friend class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenu;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include wxAcceleratorTable class declaration, it is only used by the library
+// and so doesn't have any published user visible interface
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/generic/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/generic/accel.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/accel.h"
+#endif
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxAcceleratorTable) wxNullAcceleratorTable;
+
+#endif // wxUSE_ACCEL
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_

include/wx/access.h

@@ -0,0 +1,386 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/access.h
+// Purpose:     Accessibility classes
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     2003-02-12
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_ACCESSBASE_H_
+#define _WX_ACCESSBASE_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "accessbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers we have to include here
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/variant.h"
+
+typedef enum
+{
+    wxACC_FAIL,
+    wxACC_FALSE,
+    wxACC_OK,
+    wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED,
+    wxACC_NOT_SUPPORTED
+} wxAccStatus;
+
+// Child ids are integer identifiers from 1 up.
+// So zero represents 'this' object.
+#define wxACC_SELF 0
+
+// Navigation constants
+
+typedef enum
+{
+    wxNAVDIR_DOWN,
+    wxNAVDIR_FIRSTCHILD,
+    wxNAVDIR_LASTCHILD,
+    wxNAVDIR_LEFT,
+    wxNAVDIR_NEXT,
+    wxNAVDIR_PREVIOUS,
+    wxNAVDIR_RIGHT,
+    wxNAVDIR_UP
+} wxNavDir;
+
+// Role constants
+
+typedef enum {  
+    wxROLE_NONE,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_ALERT,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_ANIMATION,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_APPLICATION,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_BORDER,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_BUTTONDROPDOWN,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_BUTTONDROPDOWNGRID,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_BUTTONMENU,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CARET,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CELL,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CHARACTER,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CHART,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CHECKBUTTON,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CLIENT,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CLOCK,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_COLUMN,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_COLUMNHEADER,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_COMBOBOX,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_CURSOR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_DIAGRAM,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_DIAL,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_DIALOG,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_DOCUMENT,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_DROPLIST,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_EQUATION,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_GRAPHIC,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_GRIP,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_GROUPING,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_HELPBALLOON,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_HOTKEYFIELD,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_INDICATOR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_LINK,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_LIST,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_LISTITEM,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_MENUBAR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_MENUITEM,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_MENUPOPUP,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_OUTLINE,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_OUTLINEITEM,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_PAGETAB,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_PAGETABLIST,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_PANE,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_PROGRESSBAR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_PROPERTYPAGE,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_PUSHBUTTON,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_RADIOBUTTON,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_ROW,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_ROWHEADER,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_SCROLLBAR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_SEPARATOR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_SLIDER,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_SOUND,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_SPINBUTTON,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_STATICTEXT,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_STATUSBAR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_TABLE,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_TEXT,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_TITLEBAR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_TOOLBAR,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_TOOLTIP,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_WHITESPACE,
+    wxROLE_SYSTEM_WINDOW
+} wxAccRole;
+
+// Object types
+
+typedef enum {
+    wxOBJID_WINDOW =    0x00000000,
+    wxOBJID_SYSMENU =   0xFFFFFFFF,
+    wxOBJID_TITLEBAR =  0xFFFFFFFE,
+    wxOBJID_MENU =      0xFFFFFFFD,
+    wxOBJID_CLIENT =    0xFFFFFFFC,
+    wxOBJID_VSCROLL =   0xFFFFFFFB,
+    wxOBJID_HSCROLL =   0xFFFFFFFA,
+    wxOBJID_SIZEGRIP =  0xFFFFFFF9,
+    wxOBJID_CARET =     0xFFFFFFF8,
+    wxOBJID_CURSOR =    0xFFFFFFF7,
+    wxOBJID_ALERT =     0xFFFFFFF6,
+    wxOBJID_SOUND =     0xFFFFFFF5
+} wxAccObject;
+
+// Accessible states
+
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_ALERT_HIGH       0x00000001
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_ALERT_MEDIUM     0x00000002
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_ALERT_LOW        0x00000004
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_ANIMATED         0x00000008
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_BUSY             0x00000010
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_CHECKED          0x00000020
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_COLLAPSED        0x00000040
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_DEFAULT          0x00000080
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_EXPANDED         0x00000100
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_EXTSELECTABLE    0x00000200
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_FLOATING         0x00000400
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_FOCUSABLE        0x00000800
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_FOCUSED          0x00001000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_HOTTRACKED       0x00002000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_INVISIBLE        0x00004000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_MARQUEED         0x00008000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_MIXED            0x00010000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_MULTISELECTABLE  0x00020000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_OFFSCREEN        0x00040000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_PRESSED          0x00080000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_PROTECTED        0x00100000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_READONLY         0x00200000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_SELECTABLE       0x00400000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_SELECTED         0x00800000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_SELFVOICING      0x01000000
+#define wxACC_STATE_SYSTEM_UNAVAILABLE      0x02000000
+
+// Selection flag
+
+typedef enum
+{
+    wxACC_SEL_NONE            = 0,
+    wxACC_SEL_TAKEFOCUS       = 1,
+    wxACC_SEL_TAKESELECTION   = 2,
+    wxACC_SEL_EXTENDSELECTION = 4,
+    wxACC_SEL_ADDSELECTION    = 8,
+    wxACC_SEL_REMOVESELECTION = 16
+} wxAccSelectionFlags;
+
+// Accessibility event identifiers
+
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_SOUND              0x0001
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_ALERT              0x0002
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_FOREGROUND         0x0003
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MENUSTART          0x0004
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MENUEND            0x0005
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MENUPOPUPSTART     0x0006
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MENUPOPUPEND       0x0007
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_CAPTURESTART       0x0008
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_CAPTUREEND         0x0009
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MOVESIZESTART      0x000A
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MOVESIZEEND        0x000B
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_CONTEXTHELPSTART   0x000C
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_CONTEXTHELPEND     0x000D
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_DRAGDROPSTART      0x000E
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_DRAGDROPEND        0x000F
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_DIALOGSTART        0x0010
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_DIALOGEND          0x0011
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_SCROLLINGSTART     0x0012
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_SCROLLINGEND       0x0013
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_SWITCHSTART        0x0014
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_SWITCHEND          0x0015
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MINIMIZESTART      0x0016
+#define wxACC_EVENT_SYSTEM_MINIMIZEEND        0x0017
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_CREATE                 0x8000
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_DESTROY                0x8001
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_SHOW                   0x8002
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_HIDE                   0x8003
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_REORDER                0x8004
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_FOCUS                  0x8005
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_SELECTION              0x8006
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_SELECTIONADD           0x8007
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_SELECTIONREMOVE        0x8008
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_SELECTIONWITHIN        0x8009
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_STATECHANGE            0x800A
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_LOCATIONCHANGE         0x800B
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_NAMECHANGE             0x800C
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_DESCRIPTIONCHANGE      0x800D
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_VALUECHANGE            0x800E
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_PARENTCHANGE           0x800F
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_HELPCHANGE             0x8010
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_DEFACTIONCHANGE        0x8011
+#define wxACC_EVENT_OBJECT_ACCELERATORCHANGE      0x8012
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxAccessible
+// All functions return an indication of success, failure, or not implemented.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAccessible;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindow;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPoint;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxRect;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAccessibleBase : public wxObject
+{
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxAccessibleBase)
+
+public:
+    wxAccessibleBase(wxWindow* win): m_window(win) {};
+    virtual ~wxAccessibleBase() {};
+
+// Overridables
+
+        // Can return either a child object, or an integer
+        // representing the child element, starting from 1.
+        // pt is in screen coordinates.
+    virtual wxAccStatus HitTest(const wxPoint& WXUNUSED(pt), int* WXUNUSED(childId), wxAccessible** WXUNUSED(childObject))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Returns the rectangle for this object (id = 0) or a child element (id > 0).
+        // rect is in screen coordinates.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetLocation(wxRect& WXUNUSED(rect), int WXUNUSED(elementId))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Navigates from fromId to toId/toObject.
+    virtual wxAccStatus Navigate(wxNavDir WXUNUSED(navDir), int WXUNUSED(fromId),
+                int* WXUNUSED(toId), wxAccessible** WXUNUSED(toObject))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Gets the name of the specified object.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetName(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxString* WXUNUSED(name))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Gets the number of children.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetChildCount(int* WXUNUSED(childCount))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Gets the specified child (starting from 1).
+        // If *child is NULL and return value is wxACC_OK,
+        // this means that the child is a simple element and
+        // not an accessible object.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetChild(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxAccessible** WXUNUSED(child))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Gets the parent, or NULL.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetParent(wxAccessible** WXUNUSED(parent))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Performs the default action. childId is 0 (the action for this object)
+        // or > 0 (the action for a child).
+        // Return wxACC_NOT_SUPPORTED if there is no default action for this
+        // window (e.g. an edit control).
+    virtual wxAccStatus DoDefaultAction(int WXUNUSED(childId))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Gets the default action for this object (0) or > 0 (the action for a child).
+        // Return wxACC_OK even if there is no action. actionName is the action, or the empty
+        // string if there is no action.
+        // The retrieved string describes the action that is performed on an object,
+        // not what the object does as a result. For example, a toolbar button that prints
+        // a document has a default action of "Press" rather than "Prints the current document."
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetDefaultAction(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxString* WXUNUSED(actionName))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Returns the description for this object or a child.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetDescription(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxString* WXUNUSED(description))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Returns help text for this object or a child, similar to tooltip text.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetHelpText(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxString* WXUNUSED(helpText))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Returns the keyboard shortcut for this object or child.
+        // Return e.g. ALT+K
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetKeyboardShortcut(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxString* WXUNUSED(shortcut))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Returns a role constant.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetRole(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxAccRole* WXUNUSED(role))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Returns a state constant.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetState(int WXUNUSED(childId), long* WXUNUSED(state))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Returns a localized string representing the value for the object
+        // or child.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetValue(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxString* WXUNUSED(strValue))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Selects the object or child.
+    virtual wxAccStatus Select(int WXUNUSED(childId), wxAccSelectionFlags WXUNUSED(selectFlags))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Gets the window with the keyboard focus.
+        // If childId is 0 and child is NULL, no object in
+        // this subhierarchy has the focus.
+        // If this object has the focus, child should be 'this'.
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetFocus(int* WXUNUSED(childId), wxAccessible** WXUNUSED(child))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+        // Gets a variant representing the selected children
+        // of this object.
+        // Acceptable values:
+        // - a null variant (IsNull() returns TRUE)
+        // - a list variant (GetType() == wxT("list"))
+        // - an integer representing the selected child element,
+        //   or 0 if this object is selected (GetType() == wxT("long"))
+        // - a "void*" pointer to a wxAccessible child object
+    virtual wxAccStatus GetSelections(wxVariant* WXUNUSED(selections))
+         { return wxACC_NOT_IMPLEMENTED; }
+
+// Accessors
+
+        // Returns the window associated with this object.
+
+    wxWindow* GetWindow() { return m_window; }
+
+        // Sets the window associated with this object.
+
+    void SetWindow(wxWindow* window) { m_window = window; }
+
+// Operations
+
+        // Each platform's implementation must define this
+    // static void NotifyEvent(int eventType, wxWindow* window, wxAccObject objectType,
+    //                         int objectId);
+
+private:
+
+// Data members
+
+    wxWindow*   m_window;
+};
+
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// now include the declaration of the real class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/access.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/generic/access.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/generic/access.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/generic/access.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/generic/access.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/generic/access.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/generic/access.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_ACCESSBASE_H_
+

include/wx/app.h

@@ -0,0 +1,634 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/app.h
+// Purpose:     wxAppBase class and macros used for declaration of wxApp
+//              derived class in the user code
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_APP_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_APP_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers we have to include here
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/event.h"       // for the base class
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    #include "wx/window.h"  // for wxTopLevelWindows
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+#include "wx/build.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxApp;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppTraits;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCmdLineParser;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxLog;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMessageOutput;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// typedefs
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// the type of the function used to create a wxApp object on program start up
+typedef wxApp* (*wxAppInitializerFunction)();
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum
+{
+    wxPRINT_WINDOWS = 1,
+    wxPRINT_POSTSCRIPT = 2
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// support for framebuffer ports
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+// VS: Fullscreen/framebuffer application needs to choose display mode prior
+//     to wxWindows initialization. This class holds information about display
+//     mode. It is used by  wxApp::Set/GetDisplayMode.
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDisplayModeInfo
+{
+public:
+    wxDisplayModeInfo() : m_ok(FALSE) {}
+    wxDisplayModeInfo(unsigned width, unsigned height, unsigned depth)
+        : m_width(width), m_height(height), m_depth(depth), m_ok(TRUE) {}
+
+    unsigned GetWidth() const { return m_width; }
+    unsigned GetHeight() const { return m_height; }
+    unsigned GetDepth() const { return m_depth; }
+    bool IsOk() const { return m_ok; }
+
+private:
+    unsigned m_width, m_height, m_depth;
+    bool     m_ok;
+};
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxAppConsole: wxApp for non-GUI applications
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppConsole : public wxEvtHandler
+{
+public:
+    // ctor and dtor
+    wxAppConsole();
+    virtual ~wxAppConsole();
+
+
+    // the virtual functions which may/must be overridden in the derived class
+    // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // Called before OnRun(), this is a good place to do initialization -- if
+    // anything fails, return false from here to prevent the program from
+    // continuing. The command line is normally parsed here, call the base
+    // class OnInit() to do it.
+    virtual bool OnInit();
+
+    // This is the replacement for the normal main(): all program work should
+    // be done here. When OnRun() returns, the programs starts shutting down.
+    virtual int OnRun() = 0;
+
+    // This is only called if OnInit() returned true so it's a good place to do
+    // any cleanup matching the initializations done there.
+    virtual int OnExit();
+
+    // Called when a fatal exception occurs, this function should take care not
+    // to do anything which might provoke a nested exception! It may be
+    // overridden if you wish to react somehow in non-default way (core dump
+    // under Unix, application crash under Windows) to fatal program errors,
+    // however extreme care should be taken if you don't want this function to
+    // crash.
+    virtual void OnFatalException() { }
+
+    // Called from wxExit() function, should terminate the application a.s.a.p.
+    virtual void Exit();
+
+
+    // application info: name, description, vendor
+    // -------------------------------------------
+
+    // NB: all these should be set by the application itself, there are no
+    //     reasonable default except for the application name which is taken to
+    //     be argv[0]
+
+        // set/get the application name
+    wxString GetAppName() const
+    {
+        return m_appName.empty() ? m_className : m_appName;
+    }
+    void SetAppName(const wxString& name) { m_appName = name; }
+
+        // set/get the app class name
+    wxString GetClassName() const { return m_className; }
+    void SetClassName(const wxString& name) { m_className = name; }
+
+        // set/get the vendor name
+    const wxString& GetVendorName() const { return m_vendorName; }
+    void SetVendorName(const wxString& name) { m_vendorName = name; }
+
+
+    // cmd line parsing stuff
+    // ----------------------
+
+    // all of these methods may be overridden in the derived class to
+    // customize the command line parsing (by default only a few standard
+    // options are handled)
+    //
+    // you also need to call wxApp::OnInit() from YourApp::OnInit() for all
+    // this to work
+
+#if wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER
+    // this one is called from OnInit() to add all supported options
+    // to the given parser
+    virtual void OnInitCmdLine(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+
+    // called after successfully parsing the command line, return TRUE
+    // to continue and FALSE to exit
+    virtual bool OnCmdLineParsed(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+
+    // called if "--help" option was specified, return TRUE to continue
+    // and FALSE to exit
+    virtual bool OnCmdLineHelp(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+
+    // called if incorrect command line options were given, return
+    // FALSE to abort and TRUE to continue
+    virtual bool OnCmdLineError(wxCmdLineParser& parser);
+#endif // wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER
+
+
+    // miscellaneous customization functions
+    // -------------------------------------
+
+    // create the app traits object to which we delegate for everything which
+    // either should be configurable by the user (then he can change the
+    // default behaviour simply by overriding CreateTraits() and returning his
+    // own traits object) or which is GUI/console dependent as then wxAppTraits
+    // allows us to abstract the differences behind the common fa<66>ade
+    wxAppTraits *GetTraits();
+
+    // the functions below shouldn't be used now that we have wxAppTraits
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_4
+
+#if wxUSE_LOG
+        // override this function to create default log target of arbitrary
+        // user-defined class (default implementation creates a wxLogGui
+        // object) -- this log object is used by default by all wxLogXXX()
+        // functions.
+    virtual wxLog *CreateLogTarget();
+#endif // wxUSE_LOG
+
+        // similar to CreateLogTarget() but for the global wxMessageOutput
+        // object
+    virtual wxMessageOutput *CreateMessageOutput();
+
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_4
+
+
+    // event processing functions
+    // --------------------------
+
+    // this method allows to filter all the events processed by the program, so
+    // you should try to return quickly from it to avoid slowing down the
+    // program to the crawl
+    //
+    // return value should be -1 to continue with the normal event processing,
+    // or TRUE or FALSE to stop further processing and pretend that the event
+    // had been already processed or won't be processed at all, respectively
+    virtual int FilterEvent(wxEvent& event);
+
+    // process all events in the wxPendingEvents list -- it is necessary to
+    // call this function to process posted events. This happens during each
+    // event loop iteration in GUI mode but if there is no main loop, it may be
+    // also called directly.
+    virtual void ProcessPendingEvents();
+
+    // doesn't do anything in this class, just a hook for GUI wxApp
+    virtual bool Yield(bool WXUNUSED(onlyIfNeeded) = false) { return true; }
+
+    // make sure that idle events are sent again
+    virtual void WakeUpIdle() { }
+
+
+    // debugging support
+    // -----------------
+
+    // this function is called when an assert failure occurs, the base class
+    // version does the normal processing (i.e. shows the usual assert failure
+    // dialog box)
+    //
+    // the arguments are the place where the assert occured, the text of the
+    // assert itself and the user-specified message
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+    virtual void OnAssert(const wxChar *file,
+                          int line,
+                          const wxChar *cond,
+                          const wxChar *msg);
+#endif // __WXDEBUG__
+
+    // check that the wxBuildOptions object (constructed in the application
+    // itself, usually the one from IMPLEMENT_APP() macro) matches the build
+    // options of the library and abort if it doesn't
+    static bool CheckBuildOptions(const wxBuildOptions& buildOptions);
+
+
+    // implementation only from now on
+    // -------------------------------
+
+    // helpers for dynamic wxApp construction
+    static void SetInitializerFunction(wxAppInitializerFunction fn)
+        { ms_appInitFn = fn; }
+    static wxAppInitializerFunction GetInitializerFunction()
+        { return ms_appInitFn; }
+
+
+    // command line arguments (public for backwards compatibility)
+    int      argc;
+    wxChar **argv;
+
+protected:
+    // the function which creates the traits object when GetTraits() needs it
+    // for the first time
+    virtual wxAppTraits *CreateTraits();
+
+
+    // function used for dynamic wxApp creation
+    static wxAppInitializerFunction ms_appInitFn;
+
+    // application info (must be set from the user code)
+    wxString m_vendorName,      // vendor name (ACME Inc)
+             m_appName,         // app name
+             m_className;       // class name
+
+    // the class defining the application behaviour, NULL initially and created
+    // by GetTraits() when first needed
+    wxAppTraits *m_traits;
+
+
+    // the application object is a singleton anyhow, there is no sense in
+    // copying it
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxAppConsole)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxAppBase: the common part of wxApp implementations for all platforms
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppBase : public wxAppConsole
+{
+public:
+    wxAppBase();
+    virtual ~wxAppBase();
+
+    // the virtual functions which may/must be overridden in the derived class
+    // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+        // a platform-dependent version of OnInit(): the code here is likely to
+        // depend on the toolkit. default version does nothing.
+        //
+        // Override: rarely.
+    virtual bool OnInitGui();
+
+        // called to start program execution - the default version just enters
+        // the main GUI loop in which events are received and processed until
+        // the last window is not deleted (if GetExitOnFrameDelete) or
+        // ExitMainLoop() is called. In console mode programs, the execution
+        // of the program really starts here
+        //
+        // Override: rarely in GUI applications, always in console ones.
+    virtual int OnRun();
+
+        // exit the main loop thus terminating the application
+    virtual void Exit();
+
+
+    // the worker functions - usually not used directly by the user code
+    // -----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+        // execute the main GUI loop, the function returns when the loop ends
+    virtual int MainLoop() = 0;
+
+        // exit the main GUI loop during the next iteration (i.e. it does not
+        // stop the program immediately!)
+    virtual void ExitMainLoop() = 0;
+
+        // returns TRUE if the program is initialized
+    virtual bool Initialized() = 0;
+
+        // returns TRUE if there are unprocessed events in the event queue
+    virtual bool Pending() = 0;
+
+        // process the first event in the event queue (blocks until an event
+        // apperas if there are none currently)
+    virtual void Dispatch() = 0;
+
+        // process all currently pending events right now
+        //
+        // it is an error to call Yield() recursively unless the value of
+        // onlyIfNeeded is TRUE
+        //
+        // WARNING: this function is dangerous as it can lead to unexpected
+        //          reentrancies (i.e. when called from an event handler it
+        //          may result in calling the same event handler again), use
+        //          with _extreme_ care or, better, don't use at all!
+    virtual bool Yield(bool onlyIfNeeded = FALSE) = 0;
+
+        // this virtual function is called in the GUI mode when the application
+        // becomes idle and normally just sends wxIdleEvent to all interested
+        // parties
+        //
+        // it should return TRUE if more idle events are needed, FALSE if not
+    virtual bool ProcessIdle() = 0;
+
+
+    // top level window functions
+    // --------------------------
+
+        // return TRUE if our app has focus
+    virtual bool IsActive() const { return m_isActive; }
+
+        // set the "main" top level window
+    void SetTopWindow(wxWindow *win) { m_topWindow = win; }
+
+        // return the "main" top level window (if it hadn't been set previously
+        // with SetTopWindow(), will return just some top level window and, if
+        // there are none, will return NULL)
+    virtual wxWindow *GetTopWindow() const
+    {
+        if (m_topWindow)
+            return m_topWindow;
+        else if (wxTopLevelWindows.GetCount() > 0)
+            return wxTopLevelWindows.GetFirst()->GetData();
+        else
+            return (wxWindow *)NULL;
+    }
+
+        // control the exit behaviour: by default, the program will exit the
+        // main loop (and so, usually, terminate) when the last top-level
+        // program window is deleted. Beware that if you disable this behaviour
+        // (with SetExitOnFrameDelete(FALSE)), you'll have to call
+        // ExitMainLoop() explicitly from somewhere.
+    void SetExitOnFrameDelete(bool flag)
+        { m_exitOnFrameDelete = flag ? Yes : No; }
+    bool GetExitOnFrameDelete() const
+        { return m_exitOnFrameDelete == Yes; }
+
+
+    // display mode, visual, printing mode, ...
+    // ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+        // Get display mode that is used use. This is only used in framebuffer
+        // wxWin ports (such as wxMGL).
+    virtual wxDisplayModeInfo GetDisplayMode() const { return wxDisplayModeInfo(); }
+        // Set display mode to use. This is only used in framebuffer wxWin
+        // ports (such as wxMGL). This method should be called from
+        // wxApp::OnInitGui
+    virtual bool SetDisplayMode(const wxDisplayModeInfo& WXUNUSED(info)) { return TRUE; }
+
+        // set use of best visual flag (see below)
+    void SetUseBestVisual( bool flag ) { m_useBestVisual = flag; }
+    bool GetUseBestVisual() const { return m_useBestVisual; }
+
+        // set/get printing mode: see wxPRINT_XXX constants.
+        //
+        // default behaviour is the normal one for Unix: always use PostScript
+        // printing.
+    virtual void SetPrintMode(int WXUNUSED(mode)) { }
+    int GetPrintMode() const { return wxPRINT_POSTSCRIPT; }
+
+
+    // miscellaneous other stuff
+    // ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // called by toolkit-specific code to set the app status: active (we have
+    // focus) or not and also the last window which had focus before we were
+    // deactivated
+    virtual void SetActive(bool isActive, wxWindow *lastFocus);
+
+
+protected:
+    // override base class method to use GUI traits
+    virtual wxAppTraits *CreateTraits();
+
+
+    // the main top level window (may be NULL)
+    wxWindow *m_topWindow;
+
+    // if Yes, exit the main loop when the last top level window is deleted, if
+    // No don't do it and if Later -- only do it once we reach our OnRun()
+    //
+    // the explanation for using this strange scheme is given in appcmn.cpp
+    enum
+    {
+        Later = -1,
+        No,
+        Yes
+    } m_exitOnFrameDelete;
+
+    // TRUE if the apps whats to use the best visual on systems where
+    // more than one are available (Sun, SGI, XFree86 4.0 ?)
+    bool m_useBestVisual;
+
+    // does any of our windows has focus?
+    bool m_isActive;
+
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxAppBase)
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// now include the declaration of the real class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    #if defined(__WXMSW__)
+        #include "wx/msw/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+        #include "wx/motif/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+        #include "wx/mgl/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+        #include "wx/gtk/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXX11__)
+        #include "wx/x11/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+        #include "wx/mac/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+        #include "wx/cocoa/app.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXPM__)
+        #include "wx/os2/app.h"
+    #endif
+#else // !GUI
+    // can't use typedef because wxApp forward declared as a class
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxApp : public wxAppConsole
+    {
+    };
+#endif // GUI/!GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// the global data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// the one and only application object - use of wxTheApp in application code
+// is discouraged, consider using DECLARE_APP() after which you may call
+// wxGetApp() which will return the object of the correct type (i.e. MyApp and
+// not wxApp)
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxApp*) wxTheApp;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global functions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// event loop related functions only work in GUI programs
+// ------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Force an exit from main loop
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxExit();
+
+// Yield to other apps/messages
+extern bool WXDLLEXPORT wxYield();
+
+// Yield to other apps/messages
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxWakeUpIdle();
+
+
+// console applications may avoid using DECLARE_APP and IMPLEMENT_APP macros
+// and call these functions instead at the program startup and termination
+// -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if !wxUSE_GUI
+
+// initialize the library (may be called as many times as needed, but each
+// call to wxInitialize() must be matched by wxUninitialize())
+extern bool WXDLLEXPORT wxInitialize();
+
+// clean up - the library can't be used any more after the last call to
+// wxUninitialize()
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxUninitialize();
+
+// create an object of this class on stack to initialize/cleanup thel ibrary
+// automatically
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxInitializer
+{
+public:
+    // initialize the library
+    wxInitializer() { m_ok = wxInitialize(); }
+
+    // has the initialization been successful? (explicit test)
+    bool IsOk() const { return m_ok; }
+
+    // has the initialization been successful? (implicit test)
+    operator bool() const { return m_ok; }
+
+    // dtor only does clean up if we initialized the library properly
+    ~wxInitializer() { if ( m_ok ) wxUninitialize(); }
+
+private:
+    bool m_ok;
+};
+
+#endif // !wxUSE_GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// macros for dynamic creation of the application object
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Having a global instance of this class allows wxApp to be aware of the app
+// creator function. wxApp can then call this function to create a new app
+// object. Convoluted, but necessary.
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppInitializer
+{
+public:
+    wxAppInitializer(wxAppInitializerFunction fn)
+        { wxApp::SetInitializerFunction(fn); }
+};
+
+// Here's a macro you can use if your compiler really, really wants main() to
+// be in your main program (e.g. hello.cpp). Now IMPLEMENT_APP should add this
+// code if required.
+
+#if !wxUSE_GUI || defined(__WXMOTIF__) || defined(__WXGTK__) || defined(__WXPM__) || defined(__WXMGL__) || defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN \
+        extern int wxEntry( int argc, char **argv ); \
+        int main(int argc, char **argv) { return wxEntry(argc, argv); }
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    // wxMac seems to have a specific wxEntry prototype
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN \
+        extern int wxEntry( int argc, char **argv, bool enterLoop = TRUE ); \
+        int main(int argc, char **argv) { return wxEntry(argc, argv); }
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__) && defined(WXUSINGDLL)
+    // NT defines APIENTRY, 3.x not
+    #if !defined(WXAPIENTRY)
+        #define WXAPIENTRY WXFAR wxSTDCALL
+    #endif
+
+    #include <windows.h>
+    #include "wx/msw/winundef.h"
+
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN \
+        extern "C" int WXAPIENTRY WinMain(HINSTANCE hInstance,\
+                                          HINSTANCE hPrevInstance,\
+                                          LPSTR m_lpCmdLine, int nCmdShow)\
+        {\
+            return wxEntry((WXHINSTANCE) hInstance,\
+                           (WXHINSTANCE) hPrevInstance,\
+                           m_lpCmdLine, nCmdShow);\
+        }
+#else
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __WXUNIVERSAL__
+    #include "wx/univ/theme.h"
+
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WX_THEME_SUPPORT \
+        WX_USE_THEME(win32); \
+        WX_USE_THEME(gtk);
+#else
+    #define IMPLEMENT_WX_THEME_SUPPORT
+#endif
+
+// Use this macro if you want to define your own main() or WinMain() function
+// and call wxEntry() from there.
+#define IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_MAIN(appname)                   \
+    wxApp *wxCreateApp()                                 \
+    {                                                    \
+        wxApp::CheckBuildOptions(wxBuildOptions());      \
+        return new appname;                              \
+    }                                                    \
+    wxAppInitializer wxTheAppInitializer((wxAppInitializerFunction) wxCreateApp); \
+    appname& wxGetApp() { return *(appname *)wxTheApp; }
+
+// Same as IMPLEMENT_APP() normally but doesn't include themes support in
+// wxUniversal builds
+#define IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_THEMES(appname)    \
+    IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_MAIN(appname)          \
+    IMPLEMENT_WXWIN_MAIN
+
+// Use this macro exactly once, the argument is the name of the wxApp-derived
+// class which is the class of your application.
+#define IMPLEMENT_APP(appname)              \
+    IMPLEMENT_APP_NO_THEMES(appname)        \
+    IMPLEMENT_WX_THEME_SUPPORT
+
+// this macro can be used multiple times and just allows you to use wxGetApp()
+// function
+#define DECLARE_APP(appname) extern appname& wxGetApp();
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_APP_H_BASE_

include/wx/apptrait.h

@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/apptrait.h
+// Purpose:     declaration of wxAppTraits and derived classes
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     19.06.2003
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2003 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_APPTRAIT_H_
+#define _WX_APPTRAIT_H_
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppTraits;
+#if wxUSE_FONTMAP
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontMapper;
+#endif // wxUSE_FONTMAP
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxLog;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMessageOutput;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxAppTraits: this class defines various configurable aspects of wxApp
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppTraitsBase
+{
+public:
+    // wxAppTraits is an ABC, but we also provide 2 standard implementations of
+    // it, one for the console apps and the other for the GUI ones
+    static wxAppTraits *CreateConsole();
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    static wxAppTraits *CreateGUI();
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+
+    // hooks for creating the global objects, may be overridden by the user
+    // ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_LOG
+    // create the default log target
+    virtual wxLog *CreateLogTarget() = 0;
+#endif // wxUSE_LOG
+
+    // create the global object used for printing out messages
+    virtual wxMessageOutput *CreateMessageOutput() = 0;
+
+#if wxUSE_FONTMAP
+    // create the global font mapper object used for encodings/charset mapping
+    virtual wxFontMapper *CreateFontMapper() = 0;
+#endif // wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+
+    // functions abstracting differences between GUI and console modes
+    // ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+    // show the assert dialog with the specified message in GUI or just print
+    // the string to stderr in console mode
+    //
+    // base class version has an implementation (in spite of being pure
+    // virtual) in base/appbase.cpp which can be called as last resort.
+    //
+    // return true to suppress subsequent asserts, false to continue as before
+    virtual bool ShowAssertDialog(const wxString& msg) = 0;
+#endif // __WXDEBUG__
+
+    // return true if fprintf(stderr) goes somewhere, false otherwise
+    virtual bool HasStderr() = 0;
+
+    // managing "pending delete" list: in GUI mode we can't immediately delete
+    // some objects because there may be unprocessed events for them and so we
+    // only do it during the next idle loop iteration while this is, of course,
+    // unnecessary in wxBase, so we have a few functions to abstract these
+    // operations
+
+    // add the object to the pending delete list in GUI, delete it immediately
+    // in wxBase
+    virtual void ScheduleForDestroy(wxObject *object) = 0;
+
+    // remove this object from the pending delete list in GUI, do nothing in
+    // wxBase
+    virtual void RemoveFromPendingDelete(wxObject *object) = 0;
+
+
+    // other miscellaneous helpers
+    // ---------------------------
+
+    // wxGetOsVersion() behaves differently in GUI and non-GUI builds under
+    // Unix: in the former case it returns the information about the toolkit
+    // and in the latter -- about the OS, so we need to virtualize it
+    virtual int GetOSVersion(int *verMaj, int *verMin) = 0;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-specific version of the class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/apptbase.h"
+#elif defined(__UNIX__)
+    #include "wx/unix/apptbase.h"
+#else // no platform-specific methods to add to wxAppTraits
+    typedef 
+    // wxAppTraits must be a class because it was forward declared as class
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppTraits : public wxAppTraitsBase
+    {
+    };
+#endif // platform
+
+// ============================================================================
+// standard traits for console and GUI applications
+// ============================================================================
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxConsoleAppTraitsBase: wxAppTraits implementation for the console apps
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class wxConsoleAppTraitsBase : public wxAppTraits
+{
+public:
+#if wxUSE_LOG
+    virtual wxLog *CreateLogTarget();
+#endif // wxUSE_LOG
+    virtual wxMessageOutput *CreateMessageOutput();
+#if wxUSE_FONTMAP
+    virtual wxFontMapper *CreateFontMapper();
+#endif // wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+    virtual bool ShowAssertDialog(const wxString& msg);
+#endif // __WXDEBUG__
+    virtual bool HasStderr();
+
+    virtual void ScheduleForDestroy(wxObject *object);
+    virtual void RemoveFromPendingDelete(wxObject *object);
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxGUIAppTraitsBase: wxAppTraits implementation for the GUI apps
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+
+class wxGUIAppTraitsBase : public wxAppTraits
+{
+public:
+#if wxUSE_LOG
+    virtual wxLog *CreateLogTarget();
+#endif // wxUSE_LOG
+    virtual wxMessageOutput *CreateMessageOutput();
+#if wxUSE_FONTMAP
+    virtual wxFontMapper *CreateFontMapper();
+#endif // wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+    virtual bool ShowAssertDialog(const wxString& msg);
+#endif // __WXDEBUG__
+    virtual bool HasStderr();
+
+    virtual void ScheduleForDestroy(wxObject *object);
+    virtual void RemoveFromPendingDelete(wxObject *object);
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-specific version of the classes above
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/apptrait.h"
+#elif defined(__UNIX__)
+    #include "wx/unix/apptrait.h"
+#else // no platform-specific methods to add to wxAppTraits
+    #if wxUSE_GUI
+        typedef wxGUIAppTraitsBase wxGUIAppTraits;
+    #endif // wxUSE_GUI
+    typedef wxConsoleAppTraitsBase wxConsoleAppTraits;
+#endif // platform
+
+#endif // _WX_APPTRAIT_H_
+

include/wx/arrimpl.cpp

@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/arrimpl.cpp
+// Purpose:     helper file for implementation of dynamic lists
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     16.10.97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1997 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/*****************************************************************************
+ * Purpose: implements methods of "template" class declared in               *
+ *          DECLARE_OBJARRAY macro and which couldn't be implemented inline  *
+ *          (because they need the full definition of type T in scope)       *
+ *                                                                           *
+ * Usage:   1) #include dynarray.h                                           *
+ *          2) WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY                                           *
+ *          3) #include arrimpl.cpp                                          *
+ *          4) WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY                                            *
+ *****************************************************************************/
+
+// needed to resolve the conflict between global T and macro parameter T
+
+#define _WX_ERROR_REMOVE2(x)     wxT("bad index in ") wxT(#x) wxT("::RemoveAt()")
+
+// macro implements remaining (not inline) methods of template list
+// (it's private to this file)
+#undef  _DEFINE_OBJARRAY
+#define _DEFINE_OBJARRAY(T, name)                                             \
+name::~name()                                                                 \
+{                                                                             \
+  Empty();                                                                    \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+void name::DoCopy(const name& src)                                            \
+{                                                                             \
+  for ( size_t ui = 0; ui < src.Count(); ui++ )                               \
+    Add(src[ui]);                                                             \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+name& name::operator=(const name& src)                                        \
+{                                                                             \
+  Empty();                                                                    \
+  DoCopy(src);                                                                \
+                                                                              \
+  return *this;                                                               \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+name::name(const name& src) : wxArrayPtrVoid()                                \
+{                                                                             \
+  DoCopy(src);                                                                \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+void name::DoEmpty()                                                          \
+{                                                                             \
+  for ( size_t ui = 0; ui < Count(); ui++ )                                   \
+    delete (T*)wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Item(ui);                                  \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+void name::RemoveAt(size_t uiIndex, size_t nRemove)                           \
+{                                                                             \
+  wxCHECK_RET( uiIndex < Count(), _WX_ERROR_REMOVE2(name) );                  \
+                                                                              \
+  for (size_t i = 0; i < nRemove; i++ )                                       \
+    delete (T*)wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Item(uiIndex + i);                         \
+                                                                              \
+  wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::RemoveAt(uiIndex, nRemove);                             \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+void name::Add(const T& item, size_t nInsert)                                 \
+{                                                                             \
+  if (nInsert == 0)                                                           \
+    return;                                                                   \
+  T* pItem = new T(item);                                                     \
+  size_t nOldSize = GetCount();                                               \
+  if ( pItem != NULL )                                                        \
+    wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Add(pItem, nInsert);                                  \
+  for (size_t i = 1; i < nInsert; i++)                                        \
+    wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Item(nOldSize + i) = new T(item);                     \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+void name::Insert(const T& item, size_t uiIndex, size_t nInsert)              \
+{                                                                             \
+  if (nInsert == 0)                                                           \
+    return;                                                                   \
+  T* pItem = new T(item);                                                     \
+  if ( pItem != NULL )                                                        \
+    wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Insert(pItem, uiIndex, nInsert);                      \
+  for (size_t i = 1; i < nInsert; i++)                                        \
+    wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Item(uiIndex + i) = new T(item);                      \
+}                                                                             \
+                                                                              \
+int name::Index(const T& Item, bool bFromEnd) const                           \
+{                                                                             \
+  if ( bFromEnd ) {                                                           \
+    if ( Count() > 0 ) {                                                      \
+      size_t ui = Count() - 1;                                                \
+      do {                                                                    \
+        if ( (T*)wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Item(ui) == &Item )                      \
+          return ui;                                                          \
+        ui--;                                                                 \
+      }                                                                       \
+      while ( ui != 0 );                                                      \
+    }                                                                         \
+  }                                                                           \
+  else {                                                                      \
+    for( size_t ui = 0; ui < Count(); ui++ ) {                                \
+      if( (T*)wxBaseArrayPtrVoid::Item(ui) == &Item )                         \
+        return ui;                                                            \
+    }                                                                         \
+  }                                                                           \
+                                                                              \
+  return wxNOT_FOUND;                                                         \
+}
+
+// redefine the macro so that now it will generate the class implementation
+// old value would provoke a compile-time error if this file is not included
+#undef  WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY
+#define WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY(name) _DEFINE_OBJARRAY(_wxObjArray##name, name)

include/wx/artprov.h

@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        artprov.h
+// Purpose:     wxArtProvider class
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     18/03/2002
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vaclav Slavik
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_ARTPROV_H_
+#define _WX_ARTPROV_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "artprov.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/bitmap.h"
+#include "wx/icon.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxArtProvidersList;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxArtProviderCache;
+class wxArtProviderModule;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Types
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+typedef wxString wxArtClient;
+typedef wxString wxArtID;
+
+#define wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID_FROM_STR(id)  (wxString(id)+_T("_C"))
+#define wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(id)           _T(#id) _T("_C")
+#define wxART_MAKE_ART_ID_FROM_STR(id)     (id)
+#define wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(id)              _T(#id)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Art clients
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define wxART_TOOLBAR              wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(wxART_TOOLBAR)         
+#define wxART_MENU                 wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(wxART_MENU)            
+#define wxART_FRAME_ICON           wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(wxART_FRAME_ICON)      
+
+#define wxART_CMN_DIALOG           wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(wxART_CMN_DIALOG)      
+#define wxART_HELP_BROWSER         wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(wxART_HELP_BROWSER)    
+#define wxART_MESSAGE_BOX          wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(wxART_MESSAGE_BOX)     
+
+#define wxART_OTHER                wxART_MAKE_CLIENT_ID(wxART_OTHER)           
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Art IDs
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define wxART_ADD_BOOKMARK         wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_ADD_BOOKMARK)       
+#define wxART_DEL_BOOKMARK         wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_DEL_BOOKMARK)       
+#define wxART_HELP_SIDE_PANEL      wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_HELP_SIDE_PANEL)    
+#define wxART_HELP_SETTINGS        wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_HELP_SETTINGS)      
+#define wxART_HELP_BOOK            wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_HELP_BOOK)          
+#define wxART_HELP_FOLDER          wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_HELP_FOLDER)        
+#define wxART_HELP_PAGE            wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_HELP_PAGE)          
+#define wxART_GO_BACK              wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_GO_BACK)            
+#define wxART_GO_FORWARD           wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_GO_FORWARD)         
+#define wxART_GO_UP                wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_GO_UP)              
+#define wxART_GO_DOWN              wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_GO_DOWN)            
+#define wxART_GO_TO_PARENT         wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_GO_TO_PARENT)       
+#define wxART_GO_HOME              wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_GO_HOME)            
+#define wxART_FILE_OPEN            wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_FILE_OPEN)          
+#define wxART_PRINT                wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_PRINT)              
+#define wxART_HELP                 wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_HELP)               
+#define wxART_TIP                  wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_TIP)                
+#define wxART_REPORT_VIEW          wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_REPORT_VIEW)        
+#define wxART_LIST_VIEW            wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_LIST_VIEW)          
+#define wxART_NEW_DIR              wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_NEW_DIR)            
+#define wxART_FOLDER               wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_FOLDER)             
+#define wxART_GO_DIR_UP            wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_GO_DIR_UP)          
+#define wxART_EXECUTABLE_FILE      wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_EXECUTABLE_FILE)    
+#define wxART_NORMAL_FILE          wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_NORMAL_FILE)        
+#define wxART_TICK_MARK            wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_TICK_MARK)          
+#define wxART_CROSS_MARK           wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_CROSS_MARK)         
+#define wxART_ERROR                wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_ERROR)              
+#define wxART_QUESTION             wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_QUESTION)           
+#define wxART_WARNING              wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_WARNING)            
+#define wxART_INFORMATION          wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_INFORMATION)        
+#define wxART_MISSING_IMAGE        wxART_MAKE_ART_ID(wxART_MISSING_IMAGE)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxArtProvider class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxArtProvider : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    // Add new provider to the top of providers stack.
+    static void PushProvider(wxArtProvider *provider);
+
+    // Remove latest added provider and delete it.
+    static bool PopProvider();
+
+    // Remove provider. The provider must have been added previously!
+    // The provider is _not_ deleted.
+    static bool RemoveProvider(wxArtProvider *provider);
+    
+    // Query the providers for bitmap with given ID and return it. Return
+    // wxNullBitmap if no provider provides it.
+    static wxBitmap GetBitmap(const wxArtID& id, 
+                              const wxArtClient& client = wxART_OTHER,
+                              const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize);
+
+    // Query the providers for icon with given ID and return it. Return
+    // wxNullIcon if no provider provides it.
+    static wxIcon GetIcon(const wxArtID& id,
+                          const wxArtClient& client = wxART_OTHER,
+                          const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize);
+
+protected:
+    friend class wxArtProviderModule;
+    // Initializes default provider
+    static void InitStdProvider();
+    // Destroy caches & all providers
+    static void CleanUpProviders();
+
+    // Derived classes must override this method to create requested 
+    // art resource. This method is called only once per instance's
+    // lifetime for each requested wxArtID.
+    virtual wxBitmap CreateBitmap(const wxArtID& WXUNUSED(id),
+                                  const wxArtClient& WXUNUSED(client),
+                                  const wxSize& WXUNUSED(size)) = 0;
+
+private:
+    // list of providers:
+    static wxArtProvidersList *sm_providers;
+    // art resources cache (so that CreateXXX is not called that often):
+    static wxArtProviderCache *sm_cache;
+
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxArtProvider)
+};
+
+
+#endif // _WX_ARTPROV_H_

include/wx/bitmap.h

@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/bitmap.h
+// Purpose:     wxBitmap class interface
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     22.04.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "bitmapbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/object.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/gdiobj.h"
+#include "wx/gdicmn.h"  // for wxBitmapType
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmap;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapHandler;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxImage;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMask;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPalette;
+
+#if defined(__WXMGL__) || defined(__WXMAC__) || defined(__WXCOCOA__) || defined(__WXMOTIF__) || defined(__WXX11__)
+// Only used by some ports
+// FIXME -- make all ports (but MSW which uses wxGDIImage) use these base classes
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBitmapHandler: class which knows how to create/load/save bitmaps in
+// different formats
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapHandlerBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxBitmapHandlerBase()
+        : m_name()
+        , m_extension()
+        , m_type(wxBITMAP_TYPE_INVALID)
+    { }
+
+    virtual ~wxBitmapHandlerBase() { }
+
+    virtual bool Create(wxBitmap *bitmap, void *data, long flags,
+                          int width, int height, int depth = 1) = 0;
+    virtual bool LoadFile(wxBitmap *bitmap, const wxString& name, long flags,
+                          int desiredWidth, int desiredHeight) = 0;
+    virtual bool SaveFile(const wxBitmap *bitmap, const wxString& name,
+                          int type, const wxPalette *palette = NULL) = 0;
+
+    void SetName(const wxString& name) { m_name = name; }
+    void SetExtension(const wxString& ext) { m_extension = ext; }
+    void SetType(wxBitmapType type) { m_type = type; }
+    wxString GetName() const { return m_name; }
+    wxString GetExtension() const { return m_extension; }
+    wxBitmapType GetType() const { return m_type; }
+
+protected:
+    wxString      m_name;
+    wxString      m_extension;
+    wxBitmapType  m_type;
+
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxBitmapHandlerBase)
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapBase : public wxGDIObject
+{
+public:
+    wxBitmapBase() : wxGDIObject() {}
+    virtual ~wxBitmapBase() {}
+
+    /*
+    Derived class must implement these:
+
+    wxBitmap();
+    wxBitmap(int width, int height, int depth = -1);
+    wxBitmap(const char bits[], int width, int height, int depth = 1);
+    wxBitmap(const char **bits);
+    wxBitmap(char **bits);
+    wxBitmap(const wxBitmap& bmp);
+    wxBitmap(const wxString &filename, wxBitmapType type = wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM);
+    wxBitmap(const wxImage& image, int depth = -1);
+    wxBitmap& operator = (const wxBitmap& bmp);
+    bool operator == (const wxBitmap& bmp) const;
+    bool operator != (const wxBitmap& bmp) const;
+
+    bool Create(int width, int height, int depth = -1);
+
+    static void InitStandardHandlers();
+    */
+
+    virtual bool Ok() const = 0;
+
+    virtual int GetHeight() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetWidth() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetDepth() const = 0;
+
+    virtual wxImage ConvertToImage() const = 0;
+
+    virtual wxMask *GetMask() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetMask(wxMask *mask) = 0;
+
+    virtual wxBitmap GetSubBitmap(const wxRect& rect) const = 0;
+
+    virtual bool SaveFile(const wxString &name, wxBitmapType type,
+                          const wxPalette *palette = (wxPalette *)NULL) const = 0;
+    virtual bool LoadFile(const wxString &name, wxBitmapType type) = 0;
+
+    /*
+       If raw bitmap access is supported (see wx/rawbmp.h), the following
+       methods should be implemented:
+
+       virtual bool GetRawData(wxRawBitmapData *data) = 0;
+       virtual void UngetRawData(wxRawBitmapData *data) = 0;
+     */
+
+#if wxUSE_PALETTE
+    virtual wxPalette *GetPalette() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetPalette(const wxPalette& palette) = 0;
+#endif // wxUSE_PALETTE
+
+    // copies the contents and mask of the given (colour) icon to the bitmap
+    virtual bool CopyFromIcon(const wxIcon& icon) = 0;
+
+    // implementation:
+    virtual void SetHeight(int height) = 0;
+    virtual void SetWidth(int width) = 0;
+    virtual void SetDepth(int depth) = 0;
+
+    // Format handling
+    static inline wxList& GetHandlers() { return sm_handlers; }
+    static void AddHandler(wxBitmapHandlerBase *handler);
+    static void InsertHandler(wxBitmapHandlerBase *handler);
+    static bool RemoveHandler(const wxString& name);
+    static wxBitmapHandler *FindHandler(const wxString& name);
+    static wxBitmapHandler *FindHandler(const wxString& extension, wxBitmapType bitmapType);
+    static wxBitmapHandler *FindHandler(wxBitmapType bitmapType);
+
+    //static void InitStandardHandlers();
+    //  (wxBitmap must implement this one)
+
+    static void CleanUpHandlers();
+
+protected:
+    static wxList sm_handlers;
+
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxBitmapBase)
+};
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/x11/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/bitmap.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/bitmap.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_

include/wx/bmpbuttn.h

@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/bmpbutton.h
+// Purpose:     wxBitmapButton class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     25.08.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_BMPBUTTON
+
+#include "wx/bitmap.h"
+#include "wx/button.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxButtonNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBitmapButton: a button which shows bitmaps instead of the usual string.
+// It has different bitmaps for different states (focused/disabled/pressed)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapButtonBase : public wxButton
+{
+public:
+    wxBitmapButtonBase()
+        : m_bmpNormal(), m_bmpSelected(), m_bmpFocus(), m_bmpDisabled()
+        , m_marginX(0), m_marginY(0)
+        { }
+
+    // set the bitmaps
+    void SetBitmapLabel(const wxBitmap& bitmap)
+        { m_bmpNormal = bitmap; OnSetBitmap(); }
+    void SetBitmapSelected(const wxBitmap& sel)
+        { m_bmpSelected = sel; OnSetBitmap(); };
+    void SetBitmapFocus(const wxBitmap& focus)
+        { m_bmpFocus = focus; OnSetBitmap(); };
+    void SetBitmapDisabled(const wxBitmap& disabled)
+        { m_bmpDisabled = disabled; OnSetBitmap(); };
+    void SetLabel(const wxBitmap& bitmap)
+        { SetBitmapLabel(bitmap); }
+
+    // retrieve the bitmaps
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapLabel() const { return m_bmpNormal; }
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapSelected() const { return m_bmpSelected; }
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapFocus() const { return m_bmpFocus; }
+    const wxBitmap& GetBitmapDisabled() const { return m_bmpDisabled; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapLabel() { return m_bmpNormal; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapSelected() { return m_bmpSelected; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapFocus() { return m_bmpFocus; }
+    wxBitmap& GetBitmapDisabled() { return m_bmpDisabled; }
+
+    // set/get the margins around the button
+    virtual void SetMargins(int x, int y) { m_marginX = x; m_marginY = y; }
+    int GetMarginX() const { return m_marginX; }
+    int GetMarginY() const { return m_marginY; }
+
+protected:
+    // function called when any of the bitmaps changes
+    virtual void OnSetBitmap() { }
+
+    // the bitmaps for various states
+    wxBitmap m_bmpNormal,
+             m_bmpSelected,
+             m_bmpFocus,
+             m_bmpDisabled;
+
+    // the margins around the bitmap
+    int m_marginX,
+        m_marginY;
+private:
+    // Prevent Virtual function hiding warnings
+    void SetLabel(const wxString& rsLabel)
+    { wxWindowBase::SetLabel(rsLabel); }
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/bmpbuttn.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/bmpbuttn.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_BMPBUTTON
+
+#endif // _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_

include/wx/brush.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/x11/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/brush.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/brush.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_

include/wx/buffer.h

@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/buffer.h
+// Purpose:     auto buffer classes: buffers which automatically free memory
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     12.04.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// these classes are for private use only for now, they're not documented
+
+#ifndef _WX_BUFFER_H
+#define _WX_BUFFER_H
+
+#include "wx/wxchar.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Special classes for (wide) character strings: they use malloc/free instead
+// of new/delete
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define DEFINE_BUFFER(classname, chartype, strdupfunc)                      \
+class classname                                                             \
+{                                                                           \
+public:                                                                     \
+    classname(const chartype *str)                                          \
+        : m_str(str ? strdupfunc(str) : NULL)                               \
+    {                                                                       \
+    }                                                                       \
+                                                                            \
+    classname(size_t len)                                                   \
+        : m_str((chartype *)malloc((len + 1)*sizeof(chartype)))             \
+    {                                                                       \
+        m_str[len] = (chartype)0;                                           \
+    }                                                                       \
+                                                                            \
+    /* no need to check for NULL, free() does it */                         \
+    ~classname() { free(m_str); }                                           \
+                                                                            \
+    /*                                                                      \
+        WARNING:                                                            \
+                                                                            \
+        the copy ctor and assignment operators change the passed in object  \
+        even although it is declared as "const", so:                        \
+                                                                            \
+        a) it shouldn't be really const                                     \
+        b) you shouldn't use it afterwards (or know that it was reset)      \
+                                                                            \
+        This is very ugly but is unfortunately needed to make the normal use\
+        of classname buffer objects possible and is very similar to what    \
+        std::auto_ptr<> does (as if it were an excuse...)                   \
+    */                                                                      \
+                                                                            \
+    /*                                                                      \
+       because of the remark above, release() is declared const even if it  \
+       isn't really const                                                   \
+     */                                                                     \
+    chartype *release() const                                               \
+    {                                                                       \
+        chartype *p = m_str;                                                \
+        ((classname *)this)->m_str = NULL;                                  \
+        return p;                                                           \
+    }                                                                       \
+                                                                            \
+    classname(const classname& src)                                         \
+        : m_str(src.release())                                              \
+    {                                                                       \
+    }                                                                       \
+                                                                            \
+    classname& operator=(const chartype *str)                               \
+    {                                                                       \
+        free(m_str);                                                        \
+        m_str = str ? strdupfunc(str) : NULL;                               \
+        return *this;                                                       \
+    }                                                                       \
+                                                                            \
+    classname& operator=(const classname& src)                              \
+    {                                                                       \
+        free(m_str);                                                        \
+        m_str = src.release();                                              \
+                                                                            \
+        return *this;                                                       \
+    }                                                                       \
+                                                                            \
+    chartype *data() { return m_str; }                                      \
+    const chartype *data() const { return m_str; }                          \
+    operator const chartype *() const { return m_str; }                     \
+    chartype operator[](size_t n) const { return m_str[n]; }                \
+                                                                            \
+private:                                                                    \
+    chartype *m_str;                                                        \
+}
+
+DEFINE_BUFFER(wxCharBuffer, char, wxStrdupA);
+
+#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T
+
+DEFINE_BUFFER(wxWCharBuffer, wchar_t, wxStrdupW);
+
+#endif // wxUSE_WCHAR_T
+
+#undef DEFINE_BUFFER
+
+#if wxUSE_UNICODE
+    #define wxMB2WXbuf wxWCharBuffer
+    #define wxWX2MBbuf wxCharBuffer
+    #define wxWC2WXbuf wxChar*
+    #define wxWX2WCbuf wxChar*
+#else // ANSI
+    #define wxMB2WXbuf wxChar*
+    #define wxWX2MBbuf wxChar*
+    #define wxWC2WXbuf wxCharBuffer
+    #define wxWX2WCbuf wxWCharBuffer
+#endif // Unicode/ANSI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// A class for holding growable data buffers (not necessarily strings)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// This class manages the actual data buffer pointer and is ref-counted.
+class wxMemoryBufferData
+{
+public:
+    // the initial size and also the size added by ResizeIfNeeded()
+    enum { BLOCK_SIZE = 1024 };
+
+    friend class wxMemoryBuffer;
+
+    // everyting is private as it can only be used by wxMemoryBuffer
+private:
+    wxMemoryBufferData(size_t size = wxMemoryBufferData::BLOCK_SIZE)
+        : m_data(size ? malloc(size) : NULL), m_size(size), m_len(0), m_ref(0)
+    {
+    }
+    ~wxMemoryBufferData() { free(m_data); }
+
+
+    void ResizeIfNeeded(size_t newSize)
+    {
+        if (newSize > m_size)
+        {
+            void *dataOld = m_data;
+            m_data = realloc(m_data, newSize + wxMemoryBufferData::BLOCK_SIZE);
+            if ( !m_data )
+            {
+                free(dataOld);
+            }
+
+            m_size = newSize + wxMemoryBufferData::BLOCK_SIZE;
+        }
+    }
+
+    void IncRef() { m_ref += 1; }
+    void DecRef()
+    {
+        m_ref -= 1;
+        if (m_ref == 0)  // are there no more references?
+            delete this;
+    }
+
+
+    // the buffer containing the data
+    void  *m_data;
+
+    // the size of the buffer
+    size_t m_size;
+
+    // the amount of data currently in the buffer
+    size_t m_len;
+
+    // the reference count
+    size_t m_ref;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxMemoryBufferData)
+};
+
+
+class wxMemoryBuffer
+{
+public:
+    // ctor and dtor
+    wxMemoryBuffer(size_t size = wxMemoryBufferData::BLOCK_SIZE)
+    {
+        m_bufdata = new wxMemoryBufferData(size);
+        m_bufdata->IncRef();
+    }
+
+    ~wxMemoryBuffer() { m_bufdata->DecRef(); }
+
+
+    // copy and assignment
+    wxMemoryBuffer(const wxMemoryBuffer& src)
+        : m_bufdata(src.m_bufdata)
+    {
+        m_bufdata->IncRef();
+    }
+
+    wxMemoryBuffer& operator=(const wxMemoryBuffer& src)
+    {
+        m_bufdata->DecRef();
+        m_bufdata = src.m_bufdata;
+        m_bufdata->IncRef();
+        return *this;
+    }
+
+
+    // Accessors
+    void  *GetData() const    { return m_bufdata->m_data; }
+    size_t GetBufSize() const { return m_bufdata->m_size; }
+    size_t GetDataLen() const { return m_bufdata->m_len; }
+
+    void   SetBufSize(size_t size) { m_bufdata->ResizeIfNeeded(size); }
+    void   SetDataLen(size_t len)
+    {
+        wxASSERT(len <= m_bufdata->m_size);
+        m_bufdata->m_len = len;
+    }
+
+    // Ensure the buffer is big enough and return a pointer to it
+    void *GetWriteBuf(size_t sizeNeeded)
+    {
+        m_bufdata->ResizeIfNeeded(sizeNeeded);
+        return m_bufdata->m_data;
+    }
+
+    // Update the length after the write
+    void  UngetWriteBuf(size_t sizeUsed) { SetDataLen(sizeUsed); }
+
+    // Like the above, but appends to the buffer
+    void *GetAppendBuf(size_t sizeNeeded)
+    {
+        m_bufdata->ResizeIfNeeded(m_bufdata->m_len + sizeNeeded);
+        return (char*)m_bufdata->m_data + m_bufdata->m_len;
+    }
+
+    // Update the length after the append
+    void  UngetAppendBuf(size_t sizeUsed)
+    {
+        SetDataLen(m_bufdata->m_len + sizeUsed);
+    }
+
+    // Other ways to append to the buffer
+    void  AppendByte(char data)
+    {
+        wxCHECK_RET( m_bufdata->m_data, _T("invalid wxMemoryBuffer") );
+
+        m_bufdata->ResizeIfNeeded(m_bufdata->m_len + 1);
+        *(((char*)m_bufdata->m_data) + m_bufdata->m_len) = data;
+        m_bufdata->m_len += 1;
+    }
+
+    void  AppendData(void* data, size_t len)
+    {
+        memcpy(GetAppendBuf(len), data, len);
+        UngetAppendBuf(len);
+    }
+
+    operator const char *() const { return (const char*)GetData(); }
+
+private:
+    wxMemoryBufferData*  m_bufdata;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// template class for any kind of data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// TODO
+
+#endif // _WX_BUFFER_H

include/wx/build.h

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/build.h
+// Purpose:     wxBuildOptions class declaration
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     07.05.02
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2002 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_BUILD_H_
+#define _WX_BUILD_H_
+
+#include "wx/version.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAppConsole;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBuildOptions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class wxBuildOptions
+{
+public:
+    // the ctor must be inline to get the compilation settings of the code
+    // which included this header
+    wxBuildOptions()
+    {
+        // debug/release
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+        m_isDebug = TRUE;
+#else
+        m_isDebug = FALSE;
+#endif
+
+        // version: we don't test the micro version as hopefully changes
+        // between 2 micro versions don't result in fatal compatibility
+        // problems
+        m_verMaj = wxMAJOR_VERSION;
+        m_verMin = wxMINOR_VERSION;
+    }
+
+private:
+    // the version
+    int m_verMaj,
+        m_verMin;
+
+    // compiled with __WXDEBUG__?
+    bool m_isDebug;
+
+    // actually only CheckBuildOptions() should be our friend but well...
+    friend class wxAppConsole;
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_BUILD_H_
+

include/wx/busyinfo.h

@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        busyinfo.h
+// Purpose:     Information window (when app is busy)
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef __INFOWIN_H__
+#define __INFOWIN_H__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "busyinfo.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/wxprec.h"
+
+#ifdef __BORLANDC__
+#pragma hdrstop
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/frame.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_BUSYINFO
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxInfoFrame : public wxFrame
+{
+public:
+    wxInfoFrame(wxWindow *parent, const wxString& message);
+};
+
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBusyInfo
+//                  Displays progress information
+//                  Can be used in exactly same way as wxBusyCursor
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBusyInfo : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxBusyInfo(const wxString& message, wxWindow *parent = NULL);
+
+    virtual ~wxBusyInfo();
+
+private:
+    wxInfoFrame *m_InfoFrame;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxBusyInfo)
+};
+
+
+#endif
+
+#endif

include/wx/button.h

@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/button.h
+// Purpose:     wxButtonBase class
+// Author:      Vadim Zetlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     15.08.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zetlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_BUTTON
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxButton flags
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// These two flags are obsolete
+#define wxBU_NOAUTODRAW      0x0000
+#define wxBU_AUTODRAW        0x0004
+
+// These flags affect label alignment
+#define wxBU_LEFT            0x0040
+#define wxBU_TOP             0x0080
+#define wxBU_RIGHT           0x0100
+#define wxBU_BOTTOM          0x0200
+
+// by default, the buttons will be created with some (system dependent)
+// minimal size to make them look nicer, giving this style will make them as
+// small as possible
+#define wxBU_EXACTFIT        0x0001
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmap;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxButtonNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxButton: a push button
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxButtonBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // show the image in the button in addition to the label
+    virtual void SetImageLabel(const wxBitmap& WXUNUSED(bitmap)) { }
+
+    // set the margins around the image
+    virtual void SetImageMargins(wxCoord WXUNUSED(x), wxCoord WXUNUSED(y)) { }
+
+    // this wxButton method is called when the button becomes the default one
+    // on its panel
+    virtual void SetDefault() { }
+
+    // returns the default button size for this platform
+    static wxSize GetDefaultSize();
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/button.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/button.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_BUTTON
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_

include/wx/calctrl.h

@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/calctrl.h
+// Purpose:     date-picker control
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29.12.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/*
+   TODO
+
+   1. implement multiple selections for date ranges
+   2. background bitmap for the calendar?
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WX_CALCTRL_H_
+#define _WX_CALCTRL_H_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_CALENDARCTRL
+
+#include "wx/datetime.h"
+#include "wx/colour.h"
+#include "wx/font.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCalendarCtrl flags
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum
+{
+    // show Sunday as the first day of the week (default)
+    wxCAL_SUNDAY_FIRST               = 0x0000,
+
+    // show Monder as the first day of the week
+    wxCAL_MONDAY_FIRST               = 0x0001,
+
+    // highlight holidays
+    wxCAL_SHOW_HOLIDAYS              = 0x0002,
+
+    // disable the year change control, show only the month change one
+    wxCAL_NO_YEAR_CHANGE             = 0x0004,
+
+    // don't allow changing neither month nor year (implies
+    // wxCAL_NO_YEAR_CHANGE)
+    wxCAL_NO_MONTH_CHANGE            = 0x000c,
+
+    // use MS-style month-selection instead of combo-spin combination
+    wxCAL_SEQUENTIAL_MONTH_SELECTION = 0x0010,
+
+    // show the neighbouring weeks in the previous and next month
+    wxCAL_SHOW_SURROUNDING_WEEKS     = 0x0020
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// return values for the HitTest() method
+enum wxCalendarHitTestResult
+{
+    wxCAL_HITTEST_NOWHERE,      // outside of anything
+    wxCAL_HITTEST_HEADER,       // on the header (weekdays)
+    wxCAL_HITTEST_DAY,          // on a day in the calendar
+    wxCAL_HITTEST_INCMONTH,
+    wxCAL_HITTEST_DECMONTH,
+    wxCAL_HITTEST_SURROUNDING_WEEK
+};
+
+// border types for a date
+enum wxCalendarDateBorder
+{
+    wxCAL_BORDER_NONE,          // no border (default)
+    wxCAL_BORDER_SQUARE,        // a rectangular border
+    wxCAL_BORDER_ROUND          // a round border
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCalendarDateAttr: custom attributes for a calendar date
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCalendarDateAttr
+{
+#if !defined(__VISAGECPP__)
+protected:
+    // This has to be before the use of Init(), for MSVC++ 1.5
+    // But dorks up Visualage!
+    void Init(wxCalendarDateBorder border = wxCAL_BORDER_NONE)
+    {
+        m_border = border;
+        m_holiday = FALSE;
+    }
+#endif
+public:
+    // ctors
+    wxCalendarDateAttr() { Init(); }
+    wxCalendarDateAttr(const wxColour& colText,
+                       const wxColour& colBack = wxNullColour,
+                       const wxColour& colBorder = wxNullColour,
+                       const wxFont& font = wxNullFont,
+                       wxCalendarDateBorder border = wxCAL_BORDER_NONE)
+        : m_colText(colText), m_colBack(colBack),
+          m_colBorder(colBorder), m_font(font)
+    {
+        Init(border);
+    }
+    wxCalendarDateAttr(wxCalendarDateBorder border,
+                       const wxColour& colBorder = wxNullColour)
+        : m_colBorder(colBorder)
+    {
+        Init(border);
+    }
+
+    // setters
+    void SetTextColour(const wxColour& colText) { m_colText = colText; }
+    void SetBackgroundColour(const wxColour& colBack) { m_colBack = colBack; }
+    void SetBorderColour(const wxColour& col) { m_colBorder = col; }
+    void SetFont(const wxFont& font) { m_font = font; }
+    void SetBorder(wxCalendarDateBorder border) { m_border = border; }
+    void SetHoliday(bool holiday) { m_holiday = holiday; }
+
+    // accessors
+    bool HasTextColour() const { return m_colText.Ok(); }
+    bool HasBackgroundColour() const { return m_colBack.Ok(); }
+    bool HasBorderColour() const { return m_colBorder.Ok(); }
+    bool HasFont() const { return m_font.Ok(); }
+    bool HasBorder() const { return m_border != wxCAL_BORDER_NONE; }
+
+    bool IsHoliday() const { return m_holiday; }
+
+    const wxColour& GetTextColour() const { return m_colText; }
+    const wxColour& GetBackgroundColour() const { return m_colBack; }
+    const wxColour& GetBorderColour() const { return m_colBorder; }
+    const wxFont& GetFont() const { return m_font; }
+    wxCalendarDateBorder GetBorder() const { return m_border; }
+#if defined(__VISAGECPP__)
+protected:
+    // This has to be here for VisualAge
+    void Init(wxCalendarDateBorder border = wxCAL_BORDER_NONE)
+    {
+        m_border = border;
+        m_holiday = FALSE;
+    }
+#endif
+private:
+    wxColour m_colText,
+             m_colBack,
+             m_colBorder;
+    wxFont   m_font;
+    wxCalendarDateBorder m_border;
+    bool m_holiday;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCalendarCtrl events
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCalendarCtrl;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCalendarEvent : public wxCommandEvent
+{
+friend class wxCalendarCtrl;
+public:
+    wxCalendarEvent() { Init(); }
+    wxCalendarEvent(wxCalendarCtrl *cal, wxEventType type);
+
+    const wxDateTime& GetDate() const { return m_date; }
+    wxDateTime::WeekDay GetWeekDay() const { return m_wday; }
+
+protected:
+    void Init();
+
+private:
+    wxDateTime m_date;
+    wxDateTime::WeekDay m_wday;
+
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxCalendarEvent)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCalendarCtrl
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// so far we only have a generic version, so keep it simple
+#include "wx/generic/calctrl.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// calendar event types and macros for handling them
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+BEGIN_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_CALENDAR_SEL_CHANGED, 950)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_CALENDAR_DAY_CHANGED, 951)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_CALENDAR_MONTH_CHANGED, 952)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_CALENDAR_YEAR_CHANGED, 953)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_CALENDAR_DOUBLECLICKED, 954)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_CALENDAR_WEEKDAY_CLICKED, 955)
+END_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+
+typedef void (wxEvtHandler::*wxCalendarEventFunction)(wxCalendarEvent&);
+
+#define EVT_CALENDAR(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(wxEVT_CALENDAR_DOUBLECLICKED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) (wxCalendarEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL),
+#define EVT_CALENDAR_SEL_CHANGED(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(wxEVT_CALENDAR_SEL_CHANGED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) (wxCalendarEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL),
+#define EVT_CALENDAR_DAY(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(wxEVT_CALENDAR_DAY_CHANGED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) (wxCalendarEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL),
+#define EVT_CALENDAR_MONTH(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(wxEVT_CALENDAR_MONTH_CHANGED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) (wxCalendarEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL),
+#define EVT_CALENDAR_YEAR(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(wxEVT_CALENDAR_YEAR_CHANGED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) (wxCalendarEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL),
+#define EVT_CALENDAR_WEEKDAY_CLICKED(id, fn) DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY(wxEVT_CALENDAR_WEEKDAY_CLICKED, id, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxCommandEventFunction) (wxCalendarEventFunction) & fn, (wxObject *) NULL),
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CALENDARCTRL
+
+#endif // _WX_CALCTRL_H_
+

include/wx/caret.h

@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        caret.h
+// Purpose:     wxCaretBase class - the interface of wxCaret
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     23.05.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CARET_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CARET_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_CARET
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "caret.h"
+#endif
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// forward declarations
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindow;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindowBase;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers we have to include
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/gdicmn.h"  // for wxPoint, wxSize
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// A caret is a blinking cursor showing the position where the typed text will
+// appear. It can be either a solid block or a custom bitmap (TODO)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCaretBase
+{
+public:
+    // ctors
+    // -----
+        // default - use Create
+    wxCaretBase() { Init(); }
+        // create the caret of given (in pixels) width and height and associate
+        // with the given window
+    wxCaretBase(wxWindowBase *window, int width, int height)
+    {
+        Init();
+
+        (void)Create(window, width, height);
+    }
+        // same as above
+    wxCaretBase(wxWindowBase *window, const wxSize& size)
+    {
+        Init();
+
+        (void)Create(window, size);
+    }
+
+    // Create() functions - same as ctor but returns the success code
+    // --------------------------------------------------------------
+
+        // same as ctor
+    bool Create(wxWindowBase *window, int width, int height)
+        { return DoCreate(window, width, height); }
+        // same as ctor
+    bool Create(wxWindowBase *window, const wxSize& size)
+        { return DoCreate(window, size.x, size.y); }
+
+    // accessors
+    // ---------
+
+        // is the caret valid?
+    bool IsOk() const { return m_width != 0 && m_height != 0; }
+
+        // is the caret currently shown?
+    bool IsVisible() const { return m_countVisible > 0; }
+
+        // get the caret position
+    void GetPosition(int *x, int *y) const
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_x;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_y;
+    }
+    wxPoint GetPosition() const { return wxPoint(m_x, m_y); }
+
+        // get the caret size
+    void GetSize(int *width, int *height) const
+    {
+        if ( width ) *width = m_width;
+        if ( height ) *height = m_height;
+    }
+    wxSize GetSize() const { return wxSize(m_width, m_height); }
+
+        // get the window we're associated with
+    wxWindow *GetWindow() const { return (wxWindow *)m_window; }
+
+        // change the size of the caret
+    void SetSize(int width, int height) {
+        m_width = width;
+        m_height = height;
+        DoSize();
+    }
+    void SetSize(const wxSize& size) { SetSize(size.x, size.y); }
+
+
+    // operations
+    // ----------
+
+        // move the caret to given position (in logical coords)
+    void Move(int x, int y) { m_x = x; m_y = y; DoMove(); }
+    void Move(const wxPoint& pt) { m_x = pt.x; m_y = pt.y; DoMove(); }
+
+        // show/hide the caret (should be called by wxWindow when needed):
+        // Show() must be called as many times as Hide() + 1 to make the caret
+        // visible
+    virtual void Show(bool show = TRUE)
+        {
+            if ( show )
+            {
+                if ( m_countVisible++ == 0 )
+                    DoShow();
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                if ( --m_countVisible == 0 )
+                    DoHide();
+            }
+        }
+    virtual void Hide() { Show(FALSE); }
+
+        // blink time is measured in milliseconds and is the time elapsed
+        // between 2 inversions of the caret (blink time of the caret is common
+        // to all carets in the Universe, so these functions are static)
+    static int GetBlinkTime();
+    static void SetBlinkTime(int milliseconds);
+
+    // implementation from now on
+    // --------------------------
+
+    // these functions should be called by wxWindow when the window gets/loses
+    // the focus - we create/show and hide/destroy the caret here
+    virtual void OnSetFocus() { }
+    virtual void OnKillFocus() { }
+
+protected:
+    // these functions may be overriden in the derived classes, but they
+    // should call the base class version first
+    virtual bool DoCreate(wxWindowBase *window, int width, int height)
+    {
+        m_window = window;
+        m_width = width;
+        m_height = height;
+
+        return TRUE;
+    }
+
+    // pure virtuals to implement in the derived class
+    virtual void DoShow() = 0;
+    virtual void DoHide() = 0;
+    virtual void DoMove() = 0;
+    virtual void DoSize() { }
+
+    // the common initialization
+    void Init()
+    {
+        m_window = (wxWindowBase *)NULL;
+        m_x = m_y = 0;
+        m_width = m_height = 0;
+        m_countVisible = 0;
+    }
+
+    // the size of the caret
+    int m_width, m_height;
+
+    // the position of the caret
+    int m_x, m_y;
+
+    // the window we're associated with
+    wxWindowBase *m_window;
+
+    // visibility count: the caret is visible only if it's positive
+    int m_countVisible;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxCaretBase)
+};
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// now include the real thing
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/caret.h"
+#else
+    #include "wx/generic/caret.h"
+#endif // platform
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCaretSuspend: a simple class which hides the caret in its ctor and
+// restores it in the dtor, this should be used when drawing on the screen to
+// avoid overdrawing the caret
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCaretSuspend
+{
+public:
+    wxCaretSuspend(wxWindow *win)
+    {
+        m_caret = win->GetCaret();
+        if ( m_caret )
+            m_caret->Hide();
+    }
+
+    ~wxCaretSuspend()
+    {
+        if ( m_caret )
+            m_caret->Show();
+    }
+
+private:
+    wxCaret *m_caret;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxCaretSuspend)
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CARET
+
+#endif // _WX_CARET_H_BASE_
+

include/wx/checkbox.h

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/checkbox.h
+// Purpose:     wxCheckBox class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     07.09.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_CHECKBOX
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxCheckBoxNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCheckBox: a control which shows a label and a box which may be checked
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCheckBoxBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    // set/get the checked status of the listbox
+    virtual void SetValue(bool value) = 0;
+    virtual bool GetValue() const = 0;
+
+    bool IsChecked() const { return GetValue(); }
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/checkbox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/checkbox.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CHECKBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_

include/wx/checklst.h

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/checklst.h
+// Purpose:     wxCheckListBox class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     12.09.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_CHECKLISTBOX
+
+#include "wx/listbox.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCheckListBox: a listbox whose items may be checked
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCheckListBoxBase : public wxListBox
+{
+public:
+    // check list box specific methods
+    virtual bool IsChecked(size_t item) const = 0;
+    virtual void Check(size_t item, bool check = TRUE) = 0;
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/checklst.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/checklst.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CHECKLISTBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_

include/wx/choicdlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+#ifndef _WX_CHOICDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CHOICDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/generic/choicdgg.h"
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CHOICDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/choice.h

@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/choice.h
+// Purpose:     wxChoice class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "choicebase.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_CHOICE
+
+#include "wx/ctrlsub.h"     // the base class
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxChoiceNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxChoice allows to select one of a non-modifiable list of strings
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxChoiceBase : public wxControlWithItems
+{
+public:
+    // all generic methods are in wxControlWithItems
+    virtual ~wxChoiceBase();
+
+    // single selection logic
+    virtual void SetSelection(int n) = 0;
+    virtual bool SetStringSelection(const wxString& s);
+
+    // don't override this
+    virtual void Select(int n) { SetSelection(n); }
+
+    // set/get the number of columns in the control (as they're not supported on
+    // most platforms, they do nothing by default)
+    virtual void SetColumns(int WXUNUSED(n) = 1 ) { }
+    virtual int GetColumns() const { return 1 ; }
+
+    // emulate selecting the item event.GetInt()
+    void Command(wxCommandEvent& event);
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-dependent class definition
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/choice.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/choice.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CHOICE
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_

include/wx/clipbrd.h

@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/clipbrd.h
+// Purpose:     wxClipboad class and clipboard functions
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     19.10.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows Team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "clipboardbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_CLIPBOARD
+
+
+#include "wx/object.h"
+#include "wx/wxchar.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataFormat;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObject;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxClipboard represents the system clipboard. Normally, you should use
+// wxTheClipboard which is a global pointer to the (unique) clipboard.
+//
+// Clipboard can be used to copy data to/paste data from. It works together
+// with wxDataObject.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxClipboardBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxClipboardBase();
+
+    // open the clipboard before Add/SetData() and GetData()
+    virtual bool Open() = 0;
+
+    // close the clipboard after Add/SetData() and GetData()
+    virtual void Close() = 0;
+
+    // query whether the clipboard is opened
+    virtual bool IsOpened() const = 0;
+
+    // add to the clipboard data
+    //
+    // NB: the clipboard owns the pointer and will delete it, so data must be
+    //     allocated on the heap
+    virtual bool AddData( wxDataObject *data ) = 0;
+
+    // set the clipboard data, this is the same as Clear() followed by
+    // AddData()
+    virtual bool SetData( wxDataObject *data ) = 0;
+
+    // ask if data in correct format is available
+    virtual bool IsSupported( const wxDataFormat& format ) = 0;
+
+    // fill data with data on the clipboard (if available)
+    virtual bool GetData( wxDataObject& data ) = 0;
+    
+    // clears wxTheClipboard and the system's clipboard if possible
+    virtual void Clear() = 0;
+
+    // flushes the clipboard: this means that the data which is currently on
+    // clipboard will stay available even after the application exits (possibly
+    // eating memory), otherwise the clipboard will be emptied on exit
+    virtual bool Flush() { return FALSE; }
+
+    // X11 has two clipboards which get selected by this call. Empty on MSW.
+    virtual void UsePrimarySelection( bool WXUNUSED(primary) = FALSE ) { }
+
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform-specific class declaration
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/x11/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/clipbrd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/clipbrd.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// globals
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// The global clipboard object
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxClipboard *) wxTheClipboard;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// helpful class for opening the clipboard and automatically closing it
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxClipboardLocker
+{
+public:
+    wxClipboardLocker(wxClipboard *clipboard = (wxClipboard *)NULL)
+    {
+        m_clipboard = clipboard ? clipboard : wxTheClipboard;
+        if ( m_clipboard )
+        {
+            m_clipboard->Open();
+        }
+    }
+
+    bool operator!() const { return !m_clipboard->IsOpened(); }
+
+    ~wxClipboardLocker()
+    {
+        if ( m_clipboard )
+        {
+            m_clipboard->Close();
+        }
+    }
+
+private:
+    wxClipboard *m_clipboard;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxClipboardLocker)
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CLIPBOARD
+
+#endif // _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_

include/wx/clntdata.h

@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/clntdata.h
+// Purpose:     A mixin class for holding a wxClientData or void pointer
+// Author:      Robin Dunn
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     9-Oct-2001
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CLNTDATAH__
+#define _WX_CLNTDATAH__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "clntdata.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// what kind of client data do we have?
+enum wxClientDataType
+{
+    wxClientData_None,    // we don't know yet because we don't have it at all
+    wxClientData_Object,  // our client data is typed and we own it
+    wxClientData_Void     // client data is untyped and we don't own it
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxClientData
+{
+public:
+    wxClientData() { }
+    virtual ~wxClientData() { }
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxStringClientData : public wxClientData
+{
+public:
+    wxStringClientData() : m_data() { }
+    wxStringClientData( const wxString &data ) : m_data(data) { }
+    void SetData( const wxString &data ) { m_data = data; }
+    const wxString& GetData() const { return m_data; }
+
+private:
+    wxString  m_data;
+};
+
+// This class is a mixin that provides storage and management of "client
+// data."  The client data stored can either be a pointer to a wxClientData
+// object in which case it is managed by the container (i.e. it will delete
+// the data when it's destroyed) or an untyped pointer which won't be deleted
+// by the container - but not both of them
+//
+// NOTE:  This functionality is currently duplicated in wxEvtHandler in order
+//        to avoid having more than one vtable in that class hierarchy.
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxClientDataContainer
+{
+public:
+    wxClientDataContainer();
+    virtual ~wxClientDataContainer();
+
+    void SetClientObject( wxClientData *data ) { DoSetClientObject(data); }
+    wxClientData *GetClientObject() const { return DoGetClientObject(); }
+
+    void SetClientData( void *data ) { DoSetClientData(data); }
+    void *GetClientData() const { return DoGetClientData(); }
+
+protected:
+    // The user data: either an object which will be deleted by the container
+    // when it's deleted or some raw pointer which we do nothing with. Only
+    // one type of data can be used with the given window, i.e. you cannot set
+    // the void data and then associate the container with wxClientData or vice
+    // versa.
+    union
+    {
+        wxClientData *m_clientObject;
+        void         *m_clientData;
+    };
+
+    // client data accessors
+    virtual void DoSetClientObject( wxClientData *data );
+    virtual wxClientData *DoGetClientObject() const;
+
+    virtual void DoSetClientData( void *data );
+    virtual void *DoGetClientData() const;
+
+    // what kind of data do we have?
+    wxClientDataType m_clientDataType;
+
+};
+
+// not Motif-specific, but currently used only under Motif
+#ifdef __WXMOTIF__
+
+#include <wx/vector.h>
+
+struct WXDLLEXPORT wxClientDataDictionaryPair
+{
+    wxClientDataDictionaryPair( size_t idx ) : index( idx ), data( 0 ) { }
+
+    size_t index;
+    wxClientData* data;
+};
+
+WX_DECLARE_VECTOR(wxClientDataDictionaryPair,wxClientDataDictionaryPairVector);
+
+// this class is used internally to maintain the association between items
+// of (some subclasses of) wxControlWithItems and their client data
+// NOTE: this class does not keep track of whether it contains
+// wxClientData or void*. The client must ensure that
+// it does not contain a mix of the two, and that
+// DestroyData is called if it contains wxClientData
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxClientDataDictionary
+{
+public:
+    wxClientDataDictionary() {};
+
+    // deletes all the data
+    void DestroyData()
+    {
+        for( size_t i = 0, end = m_vec.size(); i != end; ++i )
+            delete m_vec[i].data;
+        m_vec.clear();
+    }
+
+    // if data for the given index is not present, add it,
+    // if it is present, delete the old data and replace it with
+    // the new one
+    void Set( size_t index, wxClientData* data, bool doDelete )
+    {
+        size_t ptr = Find( index );
+
+        if( !data )
+        {
+            if( ptr == m_vec.size() ) return;
+            if( doDelete )
+                delete m_vec[ptr].data;
+            m_vec.erase( ptr );
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            if( ptr == m_vec.size() )
+            {
+                m_vec.push_back( wxClientDataDictionaryPair( index ) );
+                ptr = m_vec.size() - 1;
+            }
+
+            if( doDelete )
+                delete m_vec[ptr].data;
+            m_vec[ptr].data = data;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // get the data associated with the given index,
+    // return 0 if not found
+    wxClientData* Get( size_t index ) const
+    {
+        size_t it = Find( index );
+        if( it == m_vec.size() ) return 0;
+        return (wxClientData*)m_vec[it].data; // const cast
+    }
+
+    // delete the data associated with the given index
+    // it also decreases by one the indices of all the elements
+    // with an index greater than the given index
+    void Delete( size_t index, bool doDelete )
+    {
+        size_t todel = m_vec.size();
+
+        for( size_t i = 0, end = m_vec.size(); i != end; ++i )
+        {
+            if( m_vec[i].index == index )
+                todel = i;
+            else if( m_vec[i].index > index )
+                --(m_vec[i].index);
+        }
+
+        if( todel != m_vec.size() )
+        {
+            if( doDelete )
+                delete m_vec[todel].data;
+            m_vec.erase( todel );
+        }
+    }
+private:
+    // returns MyVec.size() if not found
+    size_t Find( size_t index ) const
+    {
+        for( size_t i = 0, end = m_vec.size(); i != end; ++i )
+        {
+            if( m_vec[i].index == index )
+                return i;
+        }
+
+        return m_vec.size();
+    }
+
+    wxClientDataDictionaryPairVector m_vec;
+};
+
+#endif // __WXMOTIF__
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#endif
+

include/wx/cmdline.h

@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/cmdline.h
+// Purpose:     wxCmdLineParser and related classes for parsing the command
+//              line options
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     04.01.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CMDLINE_H_
+#define _WX_CMDLINE_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "cmdline.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDateTime;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// by default, options are optional (sic) and each call to AddParam() allows
+// one more parameter - this may be changed by giving non-default flags to it
+enum
+{
+    wxCMD_LINE_OPTION_MANDATORY = 0x01, // this option must be given
+    wxCMD_LINE_PARAM_OPTIONAL   = 0x02, // the parameter may be omitted
+    wxCMD_LINE_PARAM_MULTIPLE   = 0x04, // the parameter may be repeated
+    wxCMD_LINE_OPTION_HELP      = 0x08, // this option is a help request
+    wxCMD_LINE_NEEDS_SEPARATOR  = 0x10  // must have sep before the value
+};
+
+// an option value or parameter may be a string (the most common case), a
+// number or a date
+enum wxCmdLineParamType
+{
+    wxCMD_LINE_VAL_STRING,  // should be 0 (default)
+    wxCMD_LINE_VAL_NUMBER,
+    wxCMD_LINE_VAL_DATE,
+    wxCMD_LINE_VAL_NONE
+};
+
+// for constructing the cmd line description using Init()
+enum wxCmdLineEntryType
+{
+    wxCMD_LINE_SWITCH,
+    wxCMD_LINE_OPTION,
+    wxCMD_LINE_PARAM,
+    wxCMD_LINE_NONE         // to terminate the list
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCmdLineEntryDesc is a description of one command line
+// switch/option/parameter
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct wxCmdLineEntryDesc
+{
+    wxCmdLineEntryType kind;
+    const wxChar *shortName;
+    const wxChar *longName;
+    const wxChar *description;
+    wxCmdLineParamType type;
+    int flags;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCmdLineParser is a class for parsing command line.
+//
+// It has the following features:
+//
+// 1. distinguishes options, switches and parameters; allows option grouping
+// 2. allows both short and long options
+// 3. automatically generates the usage message from the cmd line description
+// 4. does type checks on the options values (number, date, ...)
+//
+// To use it you should:
+//
+// 1. construct it giving it the cmd line to parse and optionally its desc
+// 2. construct the cmd line description using AddXXX() if not done in (1)
+// 3. call Parse()
+// 4. use GetXXX() to retrieve the parsed info
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCmdLineParser
+{
+public:
+    // ctors and initializers
+    // ----------------------
+
+    // default ctor or ctor giving the cmd line in either Unix or Win form
+    wxCmdLineParser() { Init(); }
+    wxCmdLineParser(int argc, wxChar **argv) { Init(); SetCmdLine(argc, argv); }
+    wxCmdLineParser(const wxString& cmdline) { Init(); SetCmdLine(cmdline); }
+
+    // the same as above, but also gives the cmd line description - otherwise,
+    // use AddXXX() later
+    wxCmdLineParser(const wxCmdLineEntryDesc *desc)
+        { Init(); SetDesc(desc); }
+    wxCmdLineParser(const wxCmdLineEntryDesc *desc, int argc, wxChar **argv)
+        { Init(); SetCmdLine(argc, argv); SetDesc(desc); }
+    wxCmdLineParser(const wxCmdLineEntryDesc *desc, const wxString& cmdline)
+        { Init(); SetCmdLine(cmdline); SetDesc(desc); }
+
+    // set cmd line to parse after using one of the ctors which don't do it
+    void SetCmdLine(int argc, wxChar **argv);
+    void SetCmdLine(const wxString& cmdline);
+
+    // not virtual, don't use this class polymorphically
+    ~wxCmdLineParser();
+
+    // set different parser options
+    // ----------------------------
+
+    // by default, '-' is switch char under Unix, '-' or '/' under Win:
+    // switchChars contains all characters with which an option or switch may
+    // start
+    void SetSwitchChars(const wxString& switchChars);
+
+    // long options are not POSIX-compliant, this option allows to disable them
+    void EnableLongOptions(bool enable = TRUE);
+    void DisableLongOptions() { EnableLongOptions(FALSE); }
+
+    bool AreLongOptionsEnabled();
+
+    // extra text may be shown by Usage() method if set by this function
+    void SetLogo(const wxString& logo);
+
+    // construct the cmd line description
+    // ----------------------------------
+
+    // take the cmd line description from the wxCMD_LINE_NONE terminated table
+    void SetDesc(const wxCmdLineEntryDesc *desc);
+
+    // a switch: i.e. an option without value
+    void AddSwitch(const wxString& name, const wxString& lng = wxEmptyString,
+                   const wxString& desc = wxEmptyString,
+                   int flags = 0);
+
+    // an option taking a value of the given type
+    void AddOption(const wxString& name, const wxString& lng = wxEmptyString,
+                   const wxString& desc = wxEmptyString,
+                   wxCmdLineParamType type = wxCMD_LINE_VAL_STRING,
+                   int flags = 0);
+
+    // a parameter
+    void AddParam(const wxString& desc = wxEmptyString,
+                  wxCmdLineParamType type = wxCMD_LINE_VAL_STRING,
+                  int flags = 0);
+
+    // actions
+    // -------
+
+    // parse the command line, return 0 if ok, -1 if "-h" or "--help" option
+    // was encountered and the help message was given or a positive value if a
+    // syntax error occured
+    //
+    // if showUsage is true, Usage() is called in case of syntax error or if
+    // help was requested
+    int Parse(bool showUsage = TRUE);
+
+    // give the usage message describing all program options
+    void Usage();
+
+    // get the command line arguments
+    // ------------------------------
+
+    // returns TRUE if the given switch was found
+    bool Found(const wxString& name) const;
+
+    // returns TRUE if an option taking a string value was found and stores the
+    // value in the provided pointer
+    bool Found(const wxString& name, wxString *value) const;
+
+    // returns TRUE if an option taking an integer value was found and stores
+    // the value in the provided pointer
+    bool Found(const wxString& name, long *value) const;
+
+#if wxUSE_DATETIME
+    // returns TRUE if an option taking a date value was found and stores the
+    // value in the provided pointer
+    bool Found(const wxString& name, wxDateTime *value) const;
+#endif // wxUSE_DATETIME
+
+    // gets the number of parameters found
+    size_t GetParamCount() const;
+
+    // gets the value of Nth parameter (as string only for now)
+    wxString GetParam(size_t n = 0u) const;
+
+    // Resets switches and options
+    void Reset();
+
+    // break down the command line in arguments
+    static wxArrayString ConvertStringToArgs(const wxChar *cmdline);
+
+private:
+    // get usage string
+    wxString GetUsageString();
+
+    // common part of all ctors
+    void Init();
+
+    struct wxCmdLineParserData *m_data;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxCmdLineParser)
+};
+
+#else // !wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER
+
+// this function is always available (even if !wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER) because it
+// is used by wxWin itself under Windows
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCmdLineParser
+{
+public:
+    static wxArrayString ConvertStringToArgs(const wxChar *cmdline);
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER/!wxUSE_CMDLINE_PARSER
+
+#endif // _WX_CMDLINE_H_
+

include/wx/cmdproc.h

@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/cmdproc.h
+// Purpose:     undo/redo capable command processing framework
+// Author:      Julian Smart (extracted from docview.h by VZ)
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     05.11.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CMDPROC_H_
+#define _WX_CMDPROC_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "cmdproc.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/object.h"
+#include "wx/list.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenu;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCommand: a single command capable of performing itself
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCommand : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxCommand(bool canUndoIt = FALSE, const wxString& name = wxT(""));
+    ~wxCommand();
+
+    // Override this to perform a command
+    virtual bool Do() = 0;
+
+    // Override this to undo a command
+    virtual bool Undo() = 0;
+
+    virtual bool CanUndo() const { return m_canUndo; }
+    virtual wxString GetName() const { return m_commandName; }
+
+protected:
+    bool     m_canUndo;
+    wxString m_commandName;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxCommand)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCommandProcessor: wxCommand manager
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCommandProcessor : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    // if max number of commands is -1, it is unlimited
+    wxCommandProcessor(int maxCommands = -1);
+    virtual ~wxCommandProcessor();
+
+    // Pass a command to the processor. The processor calls Do(); if
+    // successful, is appended to the command history unless storeIt is FALSE.
+    virtual bool Submit(wxCommand *command, bool storeIt = TRUE);
+
+    // just store the command without executing it
+    virtual void Store(wxCommand *command);
+
+    virtual bool Undo();
+    virtual bool Redo();
+    virtual bool CanUndo() const;
+    virtual bool CanRedo() const;
+
+    // Initialises the current command and menu strings.
+    virtual void Initialize();
+
+    // Sets the Undo/Redo menu strings for the current menu.
+    virtual void SetMenuStrings();
+
+    // Gets the current Undo menu label.
+    wxString GetUndoMenuLabel() const;
+
+    // Gets the current Undo menu label.
+    wxString GetRedoMenuLabel() const;
+
+#if wxUSE_MENUS
+    // Call this to manage an edit menu.
+    void SetEditMenu(wxMenu *menu) { m_commandEditMenu = menu; }
+    wxMenu *GetEditMenu() const { return m_commandEditMenu; }
+#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
+
+    // command list access
+    wxList& GetCommands() const { return (wxList&) m_commands; }
+    wxCommand *GetCurrentCommand() const
+    {
+        return (wxCommand *)(m_currentCommand ? m_currentCommand->GetData() : NULL);
+    }
+    int GetMaxCommands() const { return m_maxNoCommands; }
+    virtual void ClearCommands();
+
+    // By default, the accelerators are "\tCtrl+Z" and "\tCtrl+Y"
+    const wxString& GetUndoAccelerator() const { return m_undoAccelerator; }
+    const wxString& GetRedoAccelerator() const { return m_redoAccelerator; }
+
+    void SetUndoAccelerator(const wxString& accel) { m_undoAccelerator = accel; }
+    void SetRedoAccelerator(const wxString& accel) { m_redoAccelerator = accel; }
+
+protected:
+    // for further flexibility, command processor doesn't call wxCommand::Do()
+    // and Undo() directly but uses these functions which can be overridden in
+    // the derived class
+    virtual bool DoCommand(wxCommand& cmd);
+    virtual bool UndoCommand(wxCommand& cmd);
+
+    int           m_maxNoCommands;
+    wxList        m_commands;
+    wxNode*       m_currentCommand;
+
+#if wxUSE_MENUS
+    wxMenu*       m_commandEditMenu;
+#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
+
+    wxString      m_undoAccelerator;
+    wxString      m_redoAccelerator;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxCommandProcessor)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxCommandProcessor)
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_CMDPROC_H_

include/wx/cmndata.h

@@ -0,0 +1,455 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        cmndata.h
+// Purpose:     Common GDI data classes
+// Author:      Julian Smart and others
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c)
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CMNDATA_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CMNDATA_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "cmndata.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/window.h"
+#include "wx/font.h"
+#include "wx/colour.h"
+#include "wx/gdicmn.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxColourData: public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxColourData();
+    wxColourData(const wxColourData& data);
+    ~wxColourData();
+
+    void SetChooseFull(bool flag) { m_chooseFull = flag; }
+    bool GetChooseFull() const { return m_chooseFull; }
+    void SetColour(const wxColour& colour) { m_dataColour = colour; }
+    const wxColour& GetColour() const { return m_dataColour; }
+    wxColour& GetColour() { return m_dataColour; }
+
+    // Array of 16 custom colours
+    void SetCustomColour(int i, const wxColour& colour);
+    wxColour GetCustomColour(int i);
+
+    void operator=(const wxColourData& data);
+
+public:
+    wxColour        m_dataColour;
+    wxColour        m_custColours[16];
+    bool            m_chooseFull;
+    
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxColourData)
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontData: public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxFontData();
+    ~wxFontData();
+
+    wxFontData(const wxFontData& data)
+        : wxObject()
+        , m_fontColour(data.m_fontColour)
+        , m_showHelp(data.m_showHelp)
+        , m_allowSymbols(data.m_allowSymbols)
+        , m_enableEffects(data.m_enableEffects)
+        , m_initialFont(data.m_initialFont)
+        , m_chosenFont(data.m_chosenFont)
+        , m_minSize(data.m_minSize)
+        , m_maxSize(data.m_maxSize)
+        , m_encoding(data.m_encoding)
+        , m_encodingInfo(data.m_encodingInfo)
+    {
+    }
+
+    wxFontData& operator=(const wxFontData& data)
+    {
+        wxObject::operator=(data);
+        m_fontColour     = data.m_fontColour;
+        m_showHelp       = data.m_showHelp;
+        m_allowSymbols   = data.m_allowSymbols;
+        m_enableEffects  = data.m_enableEffects;
+        m_initialFont    = data.m_initialFont;
+        m_chosenFont     = data.m_chosenFont;
+        m_minSize        = data.m_minSize;
+        m_maxSize        = data.m_maxSize;
+        m_encoding     = data.m_encoding;
+        m_encodingInfo = data.m_encodingInfo;
+        return *this;
+    }
+                          
+    void SetAllowSymbols(bool flag) { m_allowSymbols = flag; }
+    bool GetAllowSymbols() const { return m_allowSymbols; }
+
+    void SetColour(const wxColour& colour) { m_fontColour = colour; }
+    wxColour &GetColour() { return m_fontColour; }
+
+    void SetShowHelp(bool flag) { m_showHelp = flag; }
+    bool GetShowHelp() const { return m_showHelp; }
+
+    void EnableEffects(bool flag) { m_enableEffects = flag; }
+    bool GetEnableEffects() const { return m_enableEffects; }
+
+    void SetInitialFont(const wxFont& font) { m_initialFont = font; }
+    wxFont GetInitialFont() const { return m_initialFont; }
+
+    void SetChosenFont(const wxFont& font) { m_chosenFont = font; }
+    wxFont GetChosenFont() const { return m_chosenFont; }
+
+    void SetRange(int minRange, int maxRange) { m_minSize = minRange; m_maxSize = maxRange; }
+
+    // encoding info is split into 2 parts: the logical wxWin encoding
+    // (wxFontEncoding) and a structure containing the native parameters for
+    // it (wxNativeEncodingInfo)
+    wxFontEncoding GetEncoding() const { return m_encoding; }
+    void SetEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding) { m_encoding = encoding; }
+
+    wxNativeEncodingInfo& EncodingInfo() { return m_encodingInfo; }
+
+public:
+    wxColour        m_fontColour;
+    bool            m_showHelp;
+    bool            m_allowSymbols;
+    bool            m_enableEffects;
+    wxFont          m_initialFont;
+    wxFont          m_chosenFont;
+    int             m_minSize;
+    int             m_maxSize;
+
+private:
+    wxFontEncoding       m_encoding;
+    wxNativeEncodingInfo m_encodingInfo;
+    
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxFontData)
+};
+
+#if wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
+/*
+ * wxPrintData
+ * Encapsulates printer information (not printer dialog information)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __WXMAC__
+
+class wxNativePrintData ;
+
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPrintData: public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxPrintData();
+    wxPrintData(const wxPrintData& printData);
+    ~wxPrintData();
+
+    int GetNoCopies() const { return m_printNoCopies; };
+    bool GetCollate() const { return m_printCollate; };
+    int  GetOrientation() const { return m_printOrientation; };
+
+    // Is this data OK for showing the print dialog?
+    bool Ok() const ;
+
+    const wxString& GetPrinterName() const { return m_printerName; }
+    bool GetColour() const { return m_colour; }
+    wxDuplexMode GetDuplex() const { return m_duplexMode; }
+    wxPaperSize GetPaperId() const { return m_paperId; }
+    const wxSize& GetPaperSize() const { return m_paperSize; } // Not used yet: confusable with paper size
+                                                                      // in wxPageSetupDialogData
+    wxPrintQuality GetQuality() const { return m_printQuality; }
+
+    void SetNoCopies(int v) { m_printNoCopies = v; };
+    void SetCollate(bool flag) { m_printCollate = flag; };
+    void SetOrientation(int orient) { m_printOrientation = orient; };
+
+    void SetPrinterName(const wxString& name) { m_printerName = name; }
+    void SetColour(bool colour) { m_colour = colour; }
+    void SetDuplex(wxDuplexMode duplex) { m_duplexMode = duplex; }
+    void SetPaperId(wxPaperSize sizeId) { m_paperId = sizeId; }
+    void SetPaperSize(const wxSize& sz) { m_paperSize = sz; }
+    void SetQuality(wxPrintQuality quality) { m_printQuality = quality; }
+
+    // PostScript-specific data
+    const wxString& GetPrinterCommand() const { return m_printerCommand; }
+    const wxString& GetPrinterOptions() const { return m_printerOptions; }
+    const wxString& GetPreviewCommand() const { return m_previewCommand; }
+    const wxString& GetFilename() const { return m_filename; }
+    const wxString& GetFontMetricPath() const { return m_afmPath; }
+    double GetPrinterScaleX() const { return m_printerScaleX; }
+    double GetPrinterScaleY() const { return m_printerScaleY; }
+    long GetPrinterTranslateX() const { return m_printerTranslateX; }
+    long GetPrinterTranslateY() const { return m_printerTranslateY; }
+    wxPrintMode GetPrintMode() const { return m_printMode; }
+
+    void SetPrinterCommand(const wxString& command) { m_printerCommand = command; }
+    void SetPrinterOptions(const wxString& options) { m_printerOptions = options; }
+    void SetPreviewCommand(const wxString& command) { m_previewCommand = command; }
+    void SetFilename(const wxString& filename) { m_filename = filename; }
+    void SetFontMetricPath(const wxString& path) { m_afmPath = path; }
+    void SetPrinterScaleX(double x) { m_printerScaleX = x; }
+    void SetPrinterScaleY(double y) { m_printerScaleY = y; }
+    void SetPrinterScaling(double x, double y) { m_printerScaleX = x; m_printerScaleY = y; }
+    void SetPrinterTranslateX(long x) { m_printerTranslateX = x; }
+    void SetPrinterTranslateY(long y) { m_printerTranslateY = y; }
+    void SetPrinterTranslation(long x, long y) { m_printerTranslateX = x; m_printerTranslateY = y; }
+    void SetPrintMode(wxPrintMode printMode) { m_printMode = printMode; }
+
+    void operator=(const wxPrintData& data);
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    // Convert to/from the DEVMODE structure
+    void ConvertToNative();
+    void ConvertFromNative();
+    void* GetNativeData() const { return m_devMode; }
+    void SetNativeData(void* data) { m_devMode = data; }
+    void* GetNativeDataDevNames() const { return m_devNames; }
+    void SetNativeDataDevNames(void* data) { m_devNames = data; }
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+  void ConvertToNative();
+  void ConvertFromNative();
+#endif
+
+public:
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    void*           m_devMode;
+    void*           m_devNames;
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    wxNativePrintData* m_nativePrintData ;
+#endif
+
+private:
+
+    int             m_printNoCopies;
+    int             m_printOrientation;
+    bool            m_printCollate;
+
+    // New members, 24/3/99
+    wxString        m_printerName;
+    bool            m_colour;
+    wxDuplexMode    m_duplexMode;
+    wxPrintQuality  m_printQuality;
+    wxPaperSize     m_paperId;
+    wxSize          m_paperSize;
+
+    // PostScript-specific data
+    wxString        m_printerCommand;
+    wxString        m_previewCommand;
+    wxString        m_printerOptions;
+    wxString        m_filename;
+    wxString        m_afmPath;
+    double          m_printerScaleX;
+    double          m_printerScaleY;
+    long            m_printerTranslateX;
+    long            m_printerTranslateY;
+    wxPrintMode     m_printMode;
+    
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxPrintData)
+};
+
+/*
+ * wxPrintDialogData
+ * Encapsulates information displayed and edited in the printer dialog box.
+ * Contains a wxPrintData object which is filled in according to the values retrieved
+ * from the dialog.
+ */
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPrintDialogData: public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxPrintDialogData();
+    wxPrintDialogData(const wxPrintDialogData& dialogData);
+    wxPrintDialogData(const wxPrintData& printData);
+    ~wxPrintDialogData();
+
+    int GetFromPage() const { return m_printFromPage; };
+    int GetToPage() const { return m_printToPage; };
+    int GetMinPage() const { return m_printMinPage; };
+    int GetMaxPage() const { return m_printMaxPage; };
+    int GetNoCopies() const { return m_printNoCopies; };
+    bool GetAllPages() const { return m_printAllPages; };
+    bool GetSelection() const { return m_printSelection; };
+    bool GetCollate() const { return m_printCollate; };
+    bool GetPrintToFile() const { return m_printToFile; };
+    bool GetSetupDialog() const { return m_printSetupDialog; };
+
+    void SetFromPage(int v) { m_printFromPage = v; };
+    void SetToPage(int v) { m_printToPage = v; };
+    void SetMinPage(int v) { m_printMinPage = v; };
+    void SetMaxPage(int v) { m_printMaxPage = v; };
+    void SetNoCopies(int v) { m_printNoCopies = v; };
+    void SetAllPages(bool flag) { m_printAllPages = flag; };
+    void SetSelection(bool flag) { m_printSelection = flag; };
+    void SetCollate(bool flag) { m_printCollate = flag; };
+    void SetPrintToFile(bool flag) { m_printToFile = flag; };
+    void SetSetupDialog(bool flag) { m_printSetupDialog = flag; };
+
+    void EnablePrintToFile(bool flag) { m_printEnablePrintToFile = flag; };
+    void EnableSelection(bool flag) { m_printEnableSelection = flag; };
+    void EnablePageNumbers(bool flag) { m_printEnablePageNumbers = flag; };
+    void EnableHelp(bool flag) { m_printEnableHelp = flag; };
+
+    bool GetEnablePrintToFile() const { return m_printEnablePrintToFile; };
+    bool GetEnableSelection() const { return m_printEnableSelection; };
+    bool GetEnablePageNumbers() const { return m_printEnablePageNumbers; };
+    bool GetEnableHelp() const { return m_printEnableHelp; };
+
+    // Is this data OK for showing the print dialog?
+    bool Ok() const { return m_printData.Ok() ; }
+
+    wxPrintData& GetPrintData() { return m_printData; }
+    void SetPrintData(const wxPrintData& printData) { m_printData = printData; }
+
+    void operator=(const wxPrintDialogData& data);
+    void operator=(const wxPrintData& data); // Sets internal m_printData member
+
+#ifdef __WXMSW__
+    // Convert to/from the PRINTDLG structure
+    void ConvertToNative();
+    void ConvertFromNative();
+    void SetOwnerWindow(wxWindow* win);
+    void* GetNativeData() const { return m_printDlgData; }
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    void ConvertToNative();
+    void ConvertFromNative();
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __WXMSW__
+    void*           m_printDlgData;
+#endif
+
+private:
+    int             m_printFromPage;
+    int             m_printToPage;
+    int             m_printMinPage;
+    int             m_printMaxPage;
+    int             m_printNoCopies;
+    bool            m_printAllPages;
+    bool            m_printCollate;
+    bool            m_printToFile;
+    bool            m_printSelection;
+    bool            m_printEnableSelection;
+    bool            m_printEnablePageNumbers;
+    bool            m_printEnableHelp;
+    bool            m_printEnablePrintToFile;
+    bool            m_printSetupDialog;
+    wxPrintData     m_printData;
+
+private:    
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxPrintDialogData)
+};
+
+/*
+* This is the data used (and returned) by the wxPageSetupDialog.
+*/
+
+// Compatibility with old name
+#define wxPageSetupData wxPageSetupDialogData
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPageSetupDialogData: public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxPageSetupDialogData();
+    wxPageSetupDialogData(const wxPageSetupDialogData& dialogData);
+    wxPageSetupDialogData(const wxPrintData& printData);
+    ~wxPageSetupDialogData();
+
+    wxSize GetPaperSize() const { return m_paperSize; };
+    wxPaperSize GetPaperId() const { return m_printData.GetPaperId(); };
+    wxPoint GetMinMarginTopLeft() const { return m_minMarginTopLeft; };
+    wxPoint GetMinMarginBottomRight() const { return m_minMarginBottomRight; };
+    wxPoint GetMarginTopLeft() const { return m_marginTopLeft; };
+    wxPoint GetMarginBottomRight() const { return m_marginBottomRight; };
+
+    bool GetDefaultMinMargins() const { return m_defaultMinMargins; };
+    bool GetEnableMargins() const { return m_enableMargins; };
+    bool GetEnableOrientation() const { return m_enableOrientation; };
+    bool GetEnablePaper() const { return m_enablePaper; };
+    bool GetEnablePrinter() const { return m_enablePrinter; };
+    bool GetDefaultInfo() const { return m_getDefaultInfo; };
+    bool GetEnableHelp() const { return m_enableHelp; };
+
+    // Is this data OK for showing the page setup dialog?
+    bool Ok() const { return m_printData.Ok() ; }
+
+    // If a corresponding paper type is found in the paper database, will set the m_printData
+    // paper size id member as well.
+    void SetPaperSize(const wxSize& sz);
+
+    void SetPaperId(wxPaperSize id) { m_printData.SetPaperId(id); };
+
+    // Sets the wxPrintData id, plus the paper width/height if found in the paper database.
+    void SetPaperSize(wxPaperSize id);
+
+    void SetMinMarginTopLeft(const wxPoint& pt) { m_minMarginTopLeft = pt; };
+    void SetMinMarginBottomRight(const wxPoint& pt) { m_minMarginBottomRight = pt; };
+    void SetMarginTopLeft(const wxPoint& pt) { m_marginTopLeft = pt; };
+    void SetMarginBottomRight(const wxPoint& pt) { m_marginBottomRight = pt; };
+    void SetDefaultMinMargins(bool flag) { m_defaultMinMargins = flag; };
+    void SetDefaultInfo(bool flag) { m_getDefaultInfo = flag; };
+
+    void EnableMargins(bool flag) { m_enableMargins = flag; };
+    void EnableOrientation(bool flag) { m_enableOrientation = flag; };
+    void EnablePaper(bool flag) { m_enablePaper = flag; };
+    void EnablePrinter(bool flag) { m_enablePrinter = flag; };
+    void EnableHelp(bool flag) { m_enableHelp = flag; };
+
+#if defined(__WIN95__)
+    // Convert to/from the PAGESETUPDLG structure
+    void ConvertToNative();
+    void ConvertFromNative();
+    void SetOwnerWindow(wxWindow* win);
+    void* GetNativeData() const { return m_pageSetupData; }
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    void ConvertToNative();
+    void ConvertFromNative();
+#endif
+
+    // Use paper size defined in this object to set the wxPrintData
+    // paper id
+    void CalculateIdFromPaperSize();
+
+    // Use paper id in wxPrintData to set this object's paper size
+    void CalculatePaperSizeFromId();
+
+    wxPageSetupDialogData& operator=(const wxPageSetupData& data);
+    wxPageSetupDialogData& operator=(const wxPrintData& data);
+
+    wxPrintData& GetPrintData() { return m_printData; }
+    void SetPrintData(const wxPrintData& printData) { m_printData = printData; }
+
+#if defined(__WIN95__)
+    void*           m_pageSetupData;
+#endif
+
+private:
+    wxSize          m_paperSize; // The dimensions selected by the user (on return, same as in wxPrintData?)
+    wxPoint         m_minMarginTopLeft;
+    wxPoint         m_minMarginBottomRight;
+    wxPoint         m_marginTopLeft;
+    wxPoint         m_marginBottomRight;
+    bool            m_defaultMinMargins;
+    bool            m_enableMargins;
+    bool            m_enableOrientation;
+    bool            m_enablePaper;
+    bool            m_enablePrinter;
+    bool            m_getDefaultInfo; // Equiv. to PSD_RETURNDEFAULT
+    bool            m_enableHelp;
+    wxPrintData     m_printData;
+    
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxPageSetupDialogData)
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
+
+#endif
+// _WX_CMNDATA_H_BASE_

include/wx/colordlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/colrdlgg.h
+// Purpose:     wxColourDialog
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitiln
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_COLORDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_COLORDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_COLOURDLG
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__) && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/msw/colordlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__) && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/mac/colordlg.h"
+#else
+    #include "wx/generic/colrdlgg.h"
+
+    #define wxColourDialog wxGenericColourDialog
+    #define sm_classwxColourDialog sm_classwxGenericColourDialog
+#endif
+
+// get the colour from user and return it
+wxColour WXDLLEXPORT
+wxGetColourFromUser(wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *)NULL,
+                    const wxColour& colInit = wxNullColour);
+
+#endif // wxUSE_COLOURDLG
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_COLORDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/colour.h

@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+#ifndef _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/colour.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/colour.h"
+#endif
+
+#define wxColor wxColour
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_

include/wx/combobox.h

@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/combobox.h
+// Purpose:     wxComboBox declaration
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     24.12.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996-2000 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_COMBOBOX
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxComboBoxNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxComboBoxBase: this interface defines the methods wxComboBox must implement
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/ctrlsub.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxComboBoxBase : public wxItemContainer
+{
+public:
+    // wxTextCtrl-like methods wxComboBox must implement
+    virtual wxString GetValue() const = 0;
+    virtual void SetValue(const wxString& value) = 0;
+
+    virtual void Copy() = 0;
+    virtual void Cut() = 0;
+    virtual void Paste() = 0;
+    virtual void SetInsertionPoint(long pos) = 0;
+    virtual long GetInsertionPoint() const = 0;
+    virtual long GetLastPosition() const = 0;
+    virtual void Replace(long from, long to, const wxString& value) = 0;
+    virtual void SetSelection(long from, long to) = 0;
+    virtual void SetEditable(bool editable) = 0;
+
+    virtual void SetInsertionPointEnd()
+        { SetInsertionPoint(GetLastPosition()); }
+    virtual void Remove(long from, long to)
+        { Replace(from, to, wxEmptyString); }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-dependent header defining the real class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/combobox.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/combobox.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_COMBOBOX
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_

include/wx/confbase.h

@@ -0,0 +1,351 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        confbase.h
+// Purpose:     declaration of the base class of all config implementations
+//              (see also: fileconf.h and msw/regconf.h and iniconf.h)
+// Author:      Karsten Ball<6C>der & Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     07.04.98 (adapted from appconf.h)
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1997 Karsten Ball<6C>der   Ballueder@usa.net
+//                       Vadim Zeitlin      <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef   _WX_CONFBASE_H_
+#define   _WX_CONFBASE_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "confbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/// shall we be case sensitive in parsing variable names?
+#ifndef wxCONFIG_CASE_SENSITIVE
+  #define  wxCONFIG_CASE_SENSITIVE       0
+#endif
+
+/// separates group and entry names (probably shouldn't be changed)
+#ifndef wxCONFIG_PATH_SEPARATOR
+  #define   wxCONFIG_PATH_SEPARATOR     _T('/')
+#endif
+
+/// introduces immutable entries
+// (i.e. the ones which can't be changed from the local config file)
+#ifndef wxCONFIG_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX
+  #define   wxCONFIG_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX   _T('!')
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+#include "wx/string.h"
+
+/// should we use registry instead of configuration files under Windows?
+// (i.e. whether wxConfigBase::Create() will create a wxFileConfig (if it's
+//  FALSE) or wxRegConfig (if it's true and we're under Win32) or wxIniConfig
+//  (under Win16))
+#ifndef   wxUSE_CONFIG_NATIVE
+  #define wxUSE_CONFIG_NATIVE 1
+#endif
+
+// Style flags for constructor style parameter
+enum
+{
+    wxCONFIG_USE_LOCAL_FILE = 1,
+    wxCONFIG_USE_GLOBAL_FILE = 2,
+    wxCONFIG_USE_RELATIVE_PATH = 4,
+    wxCONFIG_USE_NO_ESCAPE_CHARACTERS = 8
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// abstract base class wxConfigBase which defines the interface for derived
+// classes
+//
+// wxConfig organizes the items in a tree-like structure (modeled after the
+// Unix/Dos filesystem). There are groups (directories) and keys (files).
+// There is always one current group given by the current path.
+//
+// Keys are pairs "key_name = value" where value may be of string or integer
+// (long) type (TODO doubles and other types such as wxDate coming soon).
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxConfigBase
+{
+public:
+  // constants
+    // the type of an entry
+  enum EntryType
+  {
+    Type_Unknown,
+    Type_String,
+    Type_Boolean,
+    Type_Integer,    // use Read(long *)
+    Type_Float       // use Read(double *)
+  };
+
+  // static functions
+    // sets the config object, returns the previous pointer
+  static wxConfigBase *Set(wxConfigBase *pConfig);
+    // get the config object, creates it on demand unless DontCreateOnDemand
+    // was called
+  static wxConfigBase *Get(bool createOnDemand = TRUE) 
+       { if ( createOnDemand && (!ms_pConfig) ) Create(); return ms_pConfig; }
+    // create a new config object: this function will create the "best"
+    // implementation of wxConfig available for the current platform, see
+    // comments near definition wxUSE_CONFIG_NATIVE for details. It returns
+    // the created object and also sets it as ms_pConfig.
+  static wxConfigBase *Create();
+    // should Get() try to create a new log object if the current one is NULL?
+  static void DontCreateOnDemand() { ms_bAutoCreate = FALSE; }
+
+  // ctor & virtual dtor
+      // ctor (can be used as default ctor too)
+      //
+      // Not all args will always be used by derived classes, but including
+      // them all in each class ensures compatibility. If appName is empty,
+      // uses wxApp name
+  wxConfigBase(const wxString& appName = wxEmptyString,
+               const wxString& vendorName = wxEmptyString,
+               const wxString& localFilename = wxEmptyString,
+               const wxString& globalFilename = wxEmptyString,
+               long style = 0);
+
+    // empty but ensures that dtor of all derived classes is virtual
+  virtual ~wxConfigBase();
+
+  // path management
+    // set current path: if the first character is '/', it's the absolute path,
+    // otherwise it's a relative path. '..' is supported. If the strPath
+    // doesn't exist it is created.
+  virtual void SetPath(const wxString& strPath) = 0;
+    // retrieve the current path (always as absolute path)
+  virtual const wxString& GetPath() const = 0;
+
+  // enumeration: all functions here return false when there are no more items.
+  // you must pass the same lIndex to GetNext and GetFirst (don't modify it)
+    // enumerate subgroups
+  virtual bool GetFirstGroup(wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
+  virtual bool GetNextGroup (wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
+    // enumerate entries
+  virtual bool GetFirstEntry(wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
+  virtual bool GetNextEntry (wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
+    // get number of entries/subgroups in the current group, with or without
+    // it's subgroups
+  virtual size_t GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = FALSE) const = 0;
+  virtual size_t GetNumberOfGroups(bool bRecursive = FALSE) const = 0;
+
+  // tests of existence
+    // returns TRUE if the group by this name exists
+  virtual bool HasGroup(const wxString& strName) const = 0;
+    // same as above, but for an entry
+  virtual bool HasEntry(const wxString& strName) const = 0;
+    // returns TRUE if either a group or an entry with a given name exist
+  bool Exists(const wxString& strName) const
+    { return HasGroup(strName) || HasEntry(strName); }
+
+    // get the entry type
+  virtual EntryType GetEntryType(const wxString& name) const
+  {
+    // by default all entries are strings
+    return HasEntry(name) ? Type_String : Type_Unknown;
+  }
+
+  // key access: returns TRUE if value was really read, FALSE if default used
+  // (and if the key is not found the default value is returned.)
+
+    // read a string from the key
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString *pStr) const;
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString *pStr, const wxString& defVal) const;
+
+    // read a number (long)
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, long *pl) const;
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, long *pl, long defVal) const;
+
+    // read an int
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, int *pi) const;
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, int *pi, int defVal) const;
+
+    // read a double
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, double* val) const;
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, double* val, double defVal) const;
+
+    // read a bool
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* val) const;
+  bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* val, bool defVal) const;
+
+  // convenience functions returning directly the value (we don't have them for
+  // int/double/bool as there would be ambiguities with the long one then)
+  wxString Read(const wxString& key,
+                const wxString& defVal = wxEmptyString) const
+    { wxString s; (void)Read(key, &s, defVal); return s; }
+
+  long Read(const wxString& key, long defVal) const
+    { long l; (void)Read(key, &l, defVal); return l; }
+
+    // write the value (return true on success)
+  bool Write(const wxString& key, const wxString& value)
+    { return DoWriteString(key, value); }
+
+  bool Write(const wxString& key, long value)
+    { return DoWriteLong(key, value); }
+
+  bool Write(const wxString& key, int value)
+    { return DoWriteInt(key, value); }
+
+  bool Write(const wxString& key, double value)
+    { return DoWriteDouble(key, value); }
+
+  bool Write(const wxString& key, bool value)
+    { return DoWriteBool(key, value); }
+
+  // we have to provide a separate version for C strings as otherwise they
+  // would be converted to bool and not to wxString as expected!
+  bool Write(const wxString& key, const wxChar *value)
+    { return Write(key, wxString(value)); }
+
+  // permanently writes all changes
+  virtual bool Flush(bool bCurrentOnly = FALSE) = 0;
+
+  // renaming, all functions return FALSE on failure (probably because the new
+  // name is already taken by an existing entry)
+    // rename an entry
+  virtual bool RenameEntry(const wxString& oldName,
+                           const wxString& newName) = 0;
+    // rename a group
+  virtual bool RenameGroup(const wxString& oldName,
+                           const wxString& newName) = 0;
+
+  // delete entries/groups
+    // deletes the specified entry and the group it belongs to if
+    // it was the last key in it and the second parameter is true
+  virtual bool DeleteEntry(const wxString& key,
+                           bool bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE) = 0;
+    // delete the group (with all subgroups)
+  virtual bool DeleteGroup(const wxString& key) = 0;
+    // delete the whole underlying object (disk file, registry key, ...)
+    // primarly for use by desinstallation routine.
+  virtual bool DeleteAll() = 0;
+
+  // options
+    // we can automatically expand environment variables in the config entries
+    // (this option is on by default, you can turn it on/off at any time)
+  bool IsExpandingEnvVars() const { return m_bExpandEnvVars; }
+  void SetExpandEnvVars(bool bDoIt = TRUE) { m_bExpandEnvVars = bDoIt; }
+    // recording of default values
+  void SetRecordDefaults(bool bDoIt = TRUE) { m_bRecordDefaults = bDoIt; }
+  bool IsRecordingDefaults() const { return m_bRecordDefaults; }
+  // does expansion only if needed
+  wxString ExpandEnvVars(const wxString& str) const;
+
+    // misc accessors
+  wxString GetAppName() const { return m_appName; }
+  wxString GetVendorName() const { return m_vendorName; }
+
+  // Used wxIniConfig to set members in constructor
+  void SetAppName(const wxString& appName) { m_appName = appName; }
+  void SetVendorName(const wxString& vendorName) { m_vendorName = vendorName; }
+
+  void SetStyle(long style) { m_style = style; }
+  long GetStyle() const { return m_style; }
+
+protected:
+  static bool IsImmutable(const wxString& key)
+    { return !key.IsEmpty() && key[0] == wxCONFIG_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX; }
+
+  // do read/write the values of different types
+  virtual bool DoReadString(const wxString& key, wxString *pStr) const = 0;
+  virtual bool DoReadLong(const wxString& key, long *pl) const = 0;
+  virtual bool DoReadInt(const wxString& key, int *pi) const;
+  virtual bool DoReadDouble(const wxString& key, double* val) const;
+  virtual bool DoReadBool(const wxString& key, bool* val) const;
+
+  virtual bool DoWriteString(const wxString& key, const wxString& value) = 0;
+  virtual bool DoWriteLong(const wxString& key, long value) = 0;
+  virtual bool DoWriteInt(const wxString& key, int value);
+  virtual bool DoWriteDouble(const wxString& key, double value);
+  virtual bool DoWriteBool(const wxString& key, bool value);
+
+private:
+  // are we doing automatic environment variable expansion?
+  bool m_bExpandEnvVars;
+  // do we record default values?
+  bool m_bRecordDefaults;
+
+  // static variables
+  static wxConfigBase *ms_pConfig;
+  static bool          ms_bAutoCreate;
+
+  // Application name and organisation name
+  wxString          m_appName;
+  wxString          m_vendorName;
+
+  // Style flag
+  long              m_style;
+};
+
+// a handy little class which changes current path to the path of given entry
+// and restores it in dtor: so if you declare a local variable of this type,
+// you work in the entry directory and the path is automatically restored
+// when the function returns
+// Taken out of wxConfig since not all compilers can cope with nested classes.
+class wxConfigPathChanger
+{
+public:
+  // ctor/dtor do path changing/restorin
+  wxConfigPathChanger(const wxConfigBase *pContainer, const wxString& strEntry);
+ ~wxConfigPathChanger();
+
+  // get the key name
+  const wxString& Name() const { return m_strName; }
+
+private:
+  wxConfigBase *m_pContainer;   // object we live in
+  wxString      m_strName,      // name of entry (i.e. name only)
+                m_strOldPath;   // saved path
+  bool          m_bChanged;     // was the path changed?
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxConfigPathChanger)
+};
+
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// the native wxConfigBase implementation
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// under Windows we prefer to use the native implementation
+#if defined(__WXMSW__) && wxUSE_CONFIG_NATIVE
+  #ifdef __WIN32__
+    #define wxConfig  wxRegConfig
+    #define sm_classwxConfig sm_classwxRegConfig
+  #else  //WIN16
+    #define wxConfig  wxIniConfig
+    #define sm_classwxConfig sm_classwxIniConfig
+  #endif
+#else // either we're under Unix or wish to use files even under Windows
+  #define wxConfig  wxFileConfig
+  #define sm_classwxConfig sm_classwxFileConfig
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+/*
+  Replace environment variables ($SOMETHING) with their values. The format is
+  $VARNAME or ${VARNAME} where VARNAME contains alphanumeric characters and
+  '_' only. '$' must be escaped ('\$') in order to be taken literally.
+*/
+
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxExpandEnvVars(const wxString &sz);
+
+/*
+  Split path into parts removing '..' in progress
+ */
+WXDLLEXPORT void wxSplitPath(wxArrayString& aParts, const wxChar *sz);
+
+
+#endif
+  // _WX_CONFIG_H_
+

include/wx/config.h

@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+#ifndef _WX_CONFIG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CONFIG_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/confbase.h"
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__) && wxUSE_CONFIG_NATIVE
+#  ifdef __WIN32__
+#    include "wx/msw/regconf.h"
+#else
+#    include "wx/msw/iniconf.h"
+#  endif
+#else
+#    include "wx/fileconf.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CONFIG_H_BASE_

include/wx/containr.h

@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/containr.h
+// Purpose:     wxControlContainer class declration: a "mix-in" class which
+//              implements the TAB navigation between the controls
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     06.08.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CONTAINR_H_
+#define _WX_CONTAINR_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "containr.h"
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFocusEvent;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxNavigationKeyEvent;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindow;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindowBase;
+
+/*
+   Implementation note: wxControlContainer is not a real mix-in but rather
+   a class meant to be agregated with (and not inherited from). Although
+   logically it should be a mix-in, doing it like this has no advantage from
+   the point of view of the existing code but does have some problems (we'd
+   need to play tricks with event handlers which may be difficult to do
+   safely). The price we pay for this simplicity is the ugly macros below.
+ */
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxControlContainer
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxControlContainer
+{
+public:
+    // ctors and such
+    wxControlContainer(wxWindow *winParent = NULL);
+    void SetContainerWindow(wxWindow *winParent) { m_winParent = winParent; }
+
+    // default item access: we have a permanent default item which is the one
+    // set by the user code but we may also have a temporary default item which
+    // would be chosen if the user pressed "Enter" now but the default action
+    // reverts to the "permanent" default as soon as this temporary default
+    // item lsoes focus
+
+    // get the default item, temporary or permanent
+    wxWindow *GetDefaultItem() const
+        { return m_winTmpDefault ? m_winTmpDefault : m_winDefault; }
+
+    // set the permanent default item, return its old value
+    wxWindow *SetDefaultItem(wxWindow *win)
+        { wxWindow *winOld = m_winDefault; m_winDefault = win; return winOld; }
+
+    // set a temporary default item, SetTmpDefaultItem(NULL) should be called
+    // soon after a call to SetTmpDefaultItem(window)
+    void SetTmpDefaultItem(wxWindow *win) { m_winTmpDefault = win; }
+
+    // the methods to be called from the window event handlers
+    void HandleOnNavigationKey(wxNavigationKeyEvent& event);
+    void HandleOnFocus(wxFocusEvent& event);
+    void HandleOnWindowDestroy(wxWindowBase *child);
+
+    // should be called from SetFocus(), returns FALSE if we did nothing with
+    // the focus and the default processing should take place
+    bool DoSetFocus();
+
+    // can our child get the focus?
+    bool AcceptsFocus() const;
+
+    // called from OnChildFocus() handler, i.e. when one of our (grand)
+    // children gets the focus
+    void SetLastFocus(wxWindow *win);
+
+protected:
+    // set the focus to the child which had it the last time
+    bool SetFocusToChild();
+
+    // the parent window we manage the children for
+    wxWindow *m_winParent;
+
+    // the child which had the focus last time this panel was activated
+    wxWindow *m_winLastFocused;
+
+    // a default window (usually a button) or NULL
+    wxWindow *m_winDefault;
+
+    // a temporary override of m_winDefault, use the latter if NULL
+    wxWindow *m_winTmpDefault;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxControlContainer)
+};
+
+// this function is for wxWindows internal use only
+extern bool wxSetFocusToChild(wxWindow *win, wxWindow **child);
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// macros which may be used by the classes wishing to implement TAB navigation
+// among their children
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// declare the methods to be forwarded
+#define WX_DECLARE_CONTROL_CONTAINER() \
+public: \
+    void OnNavigationKey(wxNavigationKeyEvent& event); \
+    void OnFocus(wxFocusEvent& event); \
+    virtual void OnChildFocus(wxChildFocusEvent& event); \
+    virtual void SetFocus(); \
+    virtual void RemoveChild(wxWindowBase *child); \
+    virtual wxWindow *GetDefaultItem() const; \
+    virtual wxWindow *SetDefaultItem(wxWindow *child); \
+    virtual void SetTmpDefaultItem(wxWindow *win); \
+    virtual bool AcceptsFocus() const; \
+\
+protected: \
+    wxControlContainer m_container
+
+// implement the event table entries for wxControlContainer
+#define WX_EVENT_TABLE_CONTROL_CONTAINER(classname) \
+    EVT_SET_FOCUS(classname::OnFocus) \
+    EVT_CHILD_FOCUS(classname::OnChildFocus) \
+    EVT_NAVIGATION_KEY(classname::OnNavigationKey)
+
+// implement the methods forwarding to the wxControlContainer
+#define WX_DELEGATE_TO_CONTROL_CONTAINER(classname)  \
+wxWindow *classname::SetDefaultItem(wxWindow *child) \
+{ \
+    return m_container.SetDefaultItem(child); \
+} \
+ \
+void classname::SetTmpDefaultItem(wxWindow *child) \
+{ \
+    m_container.SetTmpDefaultItem(child); \
+} \
+ \
+wxWindow *classname::GetDefaultItem() const \
+{ \
+    return m_container.GetDefaultItem(); \
+} \
+ \
+void classname::OnNavigationKey( wxNavigationKeyEvent& event ) \
+{ \
+    m_container.HandleOnNavigationKey(event); \
+} \
+ \
+void classname::RemoveChild(wxWindowBase *child) \
+{ \
+    m_container.HandleOnWindowDestroy(child); \
+ \
+    wxWindow::RemoveChild(child); \
+} \
+ \
+void classname::SetFocus() \
+{ \
+    if ( !m_container.DoSetFocus() ) \
+        wxWindow::SetFocus(); \
+} \
+ \
+void classname::OnChildFocus(wxChildFocusEvent& event) \
+{ \
+    m_container.SetLastFocus(event.GetWindow()); \
+} \
+ \
+void classname::OnFocus(wxFocusEvent& event) \
+{ \
+    m_container.HandleOnFocus(event); \
+} \
+bool classname::AcceptsFocus() const \
+{ \
+    return m_container.AcceptsFocus(); \
+}
+
+
+#endif // _WX_CONTAINR_H_

include/wx/control.h

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/control.h
+// Purpose:     wxControl common interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "controlbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_CONTROLS
+
+#include "wx/window.h"      // base class
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxControlNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxControl is the base class for all controls
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxControlBase : public wxWindow
+{
+public:
+    virtual ~wxControlBase();
+
+    // Create() function adds the validator parameter
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                long style = 0,
+                const wxValidator& validator = wxDefaultValidator,
+                const wxString& name = wxControlNameStr);
+
+    // simulates the event of given type (i.e. wxButton::Command() is just as
+    // if the button was clicked)
+    virtual void Command(wxCommandEvent &event);
+
+    // get the control alignment (left/right/centre, top/bottom/centre)
+    int GetAlignment() const { return m_windowStyle & wxALIGN_MASK; }
+
+protected:
+    // creates the control (calls wxWindowBase::CreateBase inside) and adds it
+    // to the list of parents children
+    bool CreateControl(wxWindowBase *parent,
+                       wxWindowID id,
+                       const wxPoint& pos,
+                       const wxSize& size,
+                       long style,
+                       const wxValidator& validator,
+                       const wxString& name);
+
+    // inherit colour and font settings from the parent window
+    void InheritAttributes();
+
+    // initialize the common fields of wxCommandEvent
+    void InitCommandEvent(wxCommandEvent& event) const;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform-dependent wxControl declarations
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/control.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/control.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CONTROLS
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_

include/wx/cshelp.h

@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/cshelp.h
+// Purpose:     Context-sensitive help support classes
+// Author:      Julian Smart, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     08/09/2000
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Julian Smart, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:   	wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CSHELPH__
+#define _WX_CSHELPH__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "cshelp.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_HELP
+
+#include "wx/help.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_BMPBUTTON
+#include "wx/bmpbuttn.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// classes used to implement context help UI
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+ * wxContextHelp
+ * Invokes context-sensitive help. When the user
+ * clicks on a window, a wxEVT_HELP event will be sent to that
+ * window for the application to display help for.
+ */
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxContextHelp : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxContextHelp(wxWindow* win = NULL, bool beginHelp = TRUE);
+    virtual ~wxContextHelp();
+
+    bool BeginContextHelp(wxWindow* win);
+    bool EndContextHelp();
+
+    bool EventLoop();
+    bool DispatchEvent(wxWindow* win, const wxPoint& pt);
+
+    void SetStatus(bool status) { m_status = status; }
+
+protected:
+    bool    m_inHelp;
+    bool    m_status; // TRUE if the user left-clicked
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxContextHelp)
+};
+
+#if wxUSE_BMPBUTTON
+/*
+ * wxContextHelpButton
+ * You can add this to your dialogs (especially on non-Windows platforms)
+ * to put the application into context help mode.
+ */
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxContextHelpButton : public wxBitmapButton
+{
+public:
+    wxContextHelpButton(wxWindow* parent,
+                        wxWindowID id = wxID_CONTEXT_HELP,
+                        const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                        const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                        long style = wxBU_AUTODRAW);
+
+    void OnContextHelp(wxCommandEvent& event);
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxContextHelpButton)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+};
+
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// classes used to implement context help support
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// wxHelpProvider is an abstract class used by the program implementing context help to
+// show the help text (or whatever: it may be HTML page or anything else) for
+// the given window.
+//
+// The current help provider must be explicitly set by the application using
+// wxHelpProvider::Set().
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxHelpProvider
+{
+public:
+    // get/set the current (application-global) help provider (Set() returns
+    // the previous one)
+    static wxHelpProvider *Set(wxHelpProvider *helpProvider)
+    {
+        wxHelpProvider *helpProviderOld = ms_helpProvider;
+        ms_helpProvider = helpProvider;
+        return helpProviderOld;
+    }
+
+    // unlike some other class, the help provider is not created on demand,
+    // this must be explicitly done by the application
+    static wxHelpProvider *Get() { return ms_helpProvider; }
+
+    // get the help string (whose interpretation is help provider dependent
+    // except that empty string always means that no help is associated with
+    // the window) for this window
+    virtual wxString GetHelp(const wxWindowBase *window) = 0;
+
+    // do show help for the given window (uses GetHelp() internally if
+    // applicable), return TRUE if it was done or FALSE if no help available
+    // for this window
+    virtual bool ShowHelp(wxWindowBase *window) = 0;
+
+    // associate the text with the given window or id: although all help
+    // providers have these functions to allow making wxWindow::SetHelpText()
+    // work, not all of them implement them
+    virtual void AddHelp(wxWindowBase *window, const wxString& text);
+
+    // this version associates the given text with all window with this id
+    // (may be used to set the same help string for all [Cancel] buttons in
+    // the application, for example)
+    virtual void AddHelp(wxWindowID id, const wxString& text);
+
+    // removes the association
+    virtual void RemoveHelp(wxWindowBase* window);
+
+    // virtual dtor for any base class
+    virtual ~wxHelpProvider();
+
+private:
+    static wxHelpProvider *ms_helpProvider;
+};
+
+// wxSimpleHelpProvider is an implementation of wxHelpProvider which supports
+// only plain text help strings and shows the string associated with the
+// control (if any) in a tooltip
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxSimpleHelpProvider : public wxHelpProvider
+{
+public:
+    // implement wxHelpProvider methods
+    virtual wxString GetHelp(const wxWindowBase *window);
+    virtual bool ShowHelp(wxWindowBase *window);
+    virtual void AddHelp(wxWindowBase *window, const wxString& text);
+    virtual void AddHelp(wxWindowID id, const wxString& text);
+    virtual void RemoveHelp(wxWindowBase* window);
+
+protected:
+    // we use 2 hashes for storing the help strings associated with windows
+    // and the ids
+    wxStringHashTable m_hashWindows,
+                     m_hashIds;
+};
+
+// wxHelpControllerHelpProvider is an implementation of wxHelpProvider which supports
+// both context identifiers and plain text help strings. If the help text is an integer,
+// it is passed to wxHelpController::DisplayContextPopup. Otherwise, it shows the string
+// in a tooltip as per wxSimpleHelpProvider.
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxHelpControllerHelpProvider : public wxSimpleHelpProvider
+{
+public:
+    // Note that it doesn't own the help controller. The help controller
+    // should be deleted separately.
+    wxHelpControllerHelpProvider(wxHelpControllerBase* hc = (wxHelpControllerBase*) NULL);
+
+    // implement wxHelpProvider methods
+    virtual bool ShowHelp(wxWindowBase *window);
+
+    // Other accessors
+    void SetHelpController(wxHelpControllerBase* hc) { m_helpController = hc; }
+    wxHelpControllerBase* GetHelpController() const { return m_helpController; }
+
+protected:
+    wxHelpControllerBase*   m_helpController;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxHelpControllerHelpProvider)
+};
+
+// Convenience function for turning context id into wxString
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxContextId(int id);
+
+#endif // wxUSE_HELP
+
+#endif // _WX_CSHELPH__
+

include/wx/ctrlsub.h

@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/ctrlsub.h (read: "wxConTRoL with SUBitems")
+// Purpose:     wxControlWithItems interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     22.10.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CTRLSUB_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CTRLSUB_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "controlwithitems.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_CONTROLS
+
+#include "wx/control.h"      // base class
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxItemContainer defines an interface which is implemented by all controls
+// which have string subitems each of which may be selected.
+//
+// Examples: wxListBox, wxCheckListBox, wxChoice and wxComboBox (which
+// implements an extended interface deriving from this one)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxItemContainer
+{
+public:
+    wxItemContainer() { m_clientDataItemsType = wxClientData_None; }
+    virtual ~wxItemContainer();
+
+    // adding items
+    // ------------
+
+    int Append(const wxString& item)
+        { return DoAppend(item); }
+    int Append(const wxString& item, void *clientData)
+        { int n = DoAppend(item); SetClientData(n, clientData); return n; }
+    int Append(const wxString& item, wxClientData *clientData)
+        { int n = DoAppend(item); SetClientObject(n, clientData); return n; }
+
+    // append several items at once to the control
+    void Append(const wxArrayString& strings);
+
+    int Insert(const wxString& item, int pos)
+        { return DoInsert(item, pos); }
+    int Insert(const wxString& item, int pos, void *clientData);
+    int Insert(const wxString& item, int pos, wxClientData *clientData);
+
+    // deleting items
+    // --------------
+
+    virtual void Clear() = 0;
+    virtual void Delete(int n) = 0;
+
+    // accessing strings
+    // -----------------
+
+    virtual int GetCount() const = 0;
+    bool IsEmpty() const { return GetCount() == 0; }
+
+    virtual wxString GetString(int n) const = 0;
+    virtual void SetString(int n, const wxString& s) = 0;
+    virtual int FindString(const wxString& s) const = 0;
+
+    // selection
+    // ---------
+
+    virtual void Select(int n) = 0;
+    virtual int GetSelection() const = 0;
+
+    wxString GetStringSelection() const;
+
+    // misc
+    // ----
+
+    // client data stuff
+    void SetClientData(int n, void* clientData);
+    void* GetClientData(int n) const;
+
+    void SetClientObject(int n, wxClientData* clientData);
+    wxClientData* GetClientObject(int n) const;
+
+    bool HasClientObjectData() const
+        { return m_clientDataItemsType == wxClientData_Object; }
+    bool HasClientUntypedData() const
+        { return m_clientDataItemsType == wxClientData_Void; }
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+    // compatibility - these functions are deprecated, use the new ones
+    // instead
+    int Number() const { return GetCount(); }
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+
+protected:
+    virtual int DoAppend(const wxString& item) = 0;
+    virtual int DoInsert(const wxString& item, int pos) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoSetItemClientData(int n, void* clientData) = 0;
+    virtual void* DoGetItemClientData(int n) const = 0;
+    virtual void DoSetItemClientObject(int n, wxClientData* clientData) = 0;
+    virtual wxClientData* DoGetItemClientObject(int n) const = 0;
+
+    // the type of the client data for the items
+    wxClientDataType m_clientDataItemsType;
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxControlWithItems : public wxControl, public wxItemContainer
+{
+public:
+    wxControlWithItems() { }
+    virtual ~wxControlWithItems();
+    
+    // we have to redefine these functions here to avoid ambiguities in classes
+    // deriving from us which would arise otherwise because both base classses
+    // have the methods with the same names - hopefully, a smart compiler can
+    // optimize away these simple inline wrappers so we don't suffer much from
+    // this
+
+    void SetClientData(void *data)
+    {
+        wxControl::SetClientData(data);
+    }
+
+    void *GetClientData() const
+    {
+        return wxControl::GetClientData();
+    }
+
+    void SetClientObject(wxClientData *data)
+    {
+        wxControl::SetClientObject(data);
+    }
+
+    wxClientData *GetClientObject() const
+    {
+        return wxControl::GetClientObject();
+    }
+
+    void SetClientData(int n, void* clientData)
+    {
+        wxItemContainer::SetClientData(n, clientData);
+    }
+
+    void* GetClientData(int n) const
+    {
+        return wxItemContainer::GetClientData(n);
+    }
+
+    void SetClientObject(int n, wxClientData* clientData)
+    {
+        wxItemContainer::SetClientObject(n, clientData);
+    }
+
+    wxClientData* GetClientObject(int n) const
+    {
+        return wxItemContainer::GetClientObject(n);
+    }
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CONTROLS
+
+#endif // _WX_CTRLSUB_H_BASE_
+

include/wx/cursor.h

@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+#ifndef _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/cursor.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/cursor.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/utils.h"
+
+/* This is a small class which can be used by all ports
+   to temporarily suspend the busy cursor. Useful in modal
+   dialogs.
+
+   Actually that is not (any longer) quite true..  currently it is
+   only used in wxGTK Dialog::ShowModal() and now uses static
+   wxBusyCursor methods that are only implemented for wxGTK so far.
+   The BusyCursor handling code should probably be implemented in
+   common code somewhere instead of the separate implementations we
+   currently have.  Also the name BusyCursorSuspender is a little
+   misleading since it doesn't actually suspend the BusyCursor, just
+   masks one that is already showing.
+   If another call to wxBeginBusyCursor is made while this is active
+   the Busy Cursor will again be shown.  But at least now it doesn't
+   interfere with the state of wxIsBusy() -- RL
+
+*/
+class wxBusyCursorSuspender
+{
+public:
+    wxBusyCursorSuspender()
+    {
+        if( wxIsBusy() )
+        {
+            wxSetCursor( wxBusyCursor::GetStoredCursor() );
+        }
+    }
+    ~wxBusyCursorSuspender()
+    {
+        if( wxIsBusy() )
+        {
+            wxSetCursor( wxBusyCursor::GetBusyCursor() );
+        }
+    }
+};
+#endif
+    // _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_

include/wx/dataobj.h

@@ -0,0 +1,486 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dataobj.h
+// Purpose:     common data object classes
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin, Robert Roebling
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.05.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows Team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DATAOBJ_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DATAOBJ_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "dataobjbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_DATAOBJ
+
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/bitmap.h"
+#include "wx/list.h"
+
+// ============================================================================
+/*
+   Generic data transfer related classes. The class hierarchy is as follows:
+
+                                - wxDataObject-
+                               /               \
+                              /                 \
+            wxDataObjectSimple                  wxDataObjectComposite
+           /           |      \
+          /            |       \
+   wxTextDataObject    |     wxBitmapDataObject
+                       |
+               wxCustomDataObject
+
+*/
+// ============================================================================
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataFormat class is declared in platform-specific headers: it represents
+// a format for data which may be either one of the standard ones (text,
+// bitmap, ...) or a custom one which is then identified by a unique string.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/* the class interface looks like this (pseudo code):
+
+class wxDataFormat
+{
+public:
+    typedef <integral type> NativeFormat;
+
+    wxDataFormat(NativeFormat format = wxDF_INVALID);
+    wxDataFormat(const wxChar *format);
+
+    wxDataFormat& operator=(NativeFormat format);
+    wxDataFormat& operator=(const wxDataFormat& format);
+
+    bool operator==(NativeFormat format) const;
+    bool operator!=(NativeFormat format) const;
+
+    void SetType(NativeFormat format);
+    NativeFormat GetType() const;
+
+    wxString GetId() const;
+    void SetId(const wxChar *format);
+};
+
+*/
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/x11/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dataform.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dataform.h"
+#endif
+
+// the value for default argument to some functions (corresponds to
+// wxDF_INVALID)
+extern WXDLLEXPORT const wxDataFormat& wxFormatInvalid;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataObject represents a piece of data which knows which formats it
+// supports and knows how to render itself in each of them - GetDataHere(),
+// and how to restore data from the buffer (SetData()).
+//
+// Although this class may be used directly (i.e. custom classes may be
+// derived from it), in many cases it might be simpler to use either
+// wxDataObjectSimple or wxDataObjectComposite classes.
+//
+// A data object may be "read only", i.e. support only GetData() functions or
+// "read-write", i.e. support both GetData() and SetData() (in principle, it
+// might be "write only" too, but this is rare). Moreover, it doesn't have to
+// support the same formats in Get() and Set() directions: for example, a data
+// object containing JPEG image might accept BMPs in GetData() because JPEG
+// image may be easily transformed into BMP but not in SetData(). Accordingly,
+// all methods dealing with formats take an additional "direction" argument
+// which is either SET or GET and which tells the function if the format needs
+// to be supported by SetData() or GetDataHere().
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObjectBase
+{
+public:
+    enum Direction
+    {
+        Get  = 0x01,    // format is supported by GetDataHere()
+        Set  = 0x02,    // format is supported by SetData()
+        Both = 0x03     // format is supported by both (unused currently)
+    };
+
+    // this class is polymorphic, hence it needs a virtual dtor
+    virtual ~wxDataObjectBase();
+
+    // get the best suited format for rendering our data
+    virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(Direction dir = Get) const = 0;
+
+    // get the number of formats we support
+    virtual size_t GetFormatCount(Direction dir = Get) const = 0;
+
+    // return all formats in the provided array (of size GetFormatCount())
+    virtual void GetAllFormats(wxDataFormat *formats,
+                               Direction dir = Get) const = 0;
+
+    // get the (total) size of data for the given format
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const = 0;
+
+    // copy raw data (in the specified format) to the provided buffer, return
+    // TRUE if data copied successfully, FALSE otherwise
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void *buf) const = 0;
+
+    // get data from the buffer of specified length (in the given format),
+    // return TRUE if the data was read successfully, FALSE otherwise
+    virtual bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format),
+                         size_t WXUNUSED(len), const void * WXUNUSED(buf))
+    {
+        return FALSE;
+    }
+
+    // returns TRUE if this format is supported
+    bool IsSupported(const wxDataFormat& format, Direction dir = Get) const;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include the platform-specific declarations of wxDataObject
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/x11/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dataobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dataobj.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataObjectSimple is a wxDataObject which only supports one format (in
+// both Get and Set directions, but you may return FALSE from GetDataHere() or
+// SetData() if one of them is not supported). This is the simplest possible
+// wxDataObject implementation.
+//
+// This is still an "abstract base class" (although it doesn't have any pure
+// virtual functions), to use it you should derive from it and implement
+// GetDataSize(), GetDataHere() and SetData() functions because the base class
+// versions don't do anything - they just return "not implemented".
+//
+// This class should be used when you provide data in only one format (no
+// conversion to/from other formats), either a standard or a custom one.
+// Otherwise, you should use wxDataObjectComposite or wxDataObject directly.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObjectSimple : public wxDataObject
+{
+public:
+    // ctor takes the format we support, but it can also be set later with
+    // SetFormat()
+    wxDataObjectSimple(const wxDataFormat& format = wxFormatInvalid)
+        : m_format(format)
+        {
+        }
+
+    // get/set the format we support
+    const wxDataFormat& GetFormat() const { return m_format; }
+    void SetFormat(const wxDataFormat& format) { m_format = format; }
+
+    // virtual functions to override in derived class (the base class versions
+    // just return "not implemented")
+    // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // get the size of our data
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const
+        { return 0; }
+
+    // copy our data to the buffer
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *WXUNUSED(buf)) const
+        { return FALSE; }
+
+    // copy data from buffer to our data
+    virtual bool SetData(size_t WXUNUSED(len), const void *WXUNUSED(buf))
+        { return FALSE; }
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(wxDataObjectBase::Direction WXUNUSED(dir) = Get) const
+        { return m_format; }
+    virtual size_t GetFormatCount(wxDataObjectBase::Direction WXUNUSED(dir) = Get) const
+        { return 1; }
+    virtual void GetAllFormats(wxDataFormat *formats,
+                               wxDataObjectBase::Direction WXUNUSED(dir) = Get) const
+        { *formats = m_format; }
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format)) const
+        { return GetDataSize(); }
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format),
+                             void *buf) const
+        { return GetDataHere(buf); }
+    virtual bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& WXUNUSED(format),
+                         size_t len, const void *buf)
+        { return SetData(len, buf); }
+
+private:
+    // the one and only format we support
+    wxDataFormat m_format;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDataObjectComposite is the simplest way to implement wxDataObject
+// supporting multiple formats. It contains several wxDataObjectSimple and
+// supports all formats supported by any of them.
+//
+// This class shouldn't be (normally) derived from, but may be used directly.
+// If you need more flexibility than what it provides, you should probably use
+// wxDataObject directly.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_LIST(wxDataObjectSimple, wxSimpleDataObjectList);
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataObjectComposite : public wxDataObject
+{
+public:
+    // ctor
+    wxDataObjectComposite();
+
+    // add data object (it will be deleted by wxDataObjectComposite, hence it
+    // must be allocated on the heap) whose format will become the preferred
+    // one if preferred == TRUE
+    void Add(wxDataObjectSimple *dataObject, bool preferred = FALSE);
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual wxDataFormat GetPreferredFormat(wxDataObjectBase::Direction dir = Get) const;
+    virtual size_t GetFormatCount(wxDataObjectBase::Direction dir = Get) const;
+    virtual void GetAllFormats(wxDataFormat *formats, wxDataObjectBase::Direction dir = Get) const;
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const;
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void *buf) const;
+    virtual bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& format, size_t len, const void *buf);
+
+protected:
+    // returns the pointer to the object which supports this format or NULL
+    wxDataObjectSimple *GetObject(const wxDataFormat& format) const;
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    virtual const void* GetSizeFromBuffer( const void* buffer, size_t* size,
+                                           const wxDataFormat& format );
+    virtual void* SetSizeInBuffer( void* buffer, size_t size,
+                                   const wxDataFormat& format );
+    virtual size_t GetBufferOffset( const wxDataFormat& format );
+#endif
+
+private:
+    // the list of all (simple) data objects whose formats we support
+    wxSimpleDataObjectList m_dataObjects;
+
+    // the index of the preferred one (0 initially, so by default the first
+    // one is the preferred)
+    size_t m_preferred;
+};
+
+// ============================================================================
+// Standard implementations of wxDataObjectSimple which can be used directly
+// (i.e. without having to derive from them) for standard data type transfers.
+//
+// Note that although all of them can work with provided data, you can also
+// override their virtual GetXXX() functions to only provide data on demand.
+// ============================================================================
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTextDataObject contains text data
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextDataObject : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // ctor: you can specify the text here or in SetText(), or override
+    // GetText()
+    wxTextDataObject(const wxString& text = wxEmptyString)
+        : wxDataObjectSimple(wxUSE_UNICODE?wxDF_UNICODETEXT:wxDF_TEXT),
+          m_text(text)
+        {
+        }
+
+    // virtual functions which you may override if you want to provide text on
+    // demand only - otherwise, the trivial default versions will be used
+    virtual size_t GetTextLength() const { return m_text.Len() + 1; }
+    virtual wxString GetText() const { return m_text; }
+    virtual void SetText(const wxString& text) { m_text = text; }
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const;
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *buf) const;
+    virtual bool SetData(size_t len, const void *buf);
+
+private:
+    wxString m_text;
+
+    // virtual function hiding supression
+    size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataSize(format)); }
+    bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void *pBuf) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataHere(format, pBuf)); }
+    bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& format, size_t nLen, const void* pBuf)
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::SetData(format, nLen, pBuf)); }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxBitmapDataObject contains a bitmap
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapDataObjectBase : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // ctor: you can specify the bitmap here or in SetBitmap(), or override
+    // GetBitmap()
+    wxBitmapDataObjectBase(const wxBitmap& bitmap = wxNullBitmap)
+        : wxDataObjectSimple(wxDF_BITMAP), m_bitmap(bitmap)
+        {
+        }
+
+    // virtual functions which you may override if you want to provide data on
+    // demand only - otherwise, the trivial default versions will be used
+    virtual wxBitmap GetBitmap() const { return m_bitmap; }
+    virtual void SetBitmap(const wxBitmap& bitmap) { m_bitmap = bitmap; }
+
+protected:
+    wxBitmap m_bitmap;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileDataObject contains a list of filenames
+//
+// NB: notice that this is a "write only" object, it can only be filled with
+//     data from drag and drop operation.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileDataObjectBase : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // ctor: use AddFile() later to fill the array
+    wxFileDataObjectBase() : wxDataObjectSimple(wxDF_FILENAME) { }
+
+    // get a reference to our array
+    const wxArrayString& GetFilenames() const { return m_filenames; }
+
+    // the Get() functions do nothing for us
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const { return 0; }
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *WXUNUSED(buf)) const { return FALSE; }
+
+protected:
+    wxArrayString m_filenames;
+
+private:
+    // Virtual function hiding supression
+    size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataSize(format)); }
+    bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void* pBuf) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataHere(format, pBuf)); }
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCustomDataObject contains arbitrary untyped user data.
+//
+// It is understood that this data can be copied bitwise.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCustomDataObject : public wxDataObjectSimple
+{
+public:
+    // if you don't specify the format in the ctor, you can still use
+    // SetFormat() later
+    wxCustomDataObject(const wxDataFormat& format = wxFormatInvalid);
+
+    // the dtor calls Free()
+    virtual ~wxCustomDataObject();
+
+    // you can call SetData() to set m_data: it will make a copy of the data
+    // you pass - or you can use TakeData() which won't copy anything, but
+    // will take ownership of data (i.e. will call Free() on it later)
+    void TakeData(size_t size, void *data);
+
+    // this function is called to allocate "size" bytes of memory from
+    // SetData(). The default version uses operator new[].
+    virtual void *Alloc(size_t size);
+
+    // this function is called when the data is freed, you may override it to
+    // anything you want (or may be nothing at all). The default version calls
+    // operator delete[] on m_data
+    virtual void Free();
+
+    // get data: you may override these functions if you wish to provide data
+    // only when it's requested
+    virtual size_t GetSize() const { return m_size; }
+    virtual void *GetData() const { return m_data; }
+
+    // implement base class pure virtuals
+    // ----------------------------------
+    virtual size_t GetDataSize() const;
+    virtual bool GetDataHere(void *buf) const;
+    virtual bool SetData(size_t size, const void *buf);
+
+private:
+    size_t m_size;
+    void  *m_data;
+
+    // virtual function hiding supression
+    size_t GetDataSize(const wxDataFormat& format) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataSize(format)); }
+    bool GetDataHere(const wxDataFormat& format, void* pBuf) const
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::GetDataHere(format, pBuf)); }
+    bool SetData(const wxDataFormat& format, size_t nLen, const void* pBuf)
+        { return(wxDataObjectSimple::SetData(format, nLen, pBuf)); }
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxCustomDataObject)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform-specific declarations of wxXXXBase classes
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dataobj2.h"
+
+    // wxURLDataObject defined in msw/ole/dataobj2.h
+#else // !__WXMSW__
+    #if defined(__WXGTK__)
+        #include "wx/gtk/dataobj2.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXX11__)
+        #include "wx/x11/dataobj2.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+        #include "wx/motif/dataobj2.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+        #include "wx/mac/dataobj2.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXPM__)
+        #include "wx/os2/dataobj2.h"
+    #endif
+
+    // wxURLDataObject is simply wxTextDataObject with a different name
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxURLDataObject : public wxTextDataObject
+    {
+    public:
+        wxString GetURL() const { return GetText(); }
+        void SetURL(const wxString& url) { SetText(url); }
+    };
+#endif // __WXMSW__/!__WXMSW__
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DATAOBJ
+
+#endif // _WX_DATAOBJ_H_BASE_

include/wx/datetime.inl

@@ -0,0 +1,547 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/datetime.inl
+// Purpose:     definition of inline functions of wxDateTime and related
+//              classes declared in datetime.h
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Remarks:     having the inline functions here allows us to minimize the
+//              dependencies (and hence the rebuild time) in debug builds.
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     30.11.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows license
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef INCLUDED_FROM_WX_DATETIME_H
+    #error "This file is only included by wx/datetime.h, don't include it manually!"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// private macros
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define MILLISECONDS_PER_DAY 86400000l
+
+// some broken compilers (HP-UX CC) refuse to compile the "normal" version, but
+// using a temp variable always might prevent other compilers from optimising
+// it away - hence use of this ugly macro
+#ifndef __HPUX__
+    #define MODIFY_AND_RETURN(op) return wxDateTime(*this).op
+#else
+    #define MODIFY_AND_RETURN(op) wxDateTime dt(*this); dt.op; return dt
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDateTime construction
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsInStdRange() const
+{
+    return m_time >= 0l && (m_time / TIME_T_FACTOR) < LONG_MAX;
+}
+
+/* static */
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::Now()
+{
+    return wxDateTime(*GetTmNow());
+}
+
+/* static */
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::Today()
+{
+    struct tm *time = GetTmNow();
+    time->tm_hour = 0;
+    time->tm_min = 0;
+    time->tm_sec = 0;
+
+    return wxDateTime(*time);
+}
+
+#if (!(defined(__VISAGECPP__) && __IBMCPP__ >= 400))
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::Set(time_t timet)
+{
+    // assign first to avoid long multiplication overflow!
+    m_time = timet - WX_TIME_BASE_OFFSET ;
+    m_time *= TIME_T_FACTOR;
+
+    return *this;
+}
+#endif
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::SetToCurrent()
+{
+    *this = Now();
+    return *this;
+}
+
+#if (!(defined(__VISAGECPP__) && __IBMCPP__ >= 400))
+inline wxDateTime::wxDateTime(time_t timet)
+{
+    Set(timet);
+}
+#endif
+
+inline wxDateTime::wxDateTime(const struct tm& tm)
+{
+    Set(tm);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime::wxDateTime(const Tm& tm)
+{
+    Set(tm);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime::wxDateTime(double jdn)
+{
+    Set(jdn);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::Set(const Tm& tm)
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( tm.IsValid(), _T("invalid broken down date/time") );
+
+    return Set(tm.mday, (Month)tm.mon, tm.year, tm.hour, tm.min, tm.sec);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime::wxDateTime(wxDateTime_t hour,
+                              wxDateTime_t minute,
+                              wxDateTime_t second,
+                              wxDateTime_t millisec)
+{
+    Set(hour, minute, second, millisec);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime::wxDateTime(wxDateTime_t day,
+                              Month        month,
+                              int          year,
+                              wxDateTime_t hour,
+                              wxDateTime_t minute,
+                              wxDateTime_t second,
+                              wxDateTime_t millisec)
+{
+    Set(day, month, year, hour, minute, second, millisec);
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDateTime accessors
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline wxLongLong wxDateTime::GetValue() const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    return m_time;
+}
+
+inline time_t wxDateTime::GetTicks() const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+    if ( !IsInStdRange() )
+    {
+        return (time_t)-1;
+    }
+
+    return (time_t)((m_time / (long)TIME_T_FACTOR).GetLo())+WX_TIME_BASE_OFFSET ;
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::SetToLastWeekDay(WeekDay weekday,
+                                         Month month,
+                                         int year)
+{
+    return SetToWeekDay(weekday, -1, month, year);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetWeekDayInSameWeek(WeekDay weekday,
+                                                   WeekFlags flags) const
+{
+    MODIFY_AND_RETURN( SetToWeekDayInSameWeek(weekday) );
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetNextWeekDay(WeekDay weekday) const
+{
+    MODIFY_AND_RETURN( SetToNextWeekDay(weekday) );
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetPrevWeekDay(WeekDay weekday) const
+{
+    MODIFY_AND_RETURN( SetToPrevWeekDay(weekday) );
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetWeekDay(WeekDay weekday,
+                                         int n,
+                                         Month month,
+                                         int year) const
+{
+    wxDateTime dt(*this);
+
+    return dt.SetToWeekDay(weekday, n, month, year) ? dt : wxInvalidDateTime;
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetLastWeekDay(WeekDay weekday,
+                                             Month month,
+                                             int year)
+{
+    wxDateTime dt(*this);
+
+    return dt.SetToLastWeekDay(weekday, month, year) ? dt : wxInvalidDateTime;
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetWeek(wxDateTime_t numWeek,
+                                      WeekDay weekday,
+                                      WeekFlags flags) const
+{
+    wxDateTime dt(*this);
+
+    return dt.SetToTheWeek(numWeek, weekday, flags) ? dt : wxInvalidDateTime;
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetLastMonthDay(Month month, int year) const
+{
+    MODIFY_AND_RETURN( SetToLastMonthDay(month, year) );
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::GetYearDay(wxDateTime_t yday) const
+{
+    MODIFY_AND_RETURN( SetToYearDay(yday) );
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDateTime comparison
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsEqualTo(const wxDateTime& datetime) const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid() && datetime.IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    return m_time == datetime.m_time;
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsEarlierThan(const wxDateTime& datetime) const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid() && datetime.IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    return m_time < datetime.m_time;
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsLaterThan(const wxDateTime& datetime) const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid() && datetime.IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    return m_time > datetime.m_time;
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsStrictlyBetween(const wxDateTime& t1,
+                                          const wxDateTime& t2) const
+{
+    // no need for assert, will be checked by the functions we call
+    return IsLaterThan(t1) && IsEarlierThan(t2);
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsBetween(const wxDateTime& t1,
+                                  const wxDateTime& t2) const
+{
+    // no need for assert, will be checked by the functions we call
+    return IsEqualTo(t1) || IsEqualTo(t2) || IsStrictlyBetween(t1, t2);
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsSameDate(const wxDateTime& dt) const
+{
+    Tm tm1 = GetTm(),
+       tm2 = dt.GetTm();
+
+    return tm1.year == tm2.year &&
+           tm1.mon == tm2.mon &&
+           tm1.mday == tm2.mday;
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsSameTime(const wxDateTime& dt) const
+{
+    // notice that we can't do something like this:
+    //
+    //    m_time % MILLISECONDS_PER_DAY == dt.m_time % MILLISECONDS_PER_DAY
+    //
+    // because we have also to deal with (possibly) different DST settings!
+    Tm tm1 = GetTm(),
+       tm2 = dt.GetTm();
+
+    return tm1.hour == tm2.hour &&
+           tm1.min == tm2.min &&
+           tm1.sec == tm2.sec &&
+           tm1.msec == tm2.msec;
+}
+
+inline bool wxDateTime::IsEqualUpTo(const wxDateTime& dt,
+                                    const wxTimeSpan& ts) const
+{
+    return IsBetween(dt.Subtract(ts), dt.Add(ts));
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDateTime arithmetics
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::Add(const wxTimeSpan& diff) const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    return wxDateTime(m_time + diff.GetValue());
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::Add(const wxTimeSpan& diff)
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    m_time += diff.GetValue();
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::operator+=(const wxTimeSpan& diff)
+{
+    return Add(diff);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::Subtract(const wxTimeSpan& diff) const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    return wxDateTime(m_time - diff.GetValue());
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::Subtract(const wxTimeSpan& diff)
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    m_time -= diff.GetValue();
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::operator-=(const wxTimeSpan& diff)
+{
+    return Subtract(diff);
+}
+
+inline wxTimeSpan wxDateTime::Subtract(const wxDateTime& datetime) const
+{
+    wxASSERT_MSG( IsValid() && datetime.IsValid(), _T("invalid wxDateTime"));
+
+    return wxTimeSpan(GetValue() - datetime.GetValue());
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::Add(const wxDateSpan& diff) const
+{
+    return wxDateTime(*this).Add(diff);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::Subtract(const wxDateSpan& diff)
+{
+    return Add(diff.Negate());
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::Subtract(const wxDateSpan& diff) const
+{
+    return wxDateTime(*this).Subtract(diff);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::operator-=(const wxDateSpan& diff)
+{
+    return Subtract(diff);
+}
+
+inline wxDateTime& wxDateTime::operator+=(const wxDateSpan& diff)
+{
+    return Add(diff);
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDateTime and timezones
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline wxDateTime wxDateTime::ToTimezone(const wxDateTime::TimeZone& tz,
+                                         bool noDST) const
+{
+    MODIFY_AND_RETURN( MakeTimezone(tz, noDST) );
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTimeSpan construction
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline wxTimeSpan::wxTimeSpan(long hours,
+                              long minutes,
+                              long seconds,
+                              long milliseconds)
+{
+    // assign first to avoid precision loss
+    m_diff = hours;
+    m_diff *= 60l;
+    m_diff += minutes;
+    m_diff *= 60l;
+    m_diff += seconds;
+    m_diff *= 1000l;
+    m_diff += milliseconds;
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTimeSpan accessors
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline wxLongLong wxTimeSpan::GetSeconds() const
+{
+    return m_diff / 1000l;
+}
+
+inline int wxTimeSpan::GetMinutes() const
+{
+    return (GetSeconds() / 60l).GetLo();
+}
+
+inline int wxTimeSpan::GetHours() const
+{
+    return GetMinutes() / 60;
+}
+
+inline int wxTimeSpan::GetDays() const
+{
+    return GetHours() / 24;
+}
+
+inline int wxTimeSpan::GetWeeks() const
+{
+    return GetDays() / 7;
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxTimeSpan arithmetics
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline wxTimeSpan wxTimeSpan::Add(const wxTimeSpan& diff) const
+{
+    return wxTimeSpan(m_diff + diff.GetValue());
+}
+
+inline wxTimeSpan& wxTimeSpan::Add(const wxTimeSpan& diff)
+{
+    m_diff += diff.GetValue();
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxTimeSpan wxTimeSpan::Subtract(const wxTimeSpan& diff) const
+{
+    return wxTimeSpan(m_diff - diff.GetValue());
+}
+
+inline wxTimeSpan& wxTimeSpan::Subtract(const wxTimeSpan& diff)
+{
+    m_diff -= diff.GetValue();
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxTimeSpan& wxTimeSpan::Multiply(int n)
+{
+    m_diff *= (long)n;
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxTimeSpan wxTimeSpan::Multiply(int n) const
+{
+    return wxTimeSpan(m_diff * (long)n);
+}
+
+inline wxTimeSpan wxTimeSpan::Abs() const
+{
+    return wxTimeSpan(GetValue().Abs());
+}
+
+inline bool wxTimeSpan::IsEqualTo(const wxTimeSpan& ts) const
+{
+    return GetValue() == ts.GetValue();
+}
+
+inline bool wxTimeSpan::IsLongerThan(const wxTimeSpan& ts) const
+{
+    return GetValue().Abs() > ts.GetValue().Abs();
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDateSpan
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+inline wxDateSpan& wxDateSpan::operator+=(const wxDateSpan& other)
+{
+    m_years += other.m_years;
+    m_months += other.m_months;
+    m_weeks += other.m_weeks;
+    m_days += other.m_days;
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan& wxDateSpan::Add(const wxDateSpan& other)
+{
+    return *this += other;
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan wxDateSpan::Add(const wxDateSpan& other) const
+{
+    wxDateSpan ds(*this);
+    ds.Add(other);
+    return ds;
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan& wxDateSpan::Multiply(int factor)
+{
+    m_years *= factor;
+    m_months *= factor;
+    m_weeks *= factor;
+    m_days *= factor;
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan wxDateSpan::Multiply(int factor) const
+{
+    wxDateSpan ds(*this);
+    ds.Multiply(factor);
+    return ds;
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan wxDateSpan::Negate() const
+{
+    return wxDateSpan(-m_years, -m_months, -m_weeks, -m_days);
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan& wxDateSpan::Neg()
+{
+    m_years = -m_years;
+    m_months = -m_months;
+    m_weeks = -m_weeks;
+    m_days = -m_days;
+
+    return *this;
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan& wxDateSpan::operator-=(const wxDateSpan& other)
+{
+    return *this += other.Negate();
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan& wxDateSpan::Subtract(const wxDateSpan& other)
+{
+    return *this -= other;
+}
+
+inline wxDateSpan wxDateSpan::Subtract(const wxDateSpan& other) const
+{
+    wxDateSpan ds(*this);
+    ds.Subtract(other);
+    return ds;
+}
+
+#undef MILLISECONDS_PER_DAY
+
+#undef MODIFY_AND_RETURN

include/wx/datstrm.h

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        datstrm.h
+// Purpose:     Data stream classes
+// Author:      Guilhem Lavaux
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     28/06/1998
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Guilhem Lavaux
+// Licence:   	wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DATSTREAM_H_
+#define _WX_DATSTREAM_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "datstrm.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/stream.h"
+#include "wx/longlong.h"
+#include "wx/strconv.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_STREAMS
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataInputStream
+{
+public:
+#if wxUSE_UNICODE
+    wxDataInputStream(wxInputStream& s, wxMBConv& conv = wxConvUTF8);
+#else
+    wxDataInputStream(wxInputStream& s);
+#endif
+    ~wxDataInputStream();
+    
+    bool IsOk() { return m_input->IsOk(); }
+
+    wxUint64 Read64();
+    wxUint32 Read32();
+    wxUint16 Read16();
+    wxUint8 Read8();
+    double ReadDouble();
+    wxString ReadString();
+
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxString& s);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxInt8& c);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxInt16& i);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxInt32& i);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxUint8& c);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxUint16& i);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxUint32& i);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(wxUint64& i);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(double& i);
+    wxDataInputStream& operator>>(float& f);
+
+    void BigEndianOrdered(bool be_order) { m_be_order = be_order; }
+
+protected:
+    wxInputStream *m_input;
+    bool m_be_order;
+#if wxUSE_UNICODE
+    wxMBConv& m_conv;
+#endif
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDataInputStream)
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDataOutputStream
+{
+public:
+#if wxUSE_UNICODE
+    wxDataOutputStream(wxOutputStream& s, wxMBConv& conv = wxConvUTF8);
+#else
+    wxDataOutputStream(wxOutputStream& s);
+#endif
+    ~wxDataOutputStream();
+
+    bool IsOk() { return m_output->IsOk(); }
+
+    void Write64(wxUint64 i);
+    void Write32(wxUint32 i);
+    void Write16(wxUint16 i);
+    void Write8(wxUint8 i);
+    void WriteDouble(double d);
+    void WriteString(const wxString& string);
+
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(const wxChar *string);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(const wxString& string);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(wxInt8 c);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(wxInt16 i);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(wxInt32 i);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(wxUint8 c);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(wxUint16 i);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(wxUint32 i);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(wxUint64 i);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(double f);
+    wxDataOutputStream& operator<<(float f);
+
+    void BigEndianOrdered(bool be_order) { m_be_order = be_order; }
+
+protected:
+    wxOutputStream *m_output;
+    bool m_be_order;
+#if wxUSE_UNICODE
+    wxMBConv& m_conv;
+#endif
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDataOutputStream)
+};
+
+#endif
+  // wxUSE_STREAMS
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DATSTREAM_H_

include/wx/db.h

@@ -0,0 +1,776 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/db.h
+// Purpose:     Header file wxDb class.  The wxDb class represents a connection
+//              to an ODBC data source.  The wxDb class allows operations on the data
+//              source such as opening and closing the data source.
+// Author:      Doug Card
+// Modified by: George Tasker
+//              Bart Jourquin
+//              Mark Johnson, wxWindows@mj10777.de
+// Mods:        Dec, 1998:
+//                -Added support for SQL statement logging and database cataloging
+//                     April, 1999
+//                -Added QUERY_ONLY mode support to reduce default number of cursors
+//                -Added additional SQL logging code
+//                -Added DEBUG-ONLY tracking of Ctable objects to detect orphaned DB connections
+//                -Set ODBC option to only read committed writes to the DB so all
+//                     databases operate the same in that respect
+//
+// Created:     9.96
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996 Remstar International, Inc.
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence, plus:
+// Notice:      This class library and its intellectual design are free of charge for use,
+//              modification, enhancement, debugging under the following conditions:
+//              1) These classes may only be used as part of the implementation of a
+//                 wxWindows-based application
+//              2) All enhancements and bug fixes are to be submitted back to the wxWindows
+//                 user groups free of all charges for use with the wxWindows library.
+//              3) These classes may not be distributed as part of any other class library,
+//                 DLL, text (written or electronic), other than a complete distribution of
+//                 the wxWindows GUI development toolkit.
+//
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DB_H_
+#define _WX_DB_H_
+
+
+// BJO 20000503: introduce new GetColumns members which are more database independant and 
+//               return columns in the order they were created
+#define OLD_GETCOLUMNS 1
+#define EXPERIMENTAL_WXDB_FUNCTIONS 1
+
+#include "wx/version.h"
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "db.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/setup.h"
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+
+#ifdef __VISUALC__
+    // we need to include standard Windows headers but we can't include
+    // <windows.h> directly when using MFC because it includes it itself in a
+    // different manner
+    #if wxUSE_MFC
+        #include <afxwin.h>
+    #else // !wxUSE_MFC
+        #ifndef STRICT
+            #define STRICT 1
+        #endif
+
+        #include <windows.h>
+        #include "wx/msw/winundef.h"
+    #endif // wxUSE_MFC/!wxUSE_MFC
+
+    // If you use the wxDbCreateDataSource() function with MSW/VC6,
+    // you cannot use the iODBC headers, you must use the VC headers,
+    // plus the odbcinst.h header - gt Nov 2 2000
+    //
+    // Must add "odbccp32.lib" in \wx2\wxWindows\src\makevc.env to the WINLIBS= line
+    //
+    #include "sql.h"
+    #include "sqlext.h"
+    #include "odbcinst.h"
+#else
+    // Use the ones from the library
+    extern "C" {
+        #include <sql.h>
+        #include <sqlext.h>
+    }
+#endif
+
+
+typedef float SFLOAT;
+typedef double SDOUBLE;
+typedef unsigned int UINT;
+#define ULONG UDWORD
+
+#ifndef wxODBC_FWD_ONLY_CURSORS
+#define wxODBC_FWD_ONLY_CURSORS 1
+#endif
+
+enum enumDummy {enumDum1};
+
+#ifndef SQL_C_BOOLEAN
+#define SQL_C_BOOLEAN(datatype) (sizeof(datatype) == 1 ? SQL_C_UTINYINT : (sizeof(datatype) == 2 ? SQL_C_USHORT : SQL_C_ULONG))
+//#  define SQL_C_BOOLEAN (sizeof(int) == 2 ? SQL_C_USHORT : SQL_C_ULONG)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef SQL_C_ENUM
+#define SQL_C_ENUM (sizeof(enumDummy) == 2 ? SQL_C_USHORT : SQL_C_ULONG)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef SQL_C_BLOB
+    #ifdef SQL_LONGVARBINARY
+        #define SQL_C_BLOB SQL_LONGVARBINARY
+    #elif SQL_VARBINARY
+        #define SQL_C_BLOB SQL_VARBINARY
+    #endif
+#endif
+/*
+#ifndef TRUE
+#define TRUE true
+#endif
+
+#ifndef FALSE
+#define FALSE false
+#endif
+*/
+const int wxDB_PATH_MAX                 = 254;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxChar const *) SQL_LOG_FILENAME;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxChar const *) SQL_CATALOG_FILENAME;
+
+// Database Globals
+const int DB_TYPE_NAME_LEN            = 40;
+const int DB_MAX_STATEMENT_LEN        = 4096;
+const int DB_MAX_WHERE_CLAUSE_LEN     = 2048;
+const int DB_MAX_ERROR_MSG_LEN        = 512;
+const int DB_MAX_ERROR_HISTORY        = 5;
+const int DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN       = 128;
+const int DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN      = 128;
+
+const int DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR        = 1;
+const int DB_DATA_TYPE_INTEGER        = 2;
+const int DB_DATA_TYPE_FLOAT          = 3;
+const int DB_DATA_TYPE_DATE           = 4;
+const int DB_DATA_TYPE_BLOB           = 5;
+
+const int DB_SELECT_KEYFIELDS         = 1;
+const int DB_SELECT_WHERE             = 2;
+const int DB_SELECT_MATCHING          = 3;
+const int DB_SELECT_STATEMENT         = 4;
+
+const int DB_UPD_KEYFIELDS            = 1;
+const int DB_UPD_WHERE                = 2;
+
+const int DB_DEL_KEYFIELDS            = 1;
+const int DB_DEL_WHERE                = 2;
+const int DB_DEL_MATCHING             = 3;
+
+const int DB_WHERE_KEYFIELDS          = 1;
+const int DB_WHERE_MATCHING           = 2;
+
+const int DB_GRANT_SELECT             = 1;
+const int DB_GRANT_INSERT             = 2;
+const int DB_GRANT_UPDATE             = 4;
+const int DB_GRANT_DELETE             = 8;
+const int DB_GRANT_ALL                = DB_GRANT_SELECT | DB_GRANT_INSERT | DB_GRANT_UPDATE | DB_GRANT_DELETE;
+
+// ODBC Error codes (derived from ODBC SqlState codes)
+enum wxODBC_ERRORS
+{
+    DB_FAILURE                        = 0,
+    DB_SUCCESS                        = 1,
+    DB_ERR_NOT_IN_USE,
+    DB_ERR_GENERAL_WARNING,                            // SqlState = '01000'
+    DB_ERR_DISCONNECT_ERROR,                           // SqlState = '01002'
+    DB_ERR_DATA_TRUNCATED,                             // SqlState = '01004'
+    DB_ERR_PRIV_NOT_REVOKED,                           // SqlState = '01006'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_CONN_STR_ATTR,                      // SqlState = '01S00'
+    DB_ERR_ERROR_IN_ROW,                               // SqlState = '01S01'
+    DB_ERR_OPTION_VALUE_CHANGED,                       // SqlState = '01S02'
+    DB_ERR_NO_ROWS_UPD_OR_DEL,                         // SqlState = '01S03'
+    DB_ERR_MULTI_ROWS_UPD_OR_DEL,                      // SqlState = '01S04'
+    DB_ERR_WRONG_NO_OF_PARAMS,                         // SqlState = '07001'
+    DB_ERR_DATA_TYPE_ATTR_VIOL,                        // SqlState = '07006'
+    DB_ERR_UNABLE_TO_CONNECT,                          // SqlState = '08001'
+    DB_ERR_CONNECTION_IN_USE,                          // SqlState = '08002'
+    DB_ERR_CONNECTION_NOT_OPEN,                        // SqlState = '08003'
+    DB_ERR_REJECTED_CONNECTION,                        // SqlState = '08004'
+    DB_ERR_CONN_FAIL_IN_TRANS,                         // SqlState = '08007'
+    DB_ERR_COMM_LINK_FAILURE,                          // SqlState = '08S01'
+    DB_ERR_INSERT_VALUE_LIST_MISMATCH,                 // SqlState = '21S01'
+    DB_ERR_DERIVED_TABLE_MISMATCH,                     // SqlState = '21S02'
+    DB_ERR_STRING_RIGHT_TRUNC,                         // SqlState = '22001'
+    DB_ERR_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RNG,                   // SqlState = '22003'
+    DB_ERR_ERROR_IN_ASSIGNMENT,                        // SqlState = '22005'
+    DB_ERR_DATETIME_FLD_OVERFLOW,                      // SqlState = '22008'
+    DB_ERR_DIVIDE_BY_ZERO,                             // SqlState = '22012'
+    DB_ERR_STR_DATA_LENGTH_MISMATCH,                   // SqlState = '22026'
+    DB_ERR_INTEGRITY_CONSTRAINT_VIOL,                  // SqlState = '23000'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_CURSOR_STATE,                       // SqlState = '24000'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_TRANS_STATE,                        // SqlState = '25000'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_AUTH_SPEC,                          // SqlState = '28000'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_CURSOR_NAME,                        // SqlState = '34000'
+    DB_ERR_SYNTAX_ERROR_OR_ACCESS_VIOL,                // SqlState = '37000'
+    DB_ERR_DUPLICATE_CURSOR_NAME,                      // SqlState = '3C000'
+    DB_ERR_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE,                      // SqlState = '40001'
+    DB_ERR_SYNTAX_ERROR_OR_ACCESS_VIOL2,               // SqlState = '42000'
+    DB_ERR_OPERATION_ABORTED,                          // SqlState = '70100'
+    DB_ERR_UNSUPPORTED_FUNCTION,                       // SqlState = 'IM001'
+    DB_ERR_NO_DATA_SOURCE,                             // SqlState = 'IM002'
+    DB_ERR_DRIVER_LOAD_ERROR,                          // SqlState = 'IM003'
+    DB_ERR_SQLALLOCENV_FAILED,                         // SqlState = 'IM004'
+    DB_ERR_SQLALLOCCONNECT_FAILED,                     // SqlState = 'IM005'
+    DB_ERR_SQLSETCONNECTOPTION_FAILED,                 // SqlState = 'IM006'
+    DB_ERR_NO_DATA_SOURCE_DLG_PROHIB,                  // SqlState = 'IM007'
+    DB_ERR_DIALOG_FAILED,                              // SqlState = 'IM008'
+    DB_ERR_UNABLE_TO_LOAD_TRANSLATION_DLL,             // SqlState = 'IM009'
+    DB_ERR_DATA_SOURCE_NAME_TOO_LONG,                  // SqlState = 'IM010'
+    DB_ERR_DRIVER_NAME_TOO_LONG,                       // SqlState = 'IM011'
+    DB_ERR_DRIVER_KEYWORD_SYNTAX_ERROR,                // SqlState = 'IM012'
+    DB_ERR_TRACE_FILE_ERROR,                           // SqlState = 'IM013'
+    DB_ERR_TABLE_OR_VIEW_ALREADY_EXISTS,               // SqlState = 'S0001'
+    DB_ERR_TABLE_NOT_FOUND,                            // SqlState = 'S0002'
+    DB_ERR_INDEX_ALREADY_EXISTS,                       // SqlState = 'S0011'
+    DB_ERR_INDEX_NOT_FOUND,                            // SqlState = 'S0012'
+    DB_ERR_COLUMN_ALREADY_EXISTS,                      // SqlState = 'S0021'
+    DB_ERR_COLUMN_NOT_FOUND,                           // SqlState = 'S0022'
+    DB_ERR_NO_DEFAULT_FOR_COLUMN,                      // SqlState = 'S0023'
+    DB_ERR_GENERAL_ERROR,                              // SqlState = 'S1000'
+    DB_ERR_MEMORY_ALLOCATION_FAILURE,                  // SqlState = 'S1001'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_COLUMN_NUMBER,                      // SqlState = 'S1002'
+    DB_ERR_PROGRAM_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                  // SqlState = 'S1003'
+    DB_ERR_SQL_DATA_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                 // SqlState = 'S1004'
+    DB_ERR_OPERATION_CANCELLED,                        // SqlState = 'S1008'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_ARGUMENT_VALUE,                     // SqlState = 'S1009'
+    DB_ERR_FUNCTION_SEQUENCE_ERROR,                    // SqlState = 'S1010'
+    DB_ERR_OPERATION_INVALID_AT_THIS_TIME,             // SqlState = 'S1011'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_TRANS_OPERATION_CODE,               // SqlState = 'S1012'
+    DB_ERR_NO_CURSOR_NAME_AVAIL,                       // SqlState = 'S1015'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_STR_OR_BUF_LEN,                     // SqlState = 'S1090'
+    DB_ERR_DESCRIPTOR_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,               // SqlState = 'S1091'
+    DB_ERR_OPTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                   // SqlState = 'S1092'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_PARAM_NO,                           // SqlState = 'S1093'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_SCALE_VALUE,                        // SqlState = 'S1094'
+    DB_ERR_FUNCTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                 // SqlState = 'S1095'
+    DB_ERR_INF_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                      // SqlState = 'S1096'
+    DB_ERR_COLUMN_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                   // SqlState = 'S1097'
+    DB_ERR_SCOPE_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                    // SqlState = 'S1098'
+    DB_ERR_NULLABLE_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                 // SqlState = 'S1099'
+    DB_ERR_UNIQUENESS_OPTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,        // SqlState = 'S1100'
+    DB_ERR_ACCURACY_OPTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,          // SqlState = 'S1101'
+    DB_ERR_DIRECTION_OPTION_OUT_OF_RANGE,              // SqlState = 'S1103'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_PRECISION_VALUE,                    // SqlState = 'S1104'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_PARAM_TYPE,                         // SqlState = 'S1105'
+    DB_ERR_FETCH_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                    // SqlState = 'S1106'
+    DB_ERR_ROW_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE,                     // SqlState = 'S1107'
+    DB_ERR_CONCURRENCY_OPTION_OUT_OF_RANGE,            // SqlState = 'S1108'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_CURSOR_POSITION,                    // SqlState = 'S1109'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_DRIVER_COMPLETION,                  // SqlState = 'S1110'
+    DB_ERR_INVALID_BOOKMARK_VALUE,                     // SqlState = 'S1111'
+    DB_ERR_DRIVER_NOT_CAPABLE,                         // SqlState = 'S1C00'
+    DB_ERR_TIMEOUT_EXPIRED                             // SqlState = 'S1T00'
+};
+
+#ifndef MAXNAME
+#define MAXNAME         31
+#endif
+
+#ifndef SQL_MAX_AUTHSTR_LEN
+// There does not seem to be a standard for this, so I am
+// defaulting to the value that MS uses
+#define SQL_MAX_AUTHSTR_LEN MAXNAME
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbConnectInf
+{
+    private:
+        bool freeHenvOnDestroy;
+
+    public:
+        HENV Henv;
+        wxChar Dsn[SQL_MAX_DSN_LENGTH+1];                  // Data Source Name
+        wxChar Uid[SQL_MAX_USER_NAME_LEN+1];               // User ID
+        wxChar AuthStr[SQL_MAX_AUTHSTR_LEN+1];             // Authorization string (password)
+
+        wxString Description;                              // Not sure what the max length is
+        wxString FileType;                                 // Not sure what the max length is
+
+        // Optionals needed for some databases like dBase
+        wxString DefaultDir;                               // Directory that db file resides in
+
+    public:
+
+        wxDbConnectInf();
+        wxDbConnectInf(HENV henv, const wxString &dsn, const wxString &userID=wxEmptyString, 
+                       const wxString &password=wxEmptyString, const wxString &defaultDir=wxEmptyString, 
+                       const wxString &description=wxEmptyString, const wxString &fileType=wxEmptyString);
+
+        ~wxDbConnectInf();
+
+        bool             Initialize();
+
+        bool             AllocHenv();
+        void             FreeHenv();
+
+        // Accessors
+        const HENV       &GetHenv()          { return Henv; };
+
+        const wxChar    *GetDsn()           { return Dsn; };
+
+        const wxChar    *GetUid()           { return Uid; };
+        const wxChar    *GetUserID()        { return Uid; };
+
+        const wxChar    *GetAuthStr()       { return AuthStr; };
+        const wxChar    *GetPassword()      { return AuthStr; };
+
+        const wxChar    *GetDescription()   { return Description; };
+        const wxChar    *GetFileType()      { return FileType; };
+        const wxChar    *GetDefaultDir()    { return DefaultDir; };
+
+        void             SetHenv(const HENV henv)               { Henv = henv; };
+
+        void             SetDsn(const wxString &dsn);
+
+        void             SetUserID(const wxString &userID);
+        void             SetUid(const wxString &uid)            { SetUserID(uid); };
+
+        void             SetPassword(const wxString &password);
+        void             SetAuthStr(const wxString &authstr)    { SetPassword(authstr); };
+
+        void             SetDescription(const wxString &desc)   { Description   = desc;     };
+        void             SetFileType(const wxString &fileType)  { FileType      = fileType; };
+        void             SetDefaultDir(const wxString &defDir)  { DefaultDir    = defDir;   };
+};  // class wxDbConnectInf
+
+
+struct WXDLLEXPORT wxDbSqlTypeInfo
+{
+    wxString    TypeName;
+    SWORD       FsqlType;
+    long        Precision;
+    short       CaseSensitive;
+//    short     MinimumScale;
+    short       MaximumScale;
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbColFor
+{
+public:
+    wxString       s_Field;              // Formated String for Output
+    wxString       s_Format[7];          // Formated Objects - TIMESTAMP has the biggest (7)
+    wxString       s_Amount[7];          // Formated Objects - amount of things that can be formatted
+    int            i_Amount[7];          // Formated Objects - TT MM YYYY HH MM SS m
+    int            i_Nation;             // 0 = timestamp , 1=EU, 2=UK, 3=International, 4=US
+    int            i_dbDataType;         // conversion of the 'sqlDataType' to the generic data type used by these classes
+    SWORD          i_sqlDataType;
+
+    wxDbColFor();
+    ~wxDbColFor();
+
+    void           Initialize();
+    int            Format(int Nation, int dbDataType, SWORD sqlDataType, short columnSize, short decimalDigits);
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbColInf
+{
+public:
+    wxChar       catalog[128+1];
+    wxChar       schema[128+1];
+    wxChar       tableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1];
+    wxChar       colName[DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN+1];
+    SWORD        sqlDataType;
+    wxChar       typeName[128+1];
+    SWORD        columnSize;
+    SWORD        bufferLength;
+    short        decimalDigits;
+    short        numPrecRadix;
+    short        nullable;
+    wxChar       remarks[254+1];
+    int          dbDataType;  // conversion of the 'sqlDataType' to the generic data type used by these classes
+ // mj10777.19991224 : new
+    int          PkCol;       // Primary key column       0=No; 1= First Key, 2 = Second Key etc.
+    wxChar       PkTableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1]; // Tables that use this PKey as a FKey
+    int          FkCol;       // Foreign key column       0=No; 1= First Key, 2 = Second Key etc.
+    wxChar       FkTableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1]; // Foreign key table name
+    wxDbColFor  *pColFor;                              // How should this columns be formatted
+
+    wxDbColInf();
+    ~wxDbColInf();
+
+    bool Initialize();
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbTableInf        // Description of a Table
+{
+public:
+    wxChar      tableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1];
+    wxChar      tableType[254+1];           // "TABLE" or "SYSTEM TABLE" etc.
+    wxChar      tableRemarks[254+1];
+    UWORD       numCols;                    // How many Columns does this Table have: GetColumnCount(..);
+    wxDbColInf *pColInf;                    // pColInf = NULL ; User can later call GetColumns(..);
+
+    wxDbTableInf();
+    ~wxDbTableInf();
+
+    bool             Initialize();
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbInf     // Description of a Database
+{
+public:
+    wxChar        catalog[128+1];
+    wxChar        schema[128+1];
+    int           numTables;           // How many tables does this database have
+    wxDbTableInf *pTableInf;           // pTableInf = new wxDbTableInf[numTables];
+
+    wxDbInf();
+    ~wxDbInf();
+
+    bool          Initialize();
+};
+
+
+enum wxDbSqlLogState
+{
+    sqlLogOFF,
+    sqlLogON
+};
+
+// These are the databases currently tested and working with these classes
+// See the comments in wxDb::Dbms() for exceptions/issues with
+// each of these database engines
+enum wxDBMS
+{
+    dbmsUNIDENTIFIED,
+    dbmsORACLE,
+    dbmsSYBASE_ASA,        // Adaptive Server Anywhere
+    dbmsSYBASE_ASE,        // Adaptive Server Enterprise
+    dbmsMS_SQL_SERVER,
+    dbmsMY_SQL,
+    dbmsPOSTGRES,
+    dbmsACCESS,
+    dbmsDBASE,
+    dbmsINFORMIX,
+    dbmsVIRTUOSO,
+    dbmsDB2,
+    dbmsINTERBASE,
+    dbmsPERVASIVE_SQL,
+    dbmsXBASE_SEQUITER
+};
+
+
+// The wxDb::errorList is copied to this variable when the wxDb object
+// is closed.  This way, the error list is still available after the
+// database object is closed.  This is necessary if the database
+// connection fails so the calling application can show the operator
+// why the connection failed.  Note: as each wxDb object is closed, it
+// will overwrite the errors of the previously destroyed wxDb object in
+// this variable.
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxChar) DBerrorList[DB_MAX_ERROR_HISTORY][DB_MAX_ERROR_MSG_LEN];
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDb
+{
+private:
+    bool             dbIsOpen;
+    bool             dbIsCached;      // Was connection created by caching functions
+    wxString         dsn;             // Data source name
+    wxString         uid;             // User ID
+    wxString         authStr;         // Authorization string (password)
+    FILE            *fpSqlLog;        // Sql Log file pointer
+    wxDbSqlLogState  sqlLogState;     // On or Off
+    bool             fwdOnlyCursors;
+    wxDBMS           dbmsType;        // Type of datasource - i.e. Oracle, dBase, SQLServer, etc
+
+    // Private member functions
+    bool             getDbInfo(void);
+    bool             getDataTypeInfo(SWORD fSqlType, wxDbSqlTypeInfo &structSQLTypeInfo);
+    bool             setConnectionOptions(void);
+    void             logError(const wxString &errMsg, const wxString &SQLState);
+    const wxChar    *convertUserID(const wxChar *userID, wxString &UserID);
+    void             initialize();
+
+#if !wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+    // ODBC handles
+    HENV  henv;        // ODBC Environment handle
+    HDBC  hdbc;        // ODBC DB Connection handle
+    HSTMT hstmt;       // ODBC Statement handle
+
+    //Error reporting mode
+    bool silent;
+
+    // Number of Ctable objects connected to this db object.  FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY!!!
+    unsigned int nTables;
+
+    // Information about logical data types VARCHAR, INTEGER, FLOAT and DATE.
+     //
+    // This information is obtained from the ODBC driver by use of the
+    // SQLGetTypeInfo() function.  The key piece of information is the
+    // type name the data source uses for each logical data type.
+    // e.g. VARCHAR; Oracle calls it VARCHAR2.
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfVarchar;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfInteger;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfFloat;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfDate;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfBlob;
+#endif
+
+public:
+
+    void             setCached(bool cached)  { dbIsCached = cached; };  // This function must only be called by wxDbGetConnection() and wxDbCloseConnections!!!
+    bool             IsCached() { return dbIsCached; };
+
+    bool             GetDataTypeInfo(SWORD fSqlType, wxDbSqlTypeInfo &structSQLTypeInfo)
+                            { return getDataTypeInfo(fSqlType, structSQLTypeInfo); }
+
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+    // ODBC handles
+    HENV  henv;        // ODBC Environment handle
+    HDBC  hdbc;        // ODBC DB Connection handle
+    HSTMT hstmt;       // ODBC Statement handle
+
+    //Error reporting mode
+    bool silent;
+
+    // Number of Ctable objects connected to this db object.  FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY!!!
+    unsigned int nTables;
+#endif
+
+    // The following structure contains database information gathered from the
+    // datasource when the datasource is first opened.
+    struct
+    {
+        wxChar dbmsName[40];                             // Name of the dbms product
+        wxChar dbmsVer[64];                              // Version # of the dbms product
+        wxChar driverName[40];                           // Driver name
+        wxChar odbcVer[60];                              // ODBC version of the driver
+        wxChar drvMgrOdbcVer[60];                        // ODBC version of the driver manager
+        wxChar driverVer[60];                            // Driver version
+        wxChar serverName[80];                           // Server Name, typically a connect string
+        wxChar databaseName[128];                        // Database filename
+        wxChar outerJoins[2];                            // Indicates whether the data source supports outer joins
+        wxChar procedureSupport[2];                      // Indicates whether the data source supports stored procedures
+        wxChar accessibleTables[2];                      // Indicates whether the data source only reports accessible tables in SQLTables.
+        UWORD  maxConnections;                           // Maximum # of connections the data source supports
+        UWORD  maxStmts;                                 // Maximum # of HSTMTs per HDBC
+        UWORD  apiConfLvl;                               // ODBC API conformance level
+        UWORD  cliConfLvl;                               // Indicates whether the data source is SAG compliant
+        UWORD  sqlConfLvl;                               // SQL conformance level
+        UWORD  cursorCommitBehavior;                     // Indicates how cursors are affected by a db commit
+        UWORD  cursorRollbackBehavior;                   // Indicates how cursors are affected by a db rollback
+        UWORD  supportNotNullClause;                     // Indicates if data source supports NOT NULL clause
+        wxChar supportIEF[2];                            // Integrity Enhancement Facility (Referential Integrity)
+        UDWORD txnIsolation;                             // Default transaction isolation level supported by the driver
+        UDWORD txnIsolationOptions;                      // Transaction isolation level options available
+        UDWORD fetchDirections;                          // Fetch directions supported
+        UDWORD lockTypes;                                // Lock types supported in SQLSetPos
+        UDWORD posOperations;                            // Position operations supported in SQLSetPos
+        UDWORD posStmts;                                 // Position statements supported
+        UDWORD scrollConcurrency;                        // Concurrency control options supported for scrollable cursors
+        UDWORD scrollOptions;                            // Scroll Options supported for scrollable cursors
+        UDWORD staticSensitivity;                        // Indicates if additions, deletions and updates can be detected
+        UWORD  txnCapable;                               // Indicates if the data source supports transactions
+        UDWORD loginTimeout;                             // Number seconds to wait for a login request
+    } dbInf;
+
+    // ODBC Error Inf.
+    SWORD  cbErrorMsg;
+    int    DB_STATUS;
+    wxChar errorList[DB_MAX_ERROR_HISTORY][DB_MAX_ERROR_MSG_LEN];
+    wxChar errorMsg[SQL_MAX_MESSAGE_LENGTH];
+    SDWORD nativeError;
+    wxChar sqlState[20];
+
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+    // Information about logical data types VARCHAR, INTEGER, FLOAT and DATE.
+     //
+    // This information is obtained from the ODBC driver by use of the
+    // SQLGetTypeInfo() function.  The key piece of information is the
+    // type name the data source uses for each logical data type.
+    // e.g. VARCHAR; Oracle calls it VARCHAR2.
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfVarchar;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfInteger;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfFloat;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfDate;
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo typeInfBlob;
+#endif
+
+    // Public member functions
+    wxDb(const HENV &aHenv, bool FwdOnlyCursors=(bool)wxODBC_FWD_ONLY_CURSORS);
+    ~wxDb();
+
+    // Data Source Name, User ID, Password and whether open should fail on data type not supported
+    bool         Open(const wxString &Dsn, const wxString &Uid, const wxString &AuthStr, bool failOnDataTypeUnsupported=TRUE);
+    bool         Open(wxDbConnectInf *dbConnectInf);
+    bool         Open(wxDb *copyDb);  // pointer to a wxDb whose connection info should be copied rather than re-queried
+    void         Close(void);
+    bool         CommitTrans(void);
+    bool         RollbackTrans(void);
+    bool         DispAllErrors(HENV aHenv, HDBC aHdbc = SQL_NULL_HDBC, HSTMT aHstmt = SQL_NULL_HSTMT);
+    bool         GetNextError(HENV aHenv, HDBC aHdbc = SQL_NULL_HDBC, HSTMT aHstmt = SQL_NULL_HSTMT);
+    void         DispNextError(void);
+    bool         CreateView(const wxString &viewName, const wxString &colList, const wxString &pSqlStmt, bool attemptDrop=TRUE);
+    bool         DropView(const wxString &viewName);
+    bool         ExecSql(const wxString &pSqlStmt);
+    bool         GetNext(void);
+    bool         GetData(UWORD colNo, SWORD cType, PTR pData, SDWORD maxLen, SDWORD FAR *cbReturned);
+    bool         Grant(int privileges, const wxString &tableName, const wxString &userList = wxT("PUBLIC"));
+    int          TranslateSqlState(const wxString &SQLState);
+    wxDbInf     *GetCatalog(const wxChar *userID=NULL);
+    bool         Catalog(const wxChar *userID=NULL, const wxString &fileName=SQL_CATALOG_FILENAME);
+    int          GetKeyFields(const wxString &tableName, wxDbColInf* colInf, UWORD noCols);
+
+    wxDbColInf  *GetColumns(wxChar *tableName[], const wxChar *userID=NULL);
+    wxDbColInf  *GetColumns(const wxString &tableName, UWORD *numCols, const wxChar *userID=NULL); 
+
+    int             GetColumnCount(const wxString &tableName, const wxChar *userID=NULL);
+    const wxChar   *GetDatabaseName(void)  {return dbInf.dbmsName;}
+    const wxString &GetDataSource(void)    {return dsn;}
+    const wxString &GetDatasourceName(void){return dsn;}
+    const wxString &GetUsername(void)      {return uid;}
+    const wxString &GetPassword(void)      {return authStr;}
+    bool            IsOpen(void)           {return dbIsOpen;}
+    HENV            GetHENV(void)          {return henv;}
+    HDBC            GetHDBC(void)          {return hdbc;}
+    HSTMT           GetHSTMT(void)         {return hstmt;}
+    int             GetTableCount()        {return nTables;}  // number of tables using this connection
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo GetTypeInfVarchar()    {return typeInfVarchar;}
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo GetTypeInfInteger()    {return typeInfInteger;}
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo GetTypeInfFloat()      {return typeInfFloat;}
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo GetTypeInfDate()       {return typeInfDate;}
+    wxDbSqlTypeInfo GetTypeInfBlob()       {return typeInfBlob;}
+
+    // tableName can refer to a table, view, alias or synonym
+    bool         TableExists(const wxString &tableName, const wxChar *userID=NULL, 
+                             const wxString &tablePath=wxEmptyString);
+    bool         TablePrivileges(const wxString &tableName, const wxString &priv, 
+                                 const wxChar *userID=NULL, const wxChar *schema=NULL, 
+                                 const wxString &path=wxEmptyString);
+
+    // These two functions return the table name or column name in a form ready
+    // for use in SQL statements.  For example, if the datasource allows spaces
+    // in the table name or column name, the returned string will have the
+    // correct enclosing marks around the name to allow it to be properly 
+    // included in a SQL statement
+    const wxString  SQLTableName(const wxChar *tableName);
+    const wxString  SQLColumnName(const wxChar *colName);
+
+    void         LogError(const wxString &errMsg, const wxString &SQLState = wxEmptyString) 
+                        { logError(errMsg, SQLState); }
+    void         SetDebugErrorMessages(bool state) { silent = !state; }
+    bool         SetSqlLogging(wxDbSqlLogState state, const wxString &filename = SQL_LOG_FILENAME, 
+                               bool append = FALSE);
+    bool         WriteSqlLog(const wxString &logMsg);
+
+    wxDBMS       Dbms(void);
+    bool         ModifyColumn(const wxString &tableName, const wxString &columnName,
+                              int dataType, ULONG columnLength=0,
+                              const wxString &optionalParam=wxEmptyString);
+
+    bool         FwdOnlyCursors(void)  {return fwdOnlyCursors;}
+
+    // These two functions are provided strictly for use by wxDbTable.
+    // DO NOT USE THESE FUNCTIONS, OR MEMORY LEAKS MAY OCCUR
+    void         incrementTableCount() { nTables++; return; }
+    void         decrementTableCount() { nTables--; return; }
+
+};  // wxDb
+
+
+// This structure forms a node in a linked list.  The linked list of "DbList" objects
+// keeps track of allocated database connections.  This allows the application to
+// open more than one database connection through ODBC for multiple transaction support
+// or for multiple database support.
+struct wxDbList
+{
+    wxDbList *PtrPrev;       // Pointer to previous item in the list
+    wxString  Dsn;           // Data Source Name
+    wxString  Uid;           // User ID
+    wxString  AuthStr;       // Authorization string (password)
+    wxDb     *PtrDb;         // Pointer to the wxDb object
+    bool      Free;          // Is item free or in use?
+    wxDbList *PtrNext;       // Pointer to next item in the list
+};
+
+
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+#include "wx/object.h"
+class wxTablesInUse : public wxObject
+{
+    public:
+        const wxChar  *tableName;
+        ULONG          tableID;
+        class wxDb    *pDb;
+};  // wxTablesInUse
+#endif
+
+
+// The following routines allow a user to get new database connections, free them
+// for other code segments to use, or close all of them when the application has
+// completed.
+wxDb  WXDLLEXPORT *wxDbGetConnection(wxDbConnectInf *pDbConfig, bool FwdOnlyCursors=(bool)wxODBC_FWD_ONLY_CURSORS);
+bool  WXDLLEXPORT  wxDbFreeConnection(wxDb *pDb);
+void  WXDLLEXPORT  wxDbCloseConnections(void);
+int   WXDLLEXPORT  wxDbConnectionsInUse(void);
+
+
+// Writes a message to the wxLog window (stdout usually) when an internal error
+// situation occurs.  This function only works in DEBUG builds
+const wxChar* WXDLLEXPORT wxDbLogExtendedErrorMsg(const wxChar *userText,
+                                                  wxDb *pDb,
+                                                  const wxChar *ErrFile,
+                                                  int ErrLine);
+
+
+// This function sets the sql log state for all open wxDb objects
+bool  WXDLLEXPORT  wxDbSqlLog(wxDbSqlLogState state, const wxString &filename = SQL_LOG_FILENAME);
+
+
+#if 0
+// MSW/VC6 ONLY!!!  Experimental
+int WXDLLEXPORT wxDbCreateDataSource(const wxString &driverName, const wxString &dsn, const wxString &description=wxEmptyString,
+                                     bool sysDSN=FALSE, const wxString &defDir=wxEmptyString, wxWindow *parent=NULL);
+#endif
+
+// This routine allows you to query a driver manager
+// for a list of available datasources.  Call this routine
+// the first time using SQL_FETCH_FIRST.  Continue to call it
+// using SQL_FETCH_NEXT until you've exhausted the list.
+bool WXDLLEXPORT wxDbGetDataSource(HENV henv, wxChar *Dsn, SWORD DsnMax, wxChar *DsDesc,
+                                   SWORD DsDescMax, UWORD direction = SQL_FETCH_NEXT);
+
+
+// Change this to 0 to remove use of all deprecated functions
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+//#################################################################################
+//############### DEPRECATED functions for backward compatability #################
+//#################################################################################
+
+// Backward compability structures/classes.  This will eventually go away
+const int DB_PATH_MAX      = wxDB_PATH_MAX;
+
+typedef wxDb                 wxDB;
+typedef wxDbTableInf         wxTableInf;
+typedef wxDbColInf           wxColInf;
+typedef wxDbColInf           CcolInf;
+typedef wxDbColFor           wxColFor;
+typedef wxDbSqlTypeInfo      SqlTypeInfo;
+typedef wxDbSqlTypeInfo      wxSqlTypeInfo;
+typedef enum wxDbSqlLogState sqlLog;
+typedef enum wxDbSqlLogState wxSqlLogState;
+typedef enum wxDBMS          dbms;
+typedef enum wxDBMS          DBMS;
+typedef wxODBC_ERRORS        ODBC_ERRORS;
+typedef wxDbConnectInf       DbStuff;
+typedef wxDbList             DbList;
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+typedef wxTablesInUse        CstructTablesInUse;
+#endif
+
+// Deprecated function names that are replaced by the function names listed above
+wxDB  WXDLLEXPORT *GetDbConnection(DbStuff *pDbStuff, bool FwdOnlyCursors=(bool)wxODBC_FWD_ONLY_CURSORS);
+bool  WXDLLEXPORT  FreeDbConnection(wxDB *pDb);
+void  WXDLLEXPORT  CloseDbConnections(void);
+int   WXDLLEXPORT  NumberDbConnectionsInUse(void);
+
+bool SqlLog(sqlLog state, const wxChar *filename = SQL_LOG_FILENAME);
+
+bool WXDLLEXPORT GetDataSource(HENV henv, char *Dsn, SWORD DsnMax, char *DsDesc, SWORD DsDescMax,
+                               UWORD direction = SQL_FETCH_NEXT);
+#endif  // Deprecated structures/classes/functions
+
+#endif // _WX_DB_H_
+

include/wx/dbgrid.h

@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        dbgrid.h
+// Purpose:     Displays a wxDbTable in a wxGrid.
+// Author:      Roger Gammans, Paul Gammans
+// Modified by:
+// Created:
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 The Computer Surgery (roger@computer-surgery.co.uk)
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Branched From : dbgrid.h,v 1.19 2001/03/28 11:16:01
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_GENERIC_DBGRID_H_
+#define _WX_GENERIC_DBGRID_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "dbgrid.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_ODBC
+#if wxUSE_GRID
+
+#include "wx/log.h"
+#include "wx/dbtable.h"
+#include "wx/dynarray.h"
+#include "wx/grid.h"
+#include "wx/dbkeyg.h"
+
+#define wxGRID_VALUE_DBAUTO     _T("dbauto")
+
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(GenericKey,keyarray);
+
+static const int wxUSE_QUERY = -1;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbGridColInfoBase
+{
+public:
+    //Default ctor
+    wxDbGridColInfoBase() { }
+    wxDbGridColInfoBase(int colNo,
+                        wxString type, wxString title) :
+                        DbCol(colNo),
+                        wxtypename(type),
+                        Title(title)
+                        { }
+    //Copy Ctor
+    wxDbGridColInfoBase(const wxDbGridColInfoBase& ref)
+    {
+        DbCol       = ref.DbCol;
+        wxtypename  = ref.wxtypename;
+        Title       = ref.Title;
+    }
+    //Empty destructor for member obj's
+    ~wxDbGridColInfoBase() {}
+
+    int        DbCol;
+    wxString   wxtypename;
+    wxString   Title;
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbGridColInfo
+{
+public:
+    wxDbGridColInfo(int colNo,
+                    wxString type,
+                    wxString title,
+                    wxDbGridColInfo *next) :
+        m_data(colNo,type,title)
+    {
+        m_next=next;
+    }
+
+    //Empty List
+    ~wxDbGridColInfo() { delete m_next; }
+
+    //Recurse to find length.
+    int Length() { return (m_next ? m_next->Length() +1 :  1); }
+
+    // Adds a new column info (2 step creation)
+    void AddColInfo (int colNo,
+                    wxString type,
+                    wxString title)
+    {
+        GetLast()->m_next = new wxDbGridColInfo (colNo, type, title, NULL);
+    }
+
+    // Searches last
+    wxDbGridColInfo *GetLast() { return (m_next ? m_next->GetLast() : this); }
+
+
+    protected:
+    wxDbGridColInfoBase  m_data;
+    wxDbGridColInfo     *m_next;
+
+    friend class wxDbGridTableBase;
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbGridCellAttrProvider : public wxGridCellAttrProvider
+{
+public:
+    wxDbGridCellAttrProvider();
+    wxDbGridCellAttrProvider(wxDbTable *tab, wxDbGridColInfoBase* ColInfo);
+    virtual ~wxDbGridCellAttrProvider();
+
+    virtual wxGridCellAttr *GetAttr(int row, int col,
+                                    wxGridCellAttr::wxAttrKind kind) const;
+    virtual void AssignDbTable(wxDbTable *tab);
+private:
+    wxDbTable           *m_data;
+    wxDbGridColInfoBase *m_ColInfo;
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbGridTableBase : public wxGridTableBase
+{
+public:
+    wxDbGridTableBase(wxDbTable *tab, wxDbGridColInfo *ColInfo,
+              int count = wxUSE_QUERY, bool takeOwnership = TRUE);
+    ~wxDbGridTableBase();
+
+    virtual int GetNumberRows()
+    {
+        wxLogDebug(" GetNumberRows() = %i",m_rowtotal);
+        return m_rowtotal;
+    }
+    virtual int GetNumberCols()
+    {
+        wxLogDebug(" GetNumberCols() = %i",m_nocols);
+        return m_nocols;
+    }
+    virtual bool     IsEmptyCell(int row, int col) ;
+    virtual wxString GetValue(int row, int col) ;
+    virtual void     SetValue(int row, int col, const wxString& value);
+    virtual bool     CanHaveAttributes();
+    virtual wxString GetTypeName(int row, int col);
+    virtual bool     CanGetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
+    virtual bool     CanSetValueAs(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
+    virtual long     GetValueAsLong(int row, int col);
+    virtual double   GetValueAsDouble(int row, int col);
+    virtual bool     GetValueAsBool(int row, int col);
+    virtual void     SetValueAsLong(int row, int col, long value);
+    virtual void     SetValueAsDouble(int row, int col, double value);
+    virtual void     SetValueAsBool(int row, int col, bool value);
+    virtual void    *GetValueAsCustom(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName);
+    virtual void     SetValueAsCustom(int row, int col, const wxString& typeName, void* value);
+
+
+    virtual wxString GetColLabelValue(int col);
+
+    virtual bool     AssignDbTable(wxDbTable *tab, int count = wxUSE_QUERY, bool takeOwnership=TRUE);
+    virtual void     ValidateRow(int row);
+    virtual bool     UpdateRow(int row) const
+    {
+        if (m_row != row)
+            return TRUE;
+        else
+            return Writeback();
+    }
+
+private:
+    //Operates on the current row
+    bool Writeback() const;
+
+    typedef wxGridTableBase inherited;
+    keyarray     m_keys;
+    wxDbTable   *m_data;
+    bool         m_dbowner;
+    int          m_rowtotal;
+    int          m_nocols;
+    int          m_row;
+    wxDbGridColInfoBase *m_ColInfo;
+    bool         m_rowmodified;
+};
+
+#endif  // #if wxUSE_GRID
+#endif  // #if wxUSE_ODBC
+
+#endif  // _WX_GENERIC_DBGRID_H_

include/wx/dbkeyg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        dbkeyg.h
+// Purpose:     Generic key support for wxDbTable
+// Author:      Roger Gammans
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 The Computer Surgery (roger@computer-surgery.co.uk)
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+//
+// NOTE : There is no CPP file to go along with this
+//
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Branched From : gkey.h,v 1.3 2001/06/01 10:31:41
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DBGKEY_H_
+#define _WX_DBGKEY_H_
+
+class GenericKey
+{
+public:
+    GenericKey(void *blk, size_t sz)    { clone(blk,sz); }
+    GenericKey(const GenericKey &ref)   { clone(ref.m_data,ref.m_sz); }
+    ~GenericKey()                       { free(m_data); }
+
+    void *GetBlk(void) const { return m_data; }
+
+private:
+    void clone(void *blk, size_t sz)
+    {
+        m_data = malloc(sz);
+        memcpy(m_data,blk,sz);
+        m_sz = sz;
+    }
+
+    void   *m_data;
+    size_t  m_sz;
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_DBGKEY_H_

include/wx/dbtable.h

@@ -0,0 +1,379 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        dbtable.h
+// Purpose:     Declaration of the wxDbTable class.
+// Author:      Doug Card
+// Modified by: George Tasker
+//              Bart Jourquin
+//              Mark Johnson
+// Created:     9.96
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996 Remstar International, Inc.
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence, plus:
+// Notice:      This class library and its intellectual design are free of charge for use,
+//              modification, enhancement, debugging under the following conditions:
+//              1) These classes may only be used as part of the implementation of a
+//                 wxWindows-based application
+//              2) All enhancements and bug fixes are to be submitted back to the wxWindows
+//                 user groups free of all charges for use with the wxWindows library.
+//              3) These classes may not be distributed as part of any other class library,
+//                 DLL, text (written or electronic), other than a complete distribution of
+//                 the wxWindows GUI development toolkit.
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/*
+// SYNOPSIS START
+// SYNOPSIS STOP
+*/
+
+#ifndef DBTABLE_DOT_H
+#define DBTABLE_DOT_H
+
+#include "wx/version.h"
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+  #pragma interface "dbtable.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/db.h"
+
+#include "wx/variant.h"
+#include "wx/dbkeyg.h"
+
+const int   wxDB_ROWID_LEN       = 24;  // 18 is the max, 24 is in case it gets larger
+const int   wxDB_DEFAULT_CURSOR  = 0;
+const bool  wxDB_QUERY_ONLY      = TRUE;
+const bool  wxDB_DISABLE_VIEW    = TRUE;
+
+// Used to indicate end of a variable length list of
+// column numbers passed to member functions
+const int   wxDB_NO_MORE_COLUMN_NUMBERS = -1;
+
+// The following class is used to define a column of a table.
+// The wxDbTable constructor will dynamically allocate as many of
+// these as there are columns in the table.  The class derived
+// from wxDbTable must initialize these column definitions in it's
+// constructor.  These column definitions provide inf. to the
+// wxDbTable class which allows it to create a table in the data
+// source, exchange data between the data source and the C++
+// object, and so on.
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbColDef
+{
+public:
+    wxChar  ColName[DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN+1];  // Column Name
+    int     DbDataType;                         // Logical Data Type; e.g. DB_DATA_TYPE_INTEGER
+    SWORD   SqlCtype;                           // C data type; e.g. SQL_C_LONG
+    void   *PtrDataObj;                         // Address of the data object
+    int     SzDataObj;                          // Size, in bytes, of the data object
+    bool    KeyField;                           // TRUE if this column is part of the PRIMARY KEY to the table; Date fields should NOT be KeyFields.
+    bool    Updateable;                         // Specifies whether this column is updateable
+    bool    InsertAllowed;                      // Specifies whether this column should be included in an INSERT statement
+    bool    DerivedCol;                         // Specifies whether this column is a derived value
+    SDWORD  CbValue;                            // Internal use only!!!
+    bool    Null;                               // NOT FULLY IMPLEMENTED - Allows NULL values in Inserts and Updates
+
+    wxDbColDef();
+
+    bool    Initialize();
+};  // wxDbColDef
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbColDataPtr
+{
+public:
+    void    *PtrDataObj;
+    int      SzDataObj;
+    SWORD    SqlCtype;
+};  // wxDbColDataPtr
+
+
+// This structure is used when creating secondary indexes.
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbIdxDef
+{
+public:
+    wxChar  ColName[DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN+1];
+    bool    Ascending;
+};  // wxDbIdxDef
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDbTable
+{
+private:
+    ULONG       tableID;  // Used for debugging.  This can help to match up mismatched constructors/destructors
+
+    // Private member variables
+    UDWORD      cursorType;
+    bool        insertable;
+
+    // Private member functions
+    bool        initialize(wxDb *pwxDb, const wxString &tblName, const UWORD numColumns,
+                       const wxString &qryTblName, bool qryOnly, const wxString &tblPath);
+    void        cleanup();
+
+    bool        bindParams(bool forUpdate);  // called by the other 'bind' functions
+    bool        bindInsertParams(void);
+    bool        bindUpdateParams(void);
+
+    bool        bindCols(HSTMT cursor);
+    bool        getRec(UWORD fetchType);
+    bool        execDelete(const wxString &pSqlStmt);
+    bool        execUpdate(const wxString &pSqlStmt);
+    bool        query(int queryType, bool forUpdate, bool distinct, const wxString &pSqlStmt=wxEmptyString);
+
+#if !wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+// these were public
+    // Where, Order By and From clauses
+    wxString    where;               // Standard SQL where clause, minus the word WHERE
+    wxString    orderBy;             // Standard SQL order by clause, minus the ORDER BY
+    wxString    from;                // Allows for joins in a wxDbTable::Query().  Format: ",tbl,tbl..."
+
+    // ODBC Handles
+    HENV        henv;           // ODBC Environment handle
+    HDBC        hdbc;           // ODBC DB Connection handle
+    HSTMT       hstmt;          // ODBC Statement handle
+    HSTMT      *hstmtDefault;   // Default cursor
+    HSTMT       hstmtInsert;    // ODBC Statement handle used specifically for inserts
+    HSTMT       hstmtDelete;    // ODBC Statement handle used specifically for deletes
+    HSTMT       hstmtUpdate;    // ODBC Statement handle used specifically for updates
+    HSTMT       hstmtInternal;  // ODBC Statement handle used internally only
+    HSTMT      *hstmtCount;     // ODBC Statement handle used by Count() function (No binding of columns)
+
+    // Flags
+    bool        selectForUpdate;
+
+    // Pointer to the database object this table belongs to
+    wxDb       *pDb;
+
+    // Table Inf.
+    wxString    tablePath;                                 // needed for dBase tables
+    wxString    tableName;                                 // Table name
+    wxString    queryTableName;                            // Query Table Name
+    UWORD       noCols;                                    // # of columns in the table
+    bool        queryOnly;                                 // Query Only, no inserts, updates or deletes
+
+    // Column Definitions
+    wxDbColDef *colDefs;         // Array of wxDbColDef structures
+#endif
+public:
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+    // Where, Order By and From clauses
+    char       *where;          // Standard SQL where clause, minus the word WHERE
+    char       *orderBy;        // Standard SQL order by clause, minus the ORDER BY
+    char       *from;           // Allows for joins in a wxDbTable::Query().  Format: ",tbl,tbl..."
+
+    // ODBC Handles
+    HENV        henv;           // ODBC Environment handle
+    HDBC        hdbc;           // ODBC DB Connection handle
+    HSTMT       hstmt;          // ODBC Statement handle
+    HSTMT      *hstmtDefault;   // Default cursor
+    HSTMT       hstmtInsert;    // ODBC Statement handle used specifically for inserts
+    HSTMT       hstmtDelete;    // ODBC Statement handle used specifically for deletes
+    HSTMT       hstmtUpdate;    // ODBC Statement handle used specifically for updates
+    HSTMT       hstmtInternal;  // ODBC Statement handle used internally only
+    HSTMT      *hstmtCount;     // ODBC Statement handle used by Count() function (No binding of columns)
+
+    // Flags
+    bool        selectForUpdate;
+
+    // Pointer to the database object this table belongs to
+    wxDb       *pDb;
+
+    // Table Inf.
+    char        tablePath[wxDB_PATH_MAX];                  // needed for dBase tables
+    char        tableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1];        // Table name
+    char        queryTableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1];   // Query Table Name
+    UWORD       noCols;                                    // # of columns in the table
+    bool        queryOnly;                                 // Query Only, no inserts, updates or deletes
+
+    // Column Definitions
+    wxDbColDef *colDefs;         // Array of wxDbColDef structures
+#endif
+    // Public member functions
+    wxDbTable(wxDb *pwxDb, const wxString &tblName, const UWORD numColumns,
+              const wxString &qryTblName="", bool qryOnly = !wxDB_QUERY_ONLY, 
+              const wxString &tblPath="");
+
+    // DEPRECATED
+    wxDbTable(wxDb *pwxDb, const wxString &tblName, const UWORD numColumns,
+              const wxChar *qryTblName="", bool qryOnly = !wxDB_QUERY_ONLY, 
+              const wxString &tblPath="");
+
+    virtual ~wxDbTable();
+
+    bool            Open(bool checkPrivileges=FALSE, bool checkTableExists=TRUE);
+    bool            CreateTable(bool attemptDrop=TRUE);
+    bool            DropTable(void);
+    bool            CreateIndex(const wxString &idxName, bool unique, UWORD noIdxCols, 
+                                wxDbIdxDef *pIdxDefs, bool attemptDrop=TRUE);
+    bool            DropIndex(const wxString &idxName);
+
+    // Accessors
+
+    // The member variables returned by these accessors are all
+    // set when the wxDbTable instance is created and cannot be 
+    // changed, hence there is no corresponding SetXxxx function
+    wxDb           *GetDb()              { return pDb; }
+    const wxString &GetTableName()       { return tableName; }
+    const wxString &GetQueryTableName()  { return queryTableName; }
+    const wxString &GetTablePath()       { return tablePath; }
+
+    UWORD           GetNumberOfColumns() { return noCols; }  // number of "defined" columns for this wxDbTable instance
+
+    const wxString &GetFromClause()      { return from; }
+    const wxString &GetOrderByClause()   { return orderBy; }
+    const wxString &GetWhereClause()     { return where; }
+
+    bool            IsQueryOnly()        { return queryOnly; }
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+    void            SetFromClause(const char *From) { from = (char *)From; }
+    void            SetOrderByClause(const char *OrderBy) { orderBy = (char *)OrderBy; }
+    void            SetWhereClause(const char *Where) { where = (char *)Where; }
+#else
+    void            SetFromClause(const wxString &From) { from = From; }
+    void            SetOrderByClause(const wxString &OrderBy) { orderBy = OrderBy; }
+    bool            SetOrderByColNums(UWORD first, ...);
+    void            SetWhereClause(const wxString &Where) { where = Where; }
+    void            From(const wxString &From) { from = From; }
+    void            OrderBy(const wxString &OrderBy) { orderBy = OrderBy; }
+    void            Where(const wxString &Where) { where = Where; }
+    const wxString &Where()   { return where; }
+    const wxString &OrderBy() { return orderBy; }
+    const wxString &From()    { return from; }
+#endif
+    int             Insert(void);
+    bool            Update(void);
+    bool            Update(const wxString &pSqlStmt);
+    bool            UpdateWhere(const wxString &pWhereClause);
+    bool            Delete(void);
+    bool            DeleteWhere(const wxString &pWhereClause);
+    bool            DeleteMatching(void);
+    virtual bool    Query(bool forUpdate = FALSE, bool distinct = FALSE);
+    bool            QueryBySqlStmt(const wxString &pSqlStmt);
+    bool            QueryMatching(bool forUpdate = FALSE, bool distinct = FALSE);
+    bool            QueryOnKeyFields(bool forUpdate = FALSE, bool distinct = FALSE);
+    bool            Refresh(void);
+    bool            GetNext(void)   { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_NEXT));  }
+    bool            operator++(int) { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_NEXT));  }
+
+    /***** These four functions only work with wxDb instances that are defined  *****
+     ***** as not being FwdOnlyCursors                                          *****/
+    bool            GetPrev(void);
+    bool            operator--(int);
+    bool            GetFirst(void);
+    bool            GetLast(void);
+
+    bool            IsCursorClosedOnCommit(void);
+    UWORD           GetRowNum(void);
+
+    void            BuildSelectStmt(wxString &pSqlStmt, int typeOfSelect, bool distinct);
+    void            BuildSelectStmt(wxChar *pSqlStmt, int typeOfSelect, bool distinct);
+
+    void            BuildDeleteStmt(wxString &pSqlStmt, int typeOfDel, const wxString &pWhereClause="");
+    void            BuildDeleteStmt(wxChar *pSqlStmt, int typeOfDel, const wxString &pWhereClause="");
+
+    void            BuildUpdateStmt(wxString &pSqlStmt, int typeOfUpd, const wxString &pWhereClause="");
+    void            BuildUpdateStmt(wxChar *pSqlStmt, int typeOfUpd, const wxString &pWhereClause="");
+
+    void            BuildWhereClause(wxString &pWhereClause, int typeOfWhere, const wxString &qualTableName="", bool useLikeComparison=FALSE);
+    void            BuildWhereClause(wxChar *pWhereClause, int typeOfWhere, const wxString &qualTableName="", bool useLikeComparison=FALSE);
+
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+// The following member functions are deprecated.  You should use the BuildXxxxxStmt functions (above)
+    void            GetSelectStmt(char *pSqlStmt, int typeOfSelect, bool distinct)
+                           { BuildSelectStmt(pSqlStmt,typeOfSelect,distinct); }
+    void            GetDeleteStmt(char *pSqlStmt, int typeOfDel, const char *pWhereClause = NULL)
+                           { BuildDeleteStmt(pSqlStmt,typeOfDel,pWhereClause); }
+    void            GetUpdateStmt(char *pSqlStmt, int typeOfUpd, const char *pWhereClause = NULL)
+                           { BuildUpdateStmt(pSqlStmt,typeOfUpd,pWhereClause); }
+    void            GetWhereClause(char *pWhereClause, int typeOfWhere, 
+                                   const char *qualTableName = NULL, bool useLikeComparison=FALSE)
+                           { BuildWhereClause(pWhereClause,typeOfWhere,qualTableName,useLikeComparison); }
+#endif
+    bool            CanSelectForUpdate(void);
+    bool            CanUpdByROWID(void);
+    void            ClearMemberVar(UWORD colNo, bool setToNull=FALSE);
+    void            ClearMemberVars(bool setToNull=FALSE);
+    bool            SetQueryTimeout(UDWORD nSeconds);
+
+    wxDbColDef     *GetColDefs() { return colDefs; }
+    void            SetColDefs(UWORD index, const wxString &fieldName, int dataType, 
+                               void *pData, SWORD cType,
+                               int size, bool keyField = FALSE, bool upd = TRUE,
+                               bool insAllow = TRUE, bool derivedCol = FALSE);
+    wxDbColDataPtr *SetColDefs(wxDbColInf *colInfs, UWORD numCols);
+
+    bool            CloseCursor(HSTMT cursor);
+    bool            DeleteCursor(HSTMT *hstmtDel);
+    void            SetCursor(HSTMT *hstmtActivate = (void **) wxDB_DEFAULT_CURSOR);
+    HSTMT           GetCursor(void) { return(hstmt); }
+    HSTMT          *GetNewCursor(bool setCursor = FALSE, bool bindColumns = TRUE);
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+// The following member function is deprecated.  You should use the GetNewCursor
+    HSTMT          *NewCursor(bool setCursor = FALSE, bool bindColumns = TRUE) {  return GetNewCursor(setCursor,bindColumns); }
+#endif
+
+    ULONG           Count(const wxString &args="*");
+    int             DB_STATUS(void) { return(pDb->DB_STATUS); }
+
+    bool            IsColNull(UWORD colNo) const;
+    bool            SetColNull(UWORD colNo, bool set=TRUE);
+    bool            SetColNull(const wxString &colName, bool set=TRUE);
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+// The following member functions are deprecated.  You should use the SetColNull()
+    bool            SetNull(int colNo, bool set=TRUE) { return (SetNull(colNo,set)); }
+    bool            SetNull(const char *colName, bool set=TRUE) { return (SetNull(colName,set)); }
+#endif
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+    ULONG           GetTableID() { return tableID; }
+#endif
+
+//TODO: Need to Document
+    typedef     enum  { WX_ROW_MODE_QUERY , WX_ROW_MODE_INDIVIDUAL } rowmode_t;
+    virtual     void         SetRowMode(const rowmode_t rowmode);
+    virtual     wxVariant    GetCol(const int colNo) const ;
+    virtual     void         SetCol(const int colNo, const wxVariant value);
+    virtual     GenericKey   GetKey(void);
+    virtual     void         SetKey(const GenericKey &key);
+
+    private:
+        HSTMT      *m_hstmtGridQuery;
+        rowmode_t   m_rowmode;
+        size_t      m_keysize;
+
+//      typedef enum {unmodified=0, UpdatePending, InsertPending } recStatus;
+
+//      recStatus  get_ModifiedStatus() { return m_recstatus; }
+        
+//      void modify() {
+//          if (m_recstatus==unmodified)
+//              m_recstatus=UpdatePending;
+//      }
+//  protected:
+//      void insertify() {m_recstatus=InsertPending; }
+//      void unmodify() {m_recstatus=unmodified; }
+//      recStatus m_recstatus;
+//TODO: Need to Document
+};  // wxDbTable
+
+
+// Change this to 0 to remove use of all deprecated functions
+#if wxODBC_BACKWARD_COMPATABILITY
+//#################################################################################
+//############### DEPRECATED functions for backward compatability #################
+//#################################################################################
+
+// Backward compability.  These will eventually go away
+typedef wxDbTable       wxTable;
+typedef wxDbIdxDef      wxIdxDef;
+typedef wxDbIdxDef      CidxDef;
+typedef wxDbColDef      wxColDef;
+typedef wxDbColDef      CcolDef;
+typedef wxDbColDataPtr  wxColDataPtr;
+typedef wxDbColDataPtr  CcolDataPtr;
+
+const int   ROWID           = wxDB_ROWID_LEN;
+const int   DEFAULT_CURSOR  = wxDB_DEFAULT_CURSOR;
+const bool  QUERY_ONLY      = wxDB_QUERY_ONLY;
+const bool  DISABLE_VIEW    = wxDB_DISABLE_VIEW;
+#endif
+
+#endif

include/wx/dc.h

@@ -0,0 +1,815 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        dc.h
+// Purpose:     wxDC class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     05/25/99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DC_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DC_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "dcbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers which we must include here
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/object.h"          // the base class
+
+#include "wx/cursor.h"          // we have member variables of these classes
+#include "wx/font.h"            // so we can't do without them
+#include "wx/colour.h"
+#include "wx/brush.h"
+#include "wx/pen.h"
+#include "wx/palette.h"
+#include "wx/list.h"            // we use wxList in inline functions
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDC;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCBase;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDrawObject
+{
+public:
+
+    wxDrawObject()
+        : m_isBBoxValid(FALSE)
+        , m_minX(0), m_minY(0), m_maxX(0), m_maxY(0)
+    { }
+
+    virtual ~wxDrawObject() { }
+
+    virtual void Draw(wxDCBase&) const { }
+
+    virtual void CalcBoundingBox(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+    {
+      if ( m_isBBoxValid )
+      {
+         if ( x < m_minX ) m_minX = x;
+         if ( y < m_minY ) m_minY = y;
+         if ( x > m_maxX ) m_maxX = x;
+         if ( y > m_maxY ) m_maxY = y;
+      }
+      else
+      {
+         m_isBBoxValid = TRUE;
+
+         m_minX = x;
+         m_minY = y;
+         m_maxX = x;
+         m_maxY = y;
+      }
+    }
+
+    void ResetBoundingBox()
+    {
+        m_isBBoxValid = FALSE;
+
+        m_minX = m_maxX = m_minY = m_maxY = 0;
+    }
+
+    // Get the final bounding box of the PostScript or Metafile picture.
+
+    wxCoord MinX() const { return m_minX; }
+    wxCoord MaxX() const { return m_maxX; }
+    wxCoord MinY() const { return m_minY; }
+    wxCoord MaxY() const { return m_maxY; }
+
+    //to define the type of object for derived objects
+    virtual int GetType()=0;
+
+protected:
+    //for boundingbox calculation
+    bool m_isBBoxValid:1;
+    //for boundingbox calculation
+    wxCoord m_minX, m_minY, m_maxX, m_maxY;
+};
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global variables
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern int) wxPageNumber;
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDC is the device context - object on which any drawing is done
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCBase : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxDCBase()
+        : m_colour(wxColourDisplay())
+        , m_ok(TRUE)
+        , m_clipping(FALSE)
+        , m_isInteractive(0)
+        , m_isBBoxValid(FALSE)
+        , m_logicalOriginX(0), m_logicalOriginY(0)
+        , m_deviceOriginX(0), m_deviceOriginY(0)
+        , m_logicalScaleX(1.0), m_logicalScaleY(1.0)
+        , m_userScaleX(1.0), m_userScaleY(1.0)
+        , m_scaleX(1.0), m_scaleY(1.0)
+        , m_signX(1), m_signY(1)
+        , m_minX(0), m_minY(0), m_maxX(0), m_maxY(0)
+        , m_clipX1(0), m_clipY1(0), m_clipX2(0), m_clipY2(0)
+        , m_logicalFunction(wxCOPY)
+        , m_backgroundMode(wxTRANSPARENT)
+        , m_mappingMode(wxMM_TEXT)
+        , m_pen()
+        , m_brush()
+        , m_backgroundBrush(*wxTRANSPARENT_BRUSH)
+        , m_textForegroundColour(*wxBLACK)
+        , m_textBackgroundColour(*wxWHITE)
+        , m_font()
+#if wxUSE_PALETTE
+        , m_palette()
+        , m_hasCustomPalette(FALSE)
+#endif // wxUSE_PALETTE
+    {
+        ResetBoundingBox();
+    }
+
+    ~wxDCBase() { }
+
+    virtual void BeginDrawing() { }
+    virtual void EndDrawing() { }
+
+    // graphic primitives
+    // ------------------
+
+    virtual void DrawObject(wxDrawObject* drawobject)
+    {
+        drawobject->Draw(*this);
+        CalcBoundingBox(drawobject->MinX(),drawobject->MinY());
+        CalcBoundingBox(drawobject->MaxX(),drawobject->MaxY());
+    }
+
+    bool FloodFill(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, const wxColour& col,
+                   int style = wxFLOOD_SURFACE)
+        { return DoFloodFill(x, y, col, style); }
+    bool FloodFill(const wxPoint& pt, const wxColour& col,
+                   int style = wxFLOOD_SURFACE)
+        { return DoFloodFill(pt.x, pt.y, col, style); }
+
+    bool GetPixel(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxColour *col) const
+        { return DoGetPixel(x, y, col); }
+    bool GetPixel(const wxPoint& pt, wxColour *col) const
+        { return DoGetPixel(pt.x, pt.y, col); }
+
+    void DrawLine(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1, wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2)
+        { DoDrawLine(x1, y1, x2, y2); }
+    void DrawLine(const wxPoint& pt1, const wxPoint& pt2)
+        { DoDrawLine(pt1.x, pt1.y, pt2.x, pt2.y); }
+
+    void CrossHair(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoCrossHair(x, y); }
+    void CrossHair(const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoCrossHair(pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawArc(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1, wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2,
+                 wxCoord xc, wxCoord yc)
+        { DoDrawArc(x1, y1, x2, y2, xc, yc); }
+    void DrawArc(const wxPoint& pt1, const wxPoint& pt2, const wxPoint& centre)
+        { DoDrawArc(pt1.x, pt1.y, pt2.x, pt2.y, centre.x, centre.y); }
+
+    void DrawCheckMark(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                       wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoDrawCheckMark(x, y, width, height); }
+    void DrawCheckMark(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoDrawCheckMark(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+
+    void DrawEllipticArc(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord w, wxCoord h,
+                         double sa, double ea)
+        { DoDrawEllipticArc(x, y, w, h, sa, ea); }
+    void DrawEllipticArc(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz,
+                         double sa, double ea)
+        { DoDrawEllipticArc(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y, sa, ea); }
+
+    void DrawPoint(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoDrawPoint(x, y); }
+    void DrawPoint(const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoDrawPoint(pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawLines(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                   wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0)
+        { DoDrawLines(n, points, xoffset, yoffset); }
+    void DrawLines(const wxList *list,
+                   wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0);
+
+    void DrawPolygon(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                     wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0,
+                     int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE)
+        { DoDrawPolygon(n, points, xoffset, yoffset, fillStyle); }
+
+    void DrawPolygon(const wxList *list,
+                     wxCoord xoffset = 0, wxCoord yoffset = 0,
+                     int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE);
+
+    void DrawRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoDrawRectangle(x, y, width, height); }
+    void DrawRectangle(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz)
+        { DoDrawRectangle(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y); }
+    void DrawRectangle(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoDrawRectangle(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+
+    void DrawRoundedRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+                              double radius)
+        { DoDrawRoundedRectangle(x, y, width, height, radius); }
+    void DrawRoundedRectangle(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz,
+                             double radius)
+        { DoDrawRoundedRectangle(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y, radius); }
+    void DrawRoundedRectangle(const wxRect& r, double radius)
+        { DoDrawRoundedRectangle(r.x, r.y, r.width, r.height, radius); }
+
+    void DrawCircle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord radius)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(x - radius, y - radius, 2*radius, 2*radius); }
+    void DrawCircle(const wxPoint& pt, wxCoord radius)
+        { DrawCircle(pt.x, pt.y, radius); }
+
+    void DrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(x, y, width, height); }
+    void DrawEllipse(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y); }
+    void DrawEllipse(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoDrawEllipse(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+
+    void DrawIcon(const wxIcon& icon, wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoDrawIcon(icon, x, y); }
+    void DrawIcon(const wxIcon& icon, const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoDrawIcon(icon, pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawBitmap(const wxBitmap &bmp, wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                    bool useMask = FALSE)
+        { DoDrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, useMask); }
+    void DrawBitmap(const wxBitmap &bmp, const wxPoint& pt,
+                    bool useMask = FALSE)
+        { DoDrawBitmap(bmp, pt.x, pt.y, useMask); }
+
+    void DrawText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+        { DoDrawText(text, x, y); }
+    void DrawText(const wxString& text, const wxPoint& pt)
+        { DoDrawText(text, pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    void DrawRotatedText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y, double angle)
+        { DoDrawRotatedText(text, x, y, angle); }
+    void DrawRotatedText(const wxString& text, const wxPoint& pt, double angle)
+        { DoDrawRotatedText(text, pt.x, pt.y, angle); }
+
+    // this version puts both optional bitmap and the text into the given
+    // rectangle and aligns is as specified by alignment parameter; it also
+    // will emphasize the character with the given index if it is != -1 and
+    // return the bounding rectangle if required
+    virtual void DrawLabel(const wxString& text,
+                           const wxBitmap& image,
+                           const wxRect& rect,
+                           int alignment = wxALIGN_LEFT | wxALIGN_TOP,
+                           int indexAccel = -1,
+                           wxRect *rectBounding = NULL);
+
+    void DrawLabel(const wxString& text, const wxRect& rect,
+                   int alignment = wxALIGN_LEFT | wxALIGN_TOP,
+                   int indexAccel = -1)
+        { DrawLabel(text, wxNullBitmap, rect, alignment, indexAccel); }
+
+    bool Blit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest, wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+              wxDC *source, wxCoord xsrc, wxCoord ysrc,
+              int rop = wxCOPY, bool useMask = FALSE, wxCoord xsrcMask = -1, wxCoord ysrcMask = -1)
+    {
+        return DoBlit(xdest, ydest, width, height,
+                      source, xsrc, ysrc, rop, useMask, xsrcMask, ysrcMask);
+    }
+    bool Blit(const wxPoint& destPt, const wxSize& sz,
+              wxDC *source, const wxPoint& srcPt,
+              int rop = wxCOPY, bool useMask = FALSE, const wxPoint& srcPtMask = wxPoint(-1, -1))
+    {
+        return DoBlit(destPt.x, destPt.y, sz.x, sz.y,
+                      source, srcPt.x, srcPt.y, rop, useMask, srcPtMask.x, srcPtMask.y);
+    }
+
+#if wxUSE_SPLINES
+    // TODO: this API needs fixing (wxPointList, why (!const) "wxList *"?)
+    void DrawSpline(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1,
+                    wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2,
+                    wxCoord x3, wxCoord y3);
+    void DrawSpline(int n, wxPoint points[]);
+
+    void DrawSpline(wxList *points) { DoDrawSpline(points); }
+#endif // wxUSE_SPLINES
+
+    // global DC operations
+    // --------------------
+
+    virtual void Clear() = 0;
+
+    virtual bool StartDoc(const wxString& WXUNUSED(message)) { return TRUE; }
+    virtual void EndDoc() { }
+
+    virtual void StartPage() { }
+    virtual void EndPage() { }
+
+    // set objects to use for drawing
+    // ------------------------------
+
+    virtual void SetFont(const wxFont& font) = 0;
+    virtual void SetPen(const wxPen& pen) = 0;
+    virtual void SetBrush(const wxBrush& brush) = 0;
+    virtual void SetBackground(const wxBrush& brush) = 0;
+    virtual void SetBackgroundMode(int mode) = 0;
+#if wxUSE_PALETTE
+    virtual void SetPalette(const wxPalette& palette) = 0;
+#endif // wxUSE_PALETTE
+
+    // clipping region
+    // ---------------
+
+    void SetClippingRegion(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height)
+        { DoSetClippingRegion(x, y, width, height); }
+    void SetClippingRegion(const wxPoint& pt, const wxSize& sz)
+        { DoSetClippingRegion(pt.x, pt.y, sz.x, sz.y); }
+    void SetClippingRegion(const wxRect& rect)
+        { DoSetClippingRegion(rect.x, rect.y, rect.width, rect.height); }
+    void SetClippingRegion(const wxRegion& region)
+        { DoSetClippingRegionAsRegion(region); }
+
+    virtual void DestroyClippingRegion() = 0;
+
+    void GetClippingBox(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y, wxCoord *w, wxCoord *h) const
+        { DoGetClippingBox(x, y, w, h); }
+    void GetClippingBox(wxRect& rect) const
+        {
+#if 1
+          DoGetClippingBox(&rect.x, &rect.y, &rect.width, &rect.height);
+#else
+          // Necessary to use intermediate variables for 16-bit compilation
+          // REMOVE ME if the above is OK for all current platforms
+          wxCoord x, y, w, h;
+          DoGetClippingBox(&x, &y, &w, &h);
+          rect.x = x; rect.y = y; rect.width = w; rect.height = h;
+#endif
+        }
+
+    // text extent
+    // -----------
+
+    virtual wxCoord GetCharHeight() const = 0;
+    virtual wxCoord GetCharWidth() const = 0;
+
+    // only works for single line strings
+    void GetTextExtent(const wxString& string,
+                       wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                       wxCoord *descent = NULL,
+                       wxCoord *externalLeading = NULL,
+                       wxFont *theFont = NULL) const
+        { DoGetTextExtent(string, x, y, descent, externalLeading, theFont); }
+
+    // works for single as well as multi-line strings
+    virtual void GetMultiLineTextExtent(const wxString& text,
+                                        wxCoord *width,
+                                        wxCoord *height,
+                                        wxCoord *heightLine = NULL,
+                                        wxFont *font = NULL);
+
+    // size and resolution
+    // -------------------
+
+    // in device units
+    void GetSize(int *width, int *height) const
+        { DoGetSize(width, height); }
+    wxSize GetSize() const
+    {
+        int w, h;
+        DoGetSize(&w, &h);
+
+        return wxSize(w, h);
+    }
+
+    // in mm
+    void GetSizeMM(int* width, int* height) const
+        { DoGetSizeMM(width, height); }
+    wxSize GetSizeMM() const
+    {
+        int w, h;
+        DoGetSizeMM(&w, &h);
+
+        return wxSize(w, h);
+    }
+
+    // coordinates conversions
+    // -----------------------
+
+    // This group of functions does actual conversion of the input, as you'd
+    // expect.
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalX(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalY(wxCoord y) const;
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalXRel(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord DeviceToLogicalYRel(wxCoord y) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceX(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceY(wxCoord y) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceXRel(wxCoord x) const;
+    wxCoord LogicalToDeviceYRel(wxCoord y) const;
+
+    // query DC capabilities
+    // ---------------------
+
+    virtual bool CanDrawBitmap() const = 0;
+    virtual bool CanGetTextExtent() const = 0;
+
+    // colour depth
+    virtual int GetDepth() const = 0;
+
+    // Resolution in Pixels per inch
+    virtual wxSize GetPPI() const = 0;
+
+    virtual bool Ok() const { return m_ok; }
+
+    // accessors
+    // ---------
+
+        // const...
+    int GetBackgroundMode() const { return m_backgroundMode; }
+    const wxBrush&  GetBackground() const { return m_backgroundBrush; }
+    const wxBrush&  GetBrush() const { return m_brush; }
+    const wxFont&   GetFont() const { return m_font; }
+    const wxPen&    GetPen() const { return m_pen; }
+    const wxColour& GetTextBackground() const { return m_textBackgroundColour; }
+    const wxColour& GetTextForeground() const { return m_textForegroundColour; }
+
+        // ... and non const
+    wxBrush&  GetBackground() { return m_backgroundBrush; }
+    wxBrush&  GetBrush() { return m_brush; }
+    wxFont&   GetFont() { return m_font; }
+    wxPen&    GetPen() { return m_pen; }
+    wxColour& GetTextBackground() { return m_textBackgroundColour; }
+    wxColour& GetTextForeground() { return m_textForegroundColour; }
+
+    virtual void SetTextForeground(const wxColour& colour)
+        { m_textForegroundColour = colour; }
+    virtual void SetTextBackground(const wxColour& colour)
+        { m_textBackgroundColour = colour; }
+
+    int GetMapMode() const { return m_mappingMode; }
+    virtual void SetMapMode(int mode) = 0;
+
+    virtual void GetUserScale(double *x, double *y) const
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_userScaleX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_userScaleY;
+    }
+    virtual void SetUserScale(double x, double y) = 0;
+
+    virtual void GetLogicalScale(double *x, double *y)
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_logicalScaleX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_logicalScaleY;
+    }
+    virtual void SetLogicalScale(double x, double y)
+    {
+        m_logicalScaleX = x;
+        m_logicalScaleY = y;
+    }
+
+    void GetLogicalOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+        { DoGetLogicalOrigin(x, y); }
+    wxPoint GetLogicalOrigin() const
+        { wxCoord x, y; DoGetLogicalOrigin(&x, &y); return wxPoint(x, y); }
+    virtual void SetLogicalOrigin(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    void GetDeviceOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+        { DoGetDeviceOrigin(x, y); }
+    wxPoint GetDeviceOrigin() const
+        { wxCoord x, y; DoGetDeviceOrigin(&x, &y); return wxPoint(x, y); }
+    virtual void SetDeviceOrigin(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    virtual void SetAxisOrientation(bool xLeftRight, bool yBottomUp) = 0;
+
+    int GetLogicalFunction() const { return m_logicalFunction; }
+    virtual void SetLogicalFunction(int function) = 0;
+
+    // Sometimes we need to override optimization, e.g. if other software is
+    // drawing onto our surface and we can't be sure of who's done what.
+    //
+    // FIXME: is this (still) used?
+    virtual void SetOptimization(bool WXUNUSED(opt)) { }
+    virtual bool GetOptimization() { return FALSE; }
+
+    // bounding box
+    // ------------
+
+    virtual void CalcBoundingBox(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
+    {
+      if ( m_isBBoxValid )
+      {
+         if ( x < m_minX ) m_minX = x;
+         if ( y < m_minY ) m_minY = y;
+         if ( x > m_maxX ) m_maxX = x;
+         if ( y > m_maxY ) m_maxY = y;
+      }
+      else
+      {
+         m_isBBoxValid = TRUE;
+
+         m_minX = x;
+         m_minY = y;
+         m_maxX = x;
+         m_maxY = y;
+      }
+    }
+
+    void ResetBoundingBox()
+    {
+        m_isBBoxValid = FALSE;
+
+        m_minX = m_maxX = m_minY = m_maxY = 0;
+    }
+
+    // Get the final bounding box of the PostScript or Metafile picture.
+    wxCoord MinX() const { return m_minX; }
+    wxCoord MaxX() const { return m_maxX; }
+    wxCoord MinY() const { return m_minY; }
+    wxCoord MaxY() const { return m_maxY; }
+
+    // misc old functions
+    // ------------------
+
+    // for compatibility with the old code when wxCoord was long everywhere
+#ifndef __WIN16__
+    void GetTextExtent(const wxString& string,
+                       long *x, long *y,
+                       long *descent = NULL,
+                       long *externalLeading = NULL,
+                       wxFont *theFont = NULL) const
+    {
+        wxCoord x2, y2, descent2, externalLeading2;
+        DoGetTextExtent(string, &x2, &y2,
+                        &descent2, &externalLeading2,
+                        theFont);
+        if ( x )
+            *x = x2;
+        if ( y )
+            *y = y2;
+        if ( descent )
+            *descent = descent2;
+        if ( externalLeading )
+            *externalLeading = externalLeading2;
+    }
+
+    void GetLogicalOrigin(long *x, long *y) const
+    {
+        wxCoord x2, y2;
+        DoGetLogicalOrigin(&x2, &y2);
+        if ( x )
+            *x = x2;
+        if ( y )
+            *y = y2;
+    }
+
+    void GetDeviceOrigin(long *x, long *y) const
+    {
+        wxCoord x2, y2;
+        DoGetDeviceOrigin(&x2, &y2);
+        if ( x )
+            *x = x2;
+        if ( y )
+            *y = y2;
+    }
+    void GetClippingBox(long *x, long *y, long *w, long *h) const
+    {
+        wxCoord xx,yy,ww,hh;
+        DoGetClippingBox(&xx, &yy, &ww, &hh);
+        if (x) *x = xx;
+        if (y) *y = yy;
+        if (w) *w = ww;
+        if (h) *h = hh;
+    }
+#endif // !Win16
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+
+    void GetTextExtent(const wxString& string, float *x, float *y,
+            float *descent = NULL, float *externalLeading = NULL,
+            wxFont *theFont = NULL, bool use16bit = FALSE) const ;
+    void GetSize(float* width, float* height) const { int w, h; GetSize(& w, & h); *width = w; *height = h; }
+    void GetSizeMM(float *width, float *height) const { int w, h; GetSizeMM(& w, & h); *width = (float) w; *height = (float) h; }
+
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+
+protected:
+    // the pure virtual functions which should be implemented by wxDC
+    virtual bool DoFloodFill(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, const wxColour& col,
+                             int style = wxFLOOD_SURFACE) = 0;
+
+    virtual bool DoGetPixel(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxColour *col) const = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawPoint(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawLine(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1, wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawArc(wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1,
+                           wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2,
+                           wxCoord xc, wxCoord yc) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawCheckMark(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                                 wxCoord width, wxCoord height);
+    virtual void DoDrawEllipticArc(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord w, wxCoord h,
+                                   double sa, double ea) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord width, wxCoord height) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawRoundedRectangle(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                                        wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+                                        double radius) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawEllipse(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                               wxCoord width, wxCoord height) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoCrossHair(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawIcon(const wxIcon& icon, wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawBitmap(const wxBitmap &bmp, wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                              bool useMask = FALSE) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawText(const wxString& text, wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawRotatedText(const wxString& text,
+                                   wxCoord x, wxCoord y, double angle) = 0;
+
+    virtual bool DoBlit(wxCoord xdest, wxCoord ydest,
+                        wxCoord width, wxCoord height,
+                        wxDC *source, wxCoord xsrc, wxCoord ysrc,
+                        int rop = wxCOPY, bool useMask = FALSE, wxCoord xsrcMask = -1, wxCoord ysrcMask = -1) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoGetSize(int *width, int *height) const = 0;
+    virtual void DoGetSizeMM(int* width, int* height) const = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoDrawLines(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                             wxCoord xoffset, wxCoord yoffset) = 0;
+    virtual void DoDrawPolygon(int n, wxPoint points[],
+                               wxCoord xoffset, wxCoord yoffset,
+                               int fillStyle = wxODDEVEN_RULE) = 0;
+
+    virtual void DoSetClippingRegionAsRegion(const wxRegion& region) = 0;
+    virtual void DoSetClippingRegion(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                                     wxCoord width, wxCoord height) = 0;
+
+    // FIXME are these functions really different?
+    virtual void DoGetClippingRegion(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                                     wxCoord *w, wxCoord *h)
+        { DoGetClippingBox(x, y, w, h); }
+    virtual void DoGetClippingBox(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                                  wxCoord *w, wxCoord *h) const
+    {
+        if ( m_clipping )
+        {
+            if ( x ) *x = m_clipX1;
+            if ( y ) *y = m_clipY1;
+            if ( w ) *w = m_clipX2 - m_clipX1;
+            if ( h ) *h = m_clipY2 - m_clipY1;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            *x = *y = *w = *h = 0;
+        }
+    }
+
+    virtual void DoGetLogicalOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_logicalOriginX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_logicalOriginY;
+    }
+
+    virtual void DoGetDeviceOrigin(wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y) const
+    {
+        if ( x ) *x = m_deviceOriginX;
+        if ( y ) *y = m_deviceOriginY;
+    }
+
+    virtual void DoGetTextExtent(const wxString& string,
+                                 wxCoord *x, wxCoord *y,
+                                 wxCoord *descent = NULL,
+                                 wxCoord *externalLeading = NULL,
+                                 wxFont *theFont = NULL) const = 0;
+
+#if wxUSE_SPLINES
+    virtual void DoDrawSpline(wxList *points);
+#endif
+
+protected:
+    // flags
+    bool m_colour:1;
+    bool m_ok:1;
+    bool m_clipping:1;
+    bool m_isInteractive:1;
+    bool m_isBBoxValid:1;
+
+    // coordinate system variables
+
+    // TODO short descriptions of what exactly they are would be nice...
+
+    wxCoord m_logicalOriginX, m_logicalOriginY;
+    wxCoord m_deviceOriginX, m_deviceOriginY;
+
+    double m_logicalScaleX, m_logicalScaleY;
+    double m_userScaleX, m_userScaleY;
+    double m_scaleX, m_scaleY;
+
+    // Used by SetAxisOrientation() to invert the axes
+    int m_signX, m_signY;
+
+    // bounding and clipping boxes
+    wxCoord m_minX, m_minY, m_maxX, m_maxY;
+    wxCoord m_clipX1, m_clipY1, m_clipX2, m_clipY2;
+
+    int m_logicalFunction;
+    int m_backgroundMode;
+    int m_mappingMode;
+
+    // GDI objects
+    wxPen             m_pen;
+    wxBrush           m_brush;
+    wxBrush           m_backgroundBrush;
+    wxColour          m_textForegroundColour;
+    wxColour          m_textBackgroundColour;
+    wxFont            m_font;
+
+#if wxUSE_PALETTE
+    wxPalette         m_palette;
+    bool              m_hasCustomPalette;
+#endif // wxUSE_PALETTE
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDCBase)
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxDCBase)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// now include the declaration of wxDC class
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/x11/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/dc.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dc.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// helper class: you can use it to temporarily change the DC text colour and
+// restore it automatically when the object goes out of scope
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCTextColourChanger
+{
+public:
+    wxDCTextColourChanger(wxDC& dc) : m_dc(dc), m_colFgOld() { }
+
+    ~wxDCTextColourChanger()
+    {
+        if ( m_colFgOld.Ok() )
+            m_dc.SetTextForeground(m_colFgOld);
+    }
+
+    void Set(const wxColour& col)
+    {
+        if ( !m_colFgOld.Ok() )
+            m_colFgOld = m_dc.GetTextForeground();
+        m_dc.SetTextForeground(col);
+    }
+
+private:
+    wxDC& m_dc;
+
+    wxColour m_colFgOld;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// another small helper class: sets the clipping region in its ctor and
+// destroys it in the dtor
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDCClipper
+{
+public:
+    wxDCClipper(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& r) : m_dc(dc)
+        { dc.SetClippingRegion(r.x, r.y, r.width, r.height); }
+    wxDCClipper(wxDC& dc, wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxCoord w, wxCoord h) : m_dc(dc)
+        { dc.SetClippingRegion(x, y, w, h); }
+
+    ~wxDCClipper() { m_dc.DestroyClippingRegion(); }
+
+private:
+    wxDC& m_dc;
+};
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DC_H_BASE_

include/wx/dcbuffer.h

@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dcbuffer.h
+// Purpose:     wxBufferedDC class
+// Author:      Ron Lee <ron@debian.org>
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     16/03/02
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Ron Lee
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DCBUFFER_H_
+#define _WX_DCBUFFER_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "dcbuffer.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/dcmemory.h"
+
+
+// ==============================================================
+//   Double buffering helper.
+// --------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBufferedDC : public wxMemoryDC
+{
+private:
+
+        // Without the existence of a wxNullDC, this must be
+        // a pointer, else it could probably be a reference.
+
+    wxDC        *m_dc;
+    wxBitmap    m_buffer;
+
+public:
+
+        // Default ctor, must subsequently call Init for
+        // two stage construction.
+
+    wxBufferedDC()
+        : m_dc( 0 )
+    {}
+
+        // Construct a wxBufferedDC using a user supplied buffer.
+
+    wxBufferedDC( wxDC *dc, const wxBitmap &buffer );
+
+        // Construct a wxBufferedDC with an internal buffer of 'area'
+        // (where area is usually something like the size of the window
+        // being buffered)
+
+    wxBufferedDC( wxDC *dc, const wxSize &area );
+
+    // default copy ctor ok.
+
+        // The usually desired  action in the dtor is to blit the buffer.
+
+    ~wxBufferedDC();
+
+        // These reimplement the actions of the ctors for
+        // two stage creation, but are not used by the ctors
+        // themselves to save a few cpu cycles.
+
+    void Init( wxDC *dc, const wxBitmap &bitmap );
+    void Init( wxDC *dc, const wxSize &area );
+
+        // Blits the buffer to the dc, and detaches the dc from
+        // the buffer.  Usually called in the dtor or by the dtor
+        // of derived classes if the BufferedDC must blit before
+        // the derived class (which may own the dc it's blitting
+        // to) is destroyed.
+
+    void UnMask();
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxBufferedDC)
+};
+
+
+// ==============================================================
+//   Double buffered PaintDC.
+// --------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Creates a double buffered wxPaintDC, optionally allowing the
+// user to specify their own buffer to use.
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBufferedPaintDC : public wxBufferedDC
+{
+private:
+
+    wxPaintDC    m_paintdc;
+
+public:
+
+    wxBufferedPaintDC( wxWindow *window, const wxBitmap &buffer = wxNullBitmap );
+
+    // default copy ctor ok.
+
+    ~wxBufferedPaintDC();
+};
+
+
+#endif  // _WX_DCBUFFER_H_
+

include/wx/dcclient.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/dcclient.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dcclient.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_

include/wx/dcmemory.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/dcmemory.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dcmemory.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_

include/wx/dcprint.h

@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCPRINT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCPRINT_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dcprint.h"
+#endif
+#if defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dcprint.h"
+#endif
+#if defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dcprint.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DCPRINT_H_BASE_

include/wx/dcps.h

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCPS_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCPS_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/generic/dcpsg.h"
+
+#endif
+

include/wx/dcscreen.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/dcscreen.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dcscreen.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_

include/wx/dde.h

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DDE_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DDE_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/list.h"
+
+class wxDDEClient;
+class wxDDEServer;
+class wxDDEConnection;
+
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_LIST(wxDDEClient, wxDDEClientList);
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_LIST(wxDDEServer, wxDDEServerList);
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_LIST(wxDDEConnection, wxDDEConnectionList);
+
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/dde.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/dde.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DDE_H_BASE_

include/wx/debug.h

@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/debug.h
+// Purpose:     Misc debug functions and macros
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29/01/98
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef   _WX_DEBUG_H_
+#define   _WX_DEBUG_H_
+
+#ifndef __WXWINCE__
+#include  <assert.h>
+#endif
+#include  <limits.h>            // for CHAR_BIT used below
+
+#include  "wx/wxchar.h"         // for __TFILE__ and wxChar
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Defines controlling the debugging macros
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// if _DEBUG is defined (MS VC++ and others use it in debug builds), define
+// __WXDEBUG__ too
+#ifdef _DEBUG
+    #ifndef __WXDEBUG__
+        #define __WXDEBUG__
+    #endif // !__WXDEBUG__
+#endif // _DEBUG
+
+// if NDEBUG is defined (<assert.h> uses it), undef __WXDEBUG__ and WXDEBUG
+#ifdef NDEBUG
+    #undef __WXDEBUG__
+    #undef WXDEBUG
+#endif // NDEBUG
+
+// if __WXDEBUG__ is defined, make sure that WXDEBUG is defined and >= 1
+#ifdef __WXDEBUG__
+    #if !defined(WXDEBUG) || !WXDEBUG
+        #undef WXDEBUG
+        #define WXDEBUG 1
+    #endif // !WXDEBUG
+#endif // __WXDEBUG__
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Debugging macros
+//
+// All debugging macros rely on ASSERT() which in turn calls user-defined
+// OnAssert() function. To keep things simple, it's called even when the
+// expression is TRUE (i.e. everything is ok) and by default does nothing: just
+// returns the same value back. But if you redefine it to do something more sexy
+// (popping up a message box in your favourite GUI, sending you e-mail or
+// whatever) it will affect all ASSERTs, FAILs and CHECKs in your code.
+//
+// Warning: if you don't like advice on programming style, don't read
+// further! ;-)
+//
+// Extensive use of these macros is recommended! Remember that ASSERTs are
+// disabled in final build (without __WXDEBUG__ defined), so they add strictly
+// nothing to your program's code. On the other hand, CHECK macros do stay
+// even in release builds, but in general are not much of a burden, while
+// a judicious use of them might increase your program's stability.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Macros which are completely disabled in 'release' mode
+//
+// NB: these functions are implemented in src/common/appcmn.cpp
+#ifdef  __WXDEBUG__
+  /*
+    this function may be redefined to do something non trivial and is called
+    whenever one of debugging macros fails (i.e. condition is false in an
+    assertion)
+
+    parameters:
+       szFile and nLine - file name and line number of the ASSERT
+       szMsg            - optional message explaining the reason
+  */
+  extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxOnAssert(const wxChar *szFile,
+                                     int nLine,
+                                     const wxChar *szCond,
+                                     const wxChar *szMsg = NULL);
+
+  // call this function to break into the debugger unconditionally (assuming
+  // the program is running under debugger, of course)
+  extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxTrap();
+
+  // helper function used to implement wxASSERT and wxASSERT_MSG
+  //
+  // note using "int" and not "bool" for cond to avoid VC++ warnings about
+  // implicit conversions when doing "wxAssert( pointer )" and also use of
+  // "!!cond" below to ensure that everything is converted to int
+  extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxAssert(int cond,
+                                   const wxChar *szFile,
+                                   int nLine,
+                                   const wxChar *szCond,
+                                   const wxChar *szMsg = NULL) ;
+
+  // generic assert macro
+  #define wxASSERT(cond) wxAssert(!!(cond), __TFILE__, __LINE__, _T(#cond))
+
+  // assert with additional message explaining it's cause
+  #define wxASSERT_MSG(cond, msg) \
+    wxAssert(!!(cond), __TFILE__, __LINE__, _T(#cond), msg)
+
+  // an assert helper used to avoid warning when testing constant expressions,
+  // i.e. wxASSERT( sizeof(int) == 4 ) can generate a compiler warning about
+  // expression being always true, but not using
+  // wxASSERT( wxAssertIsEqual(sizeof(int), 4) )
+  //
+  // NB: this is made obsolete by wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT() and shouldn't be
+  //     used any longer
+  extern bool WXDLLEXPORT wxAssertIsEqual(int x, int y);
+#else
+  #define wxTrap()
+
+  // nothing to do in release modes (hopefully at this moment there are
+  // no more bugs ;-)
+  #define wxASSERT(cond)
+  #define wxASSERT_MSG(x, m)
+#endif  //__WXDEBUG__
+
+// Use of wxFalse instead of FALSE suppresses compiler warnings about testing
+// constant expression
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const bool) wxFalse;
+#define wxAssertFailure wxFalse
+
+// special form of assert: always triggers it (in debug mode)
+#define wxFAIL                 wxASSERT(wxAssertFailure)
+
+// FAIL with some message
+#define wxFAIL_MSG(msg)        wxASSERT_MSG(wxAssertFailure, msg)
+
+// NB: the following macros work also in release mode!
+
+/*
+  These macros must be used only in invalid situation: for example, an
+  invalid parameter (NULL pointer) is passed to a function. Instead of
+  dereferencing it and causing core dump the function might try using
+  CHECK( p != NULL ) or CHECK( p != NULL, return LogError("p is NULL!!") )
+*/
+
+// check that expression is true, "return" if not (also FAILs in debug mode)
+#define wxCHECK(x, rc)            if (!(x)) {wxFAIL; return rc; }
+
+// as wxCHECK but with a message explaining why we fail
+#define wxCHECK_MSG(x, rc, msg)   if (!(x)) {wxFAIL_MSG(msg); return rc; }
+
+// check that expression is true, perform op if not
+#define wxCHECK2(x, op)           if (!(x)) {wxFAIL; op; }
+
+// as wxCHECK2 but with a message explaining why we fail
+#define wxCHECK2_MSG(x, op, msg)  if (!(x)) {wxFAIL_MSG(msg); op; }
+
+// special form of wxCHECK2: as wxCHECK, but for use in void functions
+//
+// NB: there is only one form (with msg parameter) and it's intentional:
+//     there is no other way to tell the caller what exactly went wrong
+//     from the void function (of course, the function shouldn't be void
+//     to begin with...)
+#define wxCHECK_RET(x, msg)       if (!(x)) {wxFAIL_MSG(msg); return; }
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Compile time asserts
+//
+// Unlike the normal assert and related macros above which are checked during
+// the program tun-time the macros below will result in a compilation error if
+// the condition they check is false. This is usually used to check the
+// expressions containing sizeof()s which cannot be tested with the
+// preprocessor. If you can use the #if's, do use them as you can give a more
+// detailed error message then.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+  How this works (you don't have to understand it to be able to use the
+  macros): we rely on the fact that it is invalid to define a named bit field
+  in a struct of width 0. All the rest are just the hacks to minimize the
+  possibility of the compiler warnings when compiling this macro: in
+  particular, this is why we define a struct and not an object (which would
+  result in a warning about unused variable) and a named struct (otherwise we'd
+  get a warning about an unnamed struct not used to define an object!).
+  The _n__ part is to stop VC++ 7 being confused since it encloses __LINE++ in
+  parentheses. Unfortunately this does not work with other compilers, so
+  we will only enable it when we know the _precise_ symbols to test for.
+ */
+
+#define wxMAKE_ASSERT_NAME_HELPER(line)     wxAssert_ ## line
+#define wxMAKE_ASSERT_NAME(line)            wxMAKE_ASSERT_NAME_HELPER(line)
+#if 0
+#define wxMAKE_UNIQUE_ASSERT_NAME           wxMAKE_ASSERT_NAME(_n___ ## __LINE__)
+#else
+#define wxMAKE_UNIQUE_ASSERT_NAME           wxMAKE_ASSERT_NAME(__LINE__)
+#endif
+#define wxMAKE_UNIQUE_ASSERT_NAME2(text)    wxMAKE_ASSERT_NAME(text)
+
+/*
+  The second argument of this macro must be a valid C++ identifier and not a
+  string. I.e. you should use it like this:
+
+    wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT( sizeof(int) >= 2, YourIntsAreTooSmall );
+
+ It may be used both within a function and in the global scope.
+*/
+#define wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT(expr, msg) \
+    struct wxMAKE_UNIQUE_ASSERT_NAME { unsigned int msg: expr; }
+
+#define wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT2(expr, msg, text) \
+    struct wxMAKE_UNIQUE_ASSERT_NAME2(text) { unsigned int msg: expr; }
+
+// helpers for wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT below, for private use only
+#define wxMAKE_BITSIZE_MSG(type, size) type ## SmallerThan ## size ## Bits
+
+// a special case of compile time assert: check that the size of the given type
+// is at least the given number of bits
+#define wxASSERT_MIN_BITSIZE(type, size) \
+    wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT(sizeof(type) * CHAR_BIT >= size, \
+                          wxMAKE_BITSIZE_MSG(type, size))
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// other miscellaneous debugger-related functions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// return true if we're running under debugger
+//
+// currently this only really works under Mac in CodeWarrior builds, it always
+// returns false otherwise
+#ifdef __WXMAC__
+    extern bool WXDLLEXPORT wxIsDebuggerRunning();
+#else // !Mac
+    inline bool WXDLLEXPORT wxIsDebuggerRunning() { return false; }
+#endif // Mac/!Mac
+
+#endif  // _WX_DEBUG_H_
+

include/wx/dialog.h

@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dialog.h
+// Purpose:     wxDialogBase class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29.06.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "dialogbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+#include "wx/containr.h"
+#include "wx/toplevel.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxDialogNameStr;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDialogBase : public wxTopLevelWindow
+{
+public:
+    wxDialogBase() { Init(); }
+    virtual ~wxDialogBase() { }
+
+    void Init();
+
+    // the modal dialogs have a return code - usually the id of the last
+    // pressed button
+    void SetReturnCode(int returnCode) { m_returnCode = returnCode; }
+    int GetReturnCode() const { return m_returnCode; }
+
+#if wxUSE_STATTEXT // && wxUSE_TEXTCTRL
+    // splits text up at newlines and places the
+    // lines into a vertical wxBoxSizer
+    wxSizer *CreateTextSizer( const wxString &message );
+#endif // wxUSE_STATTEXT // && wxUSE_TEXTCTRL
+
+#if wxUSE_BUTTON
+    // places buttons into a horizontal wxBoxSizer
+    wxSizer *CreateButtonSizer( long flags );
+#endif // wxUSE_BUTTON
+
+protected:
+    // the return code from modal dialog
+    int m_returnCode;
+
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    WX_DECLARE_CONTROL_CONTAINER();
+};
+
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) && !defined(__WXMICROWIN__)
+    #include "wx/univ/dialog.h"
+#else
+    #if defined(__WXMSW__)
+        #include "wx/msw/dialog.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+        #include "wx/motif/dialog.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+        #include "wx/gtk/dialog.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+        #include "wx/mac/dialog.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+        #include "wx/cocoa/dialog.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXPM__)
+        #include "wx/os2/dialog.h"
+    #endif
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_

include/wx/dialup.h

@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dialup.h
+// Purpose:     Network related wxWindows classes and functions
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     07.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DIALUP_H
+#define _WX_DIALUP_H
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "dialup.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_DIALUP_MANAGER
+
+#include "wx/event.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// misc
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxArrayString;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxEmptyString;
+
+#define WXDIALUP_MANAGER_DEFAULT_BEACONHOST  wxT("www.yahoo.com")
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// A class which groups functions dealing with connecting to the network from a
+// workstation using dial-up access to the net. There is at most one instance
+// of this class in the program accessed via GetDialUpManager().
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/* TODO
+ *
+ * 1. more configurability for Unix: i.e. how to initiate the connection, how
+ *    to check for online status, &c.
+ * 2. a function to enumerate all connections (ISPs) and show a dialog in
+ *    Dial() allowing to choose between them if no ISP given
+ * 3. add an async version of dialing functions which notify the caller about
+ *    the progress (or may be even start another thread to monitor it)
+ * 4. the static creation/accessor functions are not MT-safe - but is this
+ *    really crucial? I think we may suppose they're always called from the
+ *    main thread?
+ */
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDialUpManager
+{
+public:
+    // this function should create and return the object of the
+    // platform-specific class derived from wxDialUpManager. It's implemented
+    // in the platform-specific source files.
+    static wxDialUpManager *Create();
+
+    // could the dialup manager be initialized correctly? If this function
+    // returns FALSE, no other functions will work neither, so it's a good idea
+    // to call this function and check its result before calling any other
+    // wxDialUpManager methods
+    virtual bool IsOk() const = 0;
+
+    // virtual dtor for any base class
+    virtual ~wxDialUpManager() { }
+
+    // operations
+    // ----------
+
+    // fills the array with the names of all possible values for the first
+    // parameter to Dial() on this machine and returns their number (may be 0)
+    virtual size_t GetISPNames(wxArrayString& names) const = 0;
+
+    // dial the given ISP, use username and password to authentificate
+    //
+    // if no nameOfISP is given, the function will select the default one
+    //
+    // if no username/password are given, the function will try to do without
+    // them, but will ask the user if really needed
+    //
+    // if async parameter is FALSE, the function waits until the end of dialing
+    // and returns TRUE upon successful completion.
+    // if async is TRUE, the function only initiates the connection and returns
+    // immediately - the result is reported via events (an event is sent
+    // anyhow, but if dialing failed it will be a DISCONNECTED one)
+    virtual bool Dial(const wxString& nameOfISP = wxEmptyString,
+                      const wxString& username = wxEmptyString,
+                      const wxString& password = wxEmptyString,
+                      bool async = TRUE) = 0;
+
+    // returns TRUE if (async) dialing is in progress
+    virtual bool IsDialing() const = 0;
+
+    // cancel dialing the number initiated with Dial(async = TRUE)
+    // NB: this won't result in DISCONNECTED event being sent
+    virtual bool CancelDialing() = 0;
+
+    // hang up the currently active dial up connection
+    virtual bool HangUp() = 0;
+
+    // online status
+    // -------------
+
+    // returns TRUE if the computer has a permanent network connection (i.e. is
+    // on a LAN) and so there is no need to use Dial() function to go online
+    //
+    // NB: this functions tries to guess the result and it is not always
+    //     guaranteed to be correct, so it's better to ask user for
+    //     confirmation or give him a possibility to override it
+    virtual bool IsAlwaysOnline() const = 0;
+
+    // returns TRUE if the computer is connected to the network: under Windows,
+    // this just means that a RAS connection exists, under Unix we check that
+    // the "well-known host" (as specified by SetWellKnownHost) is reachable
+    virtual bool IsOnline() const = 0;
+
+    // sometimes the built-in logic for determining the online status may fail,
+    // so, in general, the user should be allowed to override it. This function
+    // allows to forcefully set the online status - whatever our internal
+    // algorithm may think about it.
+    virtual void SetOnlineStatus(bool isOnline = TRUE) = 0;
+
+    // set misc wxDialUpManager options
+    // --------------------------------
+
+    // enable automatical checks for the connection status and sending of
+    // wxEVT_DIALUP_CONNECTED/wxEVT_DIALUP_DISCONNECTED events. The interval
+    // parameter is only for Unix where we do the check manually: under
+    // Windows, the notification about the change of connection status is
+    // instantenous.
+    //
+    // Returns FALSE if couldn't set up automatic check for online status.
+    virtual bool EnableAutoCheckOnlineStatus(size_t nSeconds = 60) = 0;
+
+    // disable automatic check for connection status change - notice that the
+    // wxEVT_DIALUP_XXX events won't be sent any more neither.
+    virtual void DisableAutoCheckOnlineStatus() = 0;
+
+    // additional Unix-only configuration
+    // ----------------------------------
+
+    // under Unix, the value of well-known host is used to check whether we're
+    // connected to the internet. It's unused under Windows, but this function
+    // is always safe to call. The default value is www.yahoo.com.
+    virtual void SetWellKnownHost(const wxString& hostname,
+                                  int portno = 80) = 0;
+
+    // Sets the commands to start up the network and to hang up again. Used by
+    // the Unix implementations only.
+    virtual void
+    SetConnectCommand(const wxString& commandDial = wxT("/usr/bin/pon"),
+                      const wxString& commandHangup = wxT("/usr/bin/poff")) = 0;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDialUpManager events
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+BEGIN_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_DIALUP_CONNECTED, 450)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_DIALUP_DISCONNECTED, 451)
+END_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+
+// the event class for the dialup events
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDialUpEvent : public wxEvent
+{
+public:
+    wxDialUpEvent(bool isConnected, bool isOwnEvent) : wxEvent(isOwnEvent)
+    {
+        SetEventType(isConnected ? wxEVT_DIALUP_CONNECTED
+                                 : wxEVT_DIALUP_DISCONNECTED);
+    }
+
+    // is this a CONNECTED or DISCONNECTED event?
+    bool IsConnectedEvent() const
+        { return GetEventType() == wxEVT_DIALUP_CONNECTED; }
+
+    // does this event come from wxDialUpManager::Dial() or from some extrenal
+    // process (i.e. does it result from our own attempt to establish the
+    // connection)?
+    bool IsOwnEvent() const { return m_id != 0; }
+
+    // implement the base class pure virtual
+    virtual wxEvent *Clone() const { return new wxDialUpEvent(*this); }
+};
+
+// the type of dialup event handler function
+typedef void (wxEvtHandler::*wxDialUpEventFunction)(wxDialUpEvent&);
+
+// macros to catch dialup events
+#define EVT_DIALUP_CONNECTED(func) \
+   DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_DIALUP_CONNECTED, -1, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxDialUpEventFunction) & func, NULL),
+#define EVT_DIALUP_DISCONNECTED(func) \
+   DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( wxEVT_DIALUP_DISCONNECTED, -1, -1, (wxObjectEventFunction) (wxEventFunction) (wxDialUpEventFunction) & func, NULL),
+
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DIALUP_MANAGER
+
+#endif // _WX_DIALUP_H

include/wx/dir.h

@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dir.h
+// Purpose:     wxDir is a class for enumerating the files in a directory
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     08.12.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DIR_H_
+#define _WX_DIR_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "dir.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef WX_PRECOMP
+    #include  "wx/string.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// these flags define what kind of filenames is included in the list of files
+// enumerated by GetFirst/GetNext
+enum
+{
+    wxDIR_FILES     = 0x0001,       // include files
+    wxDIR_DIRS      = 0x0002,       // include directories
+    wxDIR_HIDDEN    = 0x0004,       // include hidden files
+    wxDIR_DOTDOT    = 0x0008,       // include '.' and '..'
+
+    // by default, enumerate everything except '.' and '..'
+    wxDIR_DEFAULT   = wxDIR_FILES | wxDIR_DIRS | wxDIR_HIDDEN
+};
+
+// these constants are possible return value of wxDirTraverser::OnDir()
+enum wxDirTraverseResult
+{
+    wxDIR_IGNORE = -1,      // ignore this directory but continue with others
+    wxDIR_STOP,             // stop traversing
+    wxDIR_CONTINUE          // continue into this directory
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDirTraverser: helper class for wxDir::Traverse()
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDirTraverser
+{
+public:
+    // called for each file found by wxDir::Traverse()
+    //
+    // return wxDIR_STOP or wxDIR_CONTINUE from here (wxDIR_IGNORE doesn't
+    // make sense)
+    virtual wxDirTraverseResult OnFile(const wxString& filename) = 0;
+
+    // called for each directory found by wxDir::Traverse()
+    //
+    // return one of the enum elements defined above
+    virtual wxDirTraverseResult OnDir(const wxString& dirname) = 0;
+
+    // called for each directory which we couldn't open during our traversal
+    // of the directory tyree
+    //
+    // this method can also return either wxDIR_STOP, wxDIR_IGNORE or
+    // wxDIR_CONTINUE but the latter is treated specially: it means to retry
+    // opening the directory and so may lead to infinite loop if it is
+    // returned unconditionally, be careful with this!
+    //
+    // the base class version always returns wxDIR_IGNORE
+    virtual wxDirTraverseResult OnOpenError(const wxString& dirname);
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDir: portable equivalent of {open/read/close}dir functions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDirData;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDir
+{
+public:
+    // test for existence of a directory with the given name
+    static bool Exists(const wxString& dir);
+
+    // ctors
+    // -----
+
+    // default, use Open()
+    wxDir() { m_data = NULL; }
+
+    // opens the directory for enumeration, use IsOpened() to test success
+    wxDir(const wxString& dir);
+
+    // dtor cleans up the associated ressources
+    ~wxDir();
+
+    // open the directory for enumerating
+    bool Open(const wxString& dir);
+
+    // returns TRUE if the directory was successfully opened
+    bool IsOpened() const;
+
+    // get the full name of the directory (without '/' at the end)
+    wxString GetName() const;
+
+    // file enumeration routines
+    // -------------------------
+
+    // start enumerating all files matching filespec (or all files if it is
+    // empty) and flags, return TRUE on success
+    bool GetFirst(wxString *filename,
+                  const wxString& filespec = wxEmptyString,
+                  int flags = wxDIR_DEFAULT) const;
+
+    // get next file in the enumeration started with GetFirst()
+    bool GetNext(wxString *filename) const;
+
+    // return true if this directory has any files in it
+    bool HasFiles(const wxString& spec = wxEmptyString);
+
+    // return true if this directory has any subdirectories
+    bool HasSubDirs(const wxString& spec = wxEmptyString);
+
+    // enumerate all files in this directory and its subdirectories
+    //
+    // return the number of files found
+    size_t Traverse(wxDirTraverser& sink,
+                    const wxString& filespec = wxEmptyString,
+                    int flags = wxDIR_DEFAULT) const;
+
+    // simplest version of Traverse(): get the names of all files under this
+    // directory into filenames array, return the number of files
+    static size_t GetAllFiles(const wxString& dirname,
+                              wxArrayString *files,
+                              const wxString& filespec = wxEmptyString,
+                              int flags = wxDIR_DEFAULT);
+
+private:
+    friend class WXDLLEXPORT wxDirData;
+
+    wxDirData *m_data;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDir)
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_DIR_H_

include/wx/dirctrl.h

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DIRCTRL_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DIRCTRL_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/generic/dirctrlg.h"
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DIRCTRL_H_BASE_

include/wx/dirdlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_DIRDLG
+
+#include "wx/dialog.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxDirDialogNameStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxDirDialogDefaultFolderStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxDirSelectorPromptStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxEmptyString;
+
+#define wxDD_DEFAULT_STYLE \
+    (wxDEFAULT_DIALOG_STYLE | wxRESIZE_BORDER | wxDD_NEW_DIR_BUTTON)
+
+/*
+    The interface (TODO: make the other classes really derive from it!) is
+    something like this:
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDirDialogBase : public wxDialog
+{
+public:
+    wxDirDialogBase(wxWindow *parent,
+                    const wxString& title = wxFileSelectorPromptStr,
+                    const wxString& defaultPath = wxEmptyString,
+                    long style = wxDD_DEFAULT_STYLE,
+                    const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                    const wxSize& sz = wxDefaultSize,
+                    const wxString& name = _T("dirdialog"));
+
+    void SetMessage(const wxString& message);
+    void SetPath(const wxString& path);
+    void SetStyle(long style);
+
+    wxString GetMessage() const;
+    wxString GetPath() const;
+    long GetStyle() const;
+};
+
+*/
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #if defined(__WIN16__) || (defined(__GNUWIN32__) && !wxUSE_NORLANDER_HEADERS) || defined(__SALFORDC__) || !wxUSE_OLE
+        #include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+        #define wxDirDialog wxGenericDirDialog
+    #else
+        #include "wx/msw/dirdlg.h"
+    #endif
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dirdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/generic/dirdlgg.h"
+#endif
+
+#if !defined(__WXMSW__) && !defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #define wxDirDialog wxGenericDirDialog
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// common ::wxDirSelector() function
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString
+wxDirSelector(const wxString& message = wxDirSelectorPromptStr,
+              const wxString& defaultPath = wxEmptyString,
+              long style = wxDD_DEFAULT_STYLE,
+              const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+              wxWindow *parent = NULL);
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DIRDLG
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/display.h

@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/display.h
+// Purpose:     wxDisplay class
+// Author:      Royce Mitchell III
+// Modified by: Vadim Zeitlin (resolution changes, display modes, ...)
+// Created:     06/21/02
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2002-2003 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DISPLAY_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DISPLAY_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_DISPLAY
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "displaybase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/dynarray.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindow;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxVideoMode: contains video mode parameters for a display
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct WXDLLEXPORT wxVideoMode
+{
+    wxVideoMode(int width = 0, int height = 0, int depth = 0, int freq = 0)
+    {
+        w = width;
+        h = height;
+
+        bpp = depth;
+
+        refresh = freq;
+    }
+
+    // default copy ctor and assignment operator are ok
+
+    bool operator==(const wxVideoMode& m) const
+    {
+        return w == m.w && h == m.h && bpp == m.bpp && refresh == m.refresh;
+    }
+    bool operator!=(const wxVideoMode& mode) const
+    {
+        return !operator==(mode);
+    }
+
+    // returns true if this mode matches the other one in the sense that all
+    // non zero fields of the other mode have the same value in this one
+    // (except for refresh which is allowed to have a greater value)
+    bool Matches(const wxVideoMode& other) const
+    {
+        return (!other.w || w == other.w) &&
+                    (!other.h || h == other.h) &&
+                        (!other.bpp || bpp == other.bpp) &&
+                            (!other.refresh || refresh >= other.refresh);
+    }
+
+    // the screen size in pixels (e.g. 640*480), 0 means unspecified
+    int w, h;
+
+    // bits per pixel (e.g. 32), 1 is monochrome and 0 means unspecified/known
+    int bpp;
+
+    // refresh frequency in Hz, 0 means unspecified/unknown
+    int refresh;
+};
+
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(wxVideoMode, wxArrayVideoModes);
+
+// default, uninitialized, video mode object
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxVideoMode) wxDefaultVideoMode;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDisplayBase: represents a display/monitor attached to the system
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDisplayBase
+{
+public:
+    // initialize the object containing all information about the given
+    // display
+    //
+    // the displays are numbered from 0 to GetCount() - 1, 0 is always the
+    // primary display and the only one which is always supported
+    wxDisplayBase(size_t index = 0);
+
+    // return the number of available displays, valid parameters to
+    // wxDisplay ctor are from 0 up to this number
+    static size_t GetCount();
+
+    // find the display where the given point lies, return wxNOT_FOUND if
+    // it doesn't belong to any display
+    static int GetFromPoint(const wxPoint& pt);
+
+    // find the display where the given window lies, return wxNOT_FOUND if it
+    // is not shown at all
+    static int GetFromWindow(wxWindow *window);
+
+
+    // return true if the object was initialized successfully
+    virtual bool IsOk() const { return true; }
+
+    // get the display size
+    virtual wxRect GetGeometry() const = 0;
+
+    // name may be empty
+    virtual wxString GetName() const = 0;
+
+    // display 0 is always the primary display
+    bool IsPrimary() const { return m_index == 0; }
+
+
+    // enumerate all video modes supported by this display matching the given
+    // one (in the sense of wxVideoMode::Match())
+    //
+    // as any mode matches the default value of the argument and there is
+    // always at least one video mode supported by display, the returned array
+    // is only empty for the default value of the argument if this function is
+    // not supported at all on this platform
+    virtual wxArrayVideoModes
+        GetModes(const wxVideoMode& mode = wxDefaultVideoMode) const = 0;
+
+    // get current video mode
+    virtual wxVideoMode GetCurrentMode() const = 0;
+
+    // change current mode, return true if succeeded, false otherwise
+    //
+    // for the default value of the argument restores the video mode to default
+    virtual bool ChangeMode(const wxVideoMode& mode = wxDefaultVideoMode) = 0;
+
+    // restore the default video mode (just a more readable synonym)
+    void ResetMode() { (void)ChangeMode(); }
+
+    // virtual dtor as for any base class
+    virtual ~wxDisplayBase() { }
+
+protected:
+    // the index of this display (0 is always the primary one)
+    size_t m_index;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDisplayBase);
+};
+
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/display.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/display.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/unix/displayx11.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/display.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/display.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DISPLAY
+
+#endif // _WX_DISPLAY_H_BASE_

include/wx/dnd.h

@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dnd.h
+// Purpose:     Drag and drop classes declarations
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin, Robert Roebling
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     26.05.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows Team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DND_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DND_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "dndbase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP
+
+#include "wx/dataobj.h"
+#include "wx/cursor.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// flags for wxDropSource::DoDragDrop()
+//
+// NB: wxDrag_CopyOnly must be 0 (== FALSE) and wxDrag_AllowMove must be 1
+//     (== TRUE) for compatibility with the old DoDragDrop(bool) method!
+enum
+{
+    wxDrag_CopyOnly    = 0, // allow only copying
+    wxDrag_AllowMove   = 1, // allow moving (copying is always allowed)
+    wxDrag_DefaultMove = 3  // the default operation is move, not copy
+};
+
+// result of wxDropSource::DoDragDrop() call
+enum wxDragResult
+{
+    wxDragError,    // error prevented the d&d operation from completing
+    wxDragNone,     // drag target didn't accept the data
+    wxDragCopy,     // the data was successfully copied
+    wxDragMove,     // the data was successfully moved (MSW only)
+    wxDragLink,     // operation is a drag-link
+    wxDragCancel    // the operation was cancelled by user (not an error)
+};
+
+inline WXDLLEXPORT bool wxIsDragResultOk(wxDragResult res)
+{
+    return res == wxDragCopy || res == wxDragMove || res == wxDragLink;
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDropSource is the object you need to create (and call DoDragDrop on it)
+// to initiate a drag-and-drop operation
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDropSourceBase
+{
+public:
+    wxDropSourceBase(const wxCursor &cursorCopy = wxNullCursor,
+                     const wxCursor &cursorMove = wxNullCursor,
+                     const wxCursor &cursorStop = wxNullCursor)
+        : m_cursorCopy(cursorCopy),
+          m_cursorMove(cursorMove),
+          m_cursorStop(cursorStop)
+        { m_data = (wxDataObject *)NULL; }
+    virtual ~wxDropSourceBase() { }
+
+    // set the data which is transfered by drag and drop
+    void SetData(wxDataObject& data)
+      { m_data = &data; }
+
+    wxDataObject *GetDataObject()
+      { return m_data; }
+
+    // set the icon corresponding to given drag result
+    void SetCursor(wxDragResult res, const wxCursor& cursor)
+    {
+        if ( res == wxDragCopy )
+            m_cursorCopy = cursor;
+        else if ( res == wxDragMove )
+            m_cursorMove = cursor;
+        else
+            m_cursorStop = cursor;
+    }
+
+    // start drag action, see enum wxDragResult for return value description
+    //
+    // if flags contains wxDrag_AllowMove, moving (and only copying) data is
+    // allowed, if it contains wxDrag_DefaultMove (which includes the previous
+    // flag), it is even the default operation
+    virtual wxDragResult DoDragDrop(int flags = wxDrag_CopyOnly) = 0;
+
+    // override to give feedback depending on the current operation result
+    // "effect" and return TRUE if you did something, FALSE to let the library
+    // give the default feedback
+    virtual bool GiveFeedback(wxDragResult WXUNUSED(effect)) { return FALSE; }
+
+protected:
+    const wxCursor& GetCursor(wxDragResult res) const
+    {
+        if ( res == wxDragCopy )
+            return m_cursorCopy;
+        else if ( res == wxDragMove )
+            return m_cursorMove;
+        else
+            return m_cursorStop;
+    }
+
+    // the data we're dragging
+    wxDataObject *m_data;
+
+    // the cursors to use for feedback
+    wxCursor m_cursorCopy,
+             m_cursorMove,
+             m_cursorStop;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDropSourceBase)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDropTarget should be associated with a window if it wants to be able to
+// receive data via drag and drop.
+//
+// To use this class, you should derive from wxDropTarget and implement
+// OnData() pure virtual method. You may also wish to override OnDrop() if you
+// want to accept the data only inside some region of the window (this may
+// avoid having to copy the data to this application which happens only when
+// OnData() is called)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDropTargetBase
+{
+public:
+    // ctor takes a pointer to heap-allocated wxDataObject which will be owned
+    // by wxDropTarget and deleted by it automatically. If you don't give it
+    // here, you can use SetDataObject() later.
+    wxDropTargetBase(wxDataObject *dataObject = (wxDataObject*)NULL)
+        { m_dataObject = dataObject; }
+    // dtor deletes our data object
+    virtual ~wxDropTargetBase()
+        { delete m_dataObject; }
+
+    // get/set the associated wxDataObject
+    wxDataObject *GetDataObject() const
+        { return m_dataObject; }
+    void SetDataObject(wxDataObject *dataObject)
+        { if (m_dataObject) delete m_dataObject;
+    m_dataObject = dataObject; }
+
+    // these functions are called when data is moved over position (x, y) and
+    // may return either wxDragCopy, wxDragMove or wxDragNone depending on
+    // what would happen if the data were dropped here.
+    //
+    // the last parameter is what would happen by default and is determined by
+    // the platform-specific logic (for example, under Windows it's wxDragCopy
+    // if Ctrl key is pressed and wxDragMove otherwise) except that it will
+    // always be wxDragNone if the carried data is in an unsupported format.
+
+    // called when the mouse enters the window (only once until OnLeave())
+    virtual wxDragResult OnEnter(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def)
+        { return OnDragOver(x, y, def); }
+
+    // called when the mouse moves in the window - shouldn't take long to
+    // execute or otherwise mouse movement would be too slow
+    virtual wxDragResult OnDragOver(wxCoord WXUNUSED(x), wxCoord WXUNUSED(y),
+                                    wxDragResult def)
+        { return def; }
+
+    // called when mouse leaves the window: might be used to remove the
+    // feedback which was given in OnEnter()
+    virtual void OnLeave() { }
+
+    // this function is called when data is dropped at position (x, y) - if it
+    // returns TRUE, OnData() will be called immediately afterwards which will
+    // allow to retrieve the data dropped.
+    virtual bool OnDrop(wxCoord x, wxCoord y) = 0;
+
+    // called after OnDrop() returns TRUE: you will usually just call
+    // GetData() from here and, probably, also refresh something to update the
+    // new data and, finally, return the code indicating how did the operation
+    // complete (returning default value in case of success and wxDragError on
+    // failure is usually ok)
+    virtual wxDragResult OnData(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def) = 0;
+
+    // may be called *only* from inside OnData() and will fill m_dataObject
+    // with the data from the drop source if it returns TRUE
+    virtual bool GetData() = 0;
+
+protected:
+    wxDataObject *m_dataObject;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDropTargetBase)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// include platform dependent class declarations
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/dropsrc.h"
+    #include "wx/msw/ole/droptgt.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/x11/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/dnd.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/dnd.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// standard wxDropTarget implementations (implemented in common/dobjcmn.cpp)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// A simple wxDropTarget derived class for text data: you only need to
+// override OnDropText() to get something working
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTextDropTarget : public wxDropTarget
+{
+public:
+    wxTextDropTarget();
+
+    virtual bool OnDropText(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, const wxString& text) = 0;
+
+    virtual wxDragResult OnData(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def);
+};
+
+// A drop target which accepts files (dragged from File Manager or Explorer)
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileDropTarget : public wxDropTarget
+{
+public:
+    wxFileDropTarget();
+
+    // parameters are the number of files and the array of file names
+    virtual bool OnDropFiles(wxCoord x, wxCoord y,
+                             const wxArrayString& filenames) = 0;
+
+    virtual wxDragResult OnData(wxCoord x, wxCoord y, wxDragResult def);
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DRAG_AND_DROP
+
+#endif // _WX_DND_H_BASE_

include/wx/docmdi.h

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        docmdi.h
+// Purpose:     Frame classes for MDI document/view applications
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c)
+// Licence:   	wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DOCMDI_H_
+#define _WX_DOCMDI_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "docmdi.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_MDI_ARCHITECTURE
+
+#include "wx/docview.h"
+#include "wx/mdi.h"
+
+/*
+ * Use this instead of wxMDIParentFrame
+ */
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocMDIParentFrame: public wxMDIParentFrame
+{
+public:
+    wxDocMDIParentFrame(wxDocManager *manager, wxFrame *parent, wxWindowID id,
+        const wxString& title, const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+        const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize, long style = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE, const wxString& name = wxT("frame"));
+
+    // Extend event processing to search the document manager's event table
+    virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
+
+    wxDocManager *GetDocumentManager(void) const { return m_docManager; }
+
+    void OnExit(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnMRUFile(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnCloseWindow(wxCloseEvent& event);
+
+protected:
+    wxDocManager *m_docManager;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocMDIParentFrame)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocMDIParentFrame)
+};
+
+/*
+ * Use this instead of wxMDIChildFrame
+ */
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocMDIChildFrame: public wxMDIChildFrame
+{
+public:
+    wxDocMDIChildFrame(wxDocument *doc, wxView *view, wxMDIParentFrame *frame, wxWindowID id,
+        const wxString& title, const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition, const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+        long type = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE, const wxString& name = wxT("frame"));
+    ~wxDocMDIChildFrame();
+
+    // Extend event processing to search the view's event table
+    virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
+
+    void OnActivate(wxActivateEvent& event);
+    void OnCloseWindow(wxCloseEvent& event);
+
+    inline wxDocument *GetDocument() const { return m_childDocument; }
+    inline wxView *GetView(void) const { return m_childView; }
+    inline void SetDocument(wxDocument *doc) { m_childDocument = doc; }
+    inline void SetView(wxView *view) { m_childView = view; }
+    bool Destroy() { m_childView = (wxView *)NULL; return wxMDIChildFrame::Destroy(); }
+    
+protected:
+    wxDocument*       m_childDocument;
+    wxView*           m_childView;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocMDIChildFrame)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocMDIChildFrame)
+};
+
+#endif
+    // wxUSE_MDI_ARCHITECTURE
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DOCMDI_H_

include/wx/docview.h

@@ -0,0 +1,614 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        docview.h
+// Purpose:     Doc/View classes
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c)
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DOCH__
+#define _WX_DOCH__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "docview.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_DOC_VIEW_ARCHITECTURE
+
+#include "wx/list.h"
+#include "wx/cmndata.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/frame.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
+    #include "wx/print.h"
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindow;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocument;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxView;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocTemplate;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocManager;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPrintInfo;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCommandProcessor;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileHistory;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxConfigBase;
+
+#if wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM
+  #include "wx/iosfwrap.h"
+#else
+  #include "wx/stream.h"
+#endif
+
+// Document manager flags
+enum
+{
+    wxDOC_SDI = 1,
+    wxDOC_MDI,
+    wxDOC_NEW,
+    wxDOC_SILENT,
+    wxDEFAULT_DOCMAN_FLAGS = wxDOC_SDI
+};
+
+// Document template flags
+enum
+{
+    wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE = 1,
+    wxTEMPLATE_INVISIBLE,
+    wxDEFAULT_TEMPLATE_FLAGS = wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE
+};
+
+#define wxMAX_FILE_HISTORY 9
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocument : public wxEvtHandler
+{
+public:
+    wxDocument(wxDocument *parent = (wxDocument *) NULL);
+    ~wxDocument();
+
+    // accessors
+    void SetFilename(const wxString& filename, bool notifyViews = FALSE);
+    wxString GetFilename() const { return m_documentFile; }
+
+    void SetTitle(const wxString& title) { m_documentTitle = title; };
+    wxString GetTitle() const { return m_documentTitle; }
+
+    void SetDocumentName(const wxString& name) { m_documentTypeName = name; };
+    wxString GetDocumentName() const { return m_documentTypeName; }
+
+    bool GetDocumentSaved() const { return m_savedYet; }
+    void SetDocumentSaved(bool saved = TRUE) { m_savedYet = saved; }
+
+    virtual bool Close();
+    virtual bool Save();
+    virtual bool SaveAs();
+    virtual bool Revert();
+
+#if wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM
+    virtual wxSTD ostream& SaveObject(wxSTD ostream& stream);
+    virtual wxSTD istream& LoadObject(wxSTD istream& stream);
+#else
+    virtual wxOutputStream& SaveObject(wxOutputStream& stream);
+    virtual wxInputStream& LoadObject(wxInputStream& stream);
+#endif
+
+    // Called by wxWindows
+    virtual bool OnSaveDocument(const wxString& filename);
+    virtual bool OnOpenDocument(const wxString& filename);
+    virtual bool OnNewDocument();
+    virtual bool OnCloseDocument();
+
+    // Prompts for saving if about to close a modified document. Returns TRUE
+    // if ok to close the document (may have saved in the meantime, or set
+    // modified to FALSE)
+    virtual bool OnSaveModified();
+
+    // Called by framework if created automatically by the default document
+    // manager: gives document a chance to initialise and (usually) create a
+    // view
+    virtual bool OnCreate(const wxString& path, long flags);
+
+    // By default, creates a base wxCommandProcessor.
+    virtual wxCommandProcessor *OnCreateCommandProcessor();
+    virtual wxCommandProcessor *GetCommandProcessor() const { return m_commandProcessor; }
+    virtual void SetCommandProcessor(wxCommandProcessor *proc) { m_commandProcessor = proc; }
+
+    // Called after a view is added or removed. The default implementation
+    // deletes the document if this is there are no more views.
+    virtual void OnChangedViewList();
+
+    virtual bool DeleteContents();
+
+    virtual bool Draw(wxDC&);
+    virtual bool IsModified() const { return m_documentModified; }
+    virtual void Modify(bool mod) { m_documentModified = mod; }
+
+    virtual bool AddView(wxView *view);
+    virtual bool RemoveView(wxView *view);
+    wxList& GetViews() const { return (wxList&) m_documentViews; }
+    wxView *GetFirstView() const;
+
+    virtual void UpdateAllViews(wxView *sender = (wxView *) NULL, wxObject *hint = (wxObject *) NULL);
+    virtual void NotifyClosing();
+
+    // Remove all views (because we're closing the document)
+    virtual bool DeleteAllViews();
+
+    // Other stuff
+    virtual wxDocManager *GetDocumentManager() const;
+    virtual wxDocTemplate *GetDocumentTemplate() const { return m_documentTemplate; }
+    virtual void SetDocumentTemplate(wxDocTemplate *temp) { m_documentTemplate = temp; }
+
+    // Get title, or filename if no title, else [unnamed]
+    virtual bool GetPrintableName(wxString& buf) const;
+
+    // Returns a window that can be used as a parent for document-related
+    // dialogs. Override if necessary.
+    virtual wxWindow *GetDocumentWindow() const;
+
+protected:
+    wxList                m_documentViews;
+    wxString              m_documentFile;
+    wxString              m_documentTitle;
+    wxString              m_documentTypeName;
+    wxDocTemplate*        m_documentTemplate;
+    bool                  m_documentModified;
+    wxDocument*           m_documentParent;
+    wxCommandProcessor*   m_commandProcessor;
+    bool                  m_savedYet;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxDocument)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocument)
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxView: public wxEvtHandler
+{
+public:
+    //  wxView(wxDocument *doc = (wxDocument *) NULL);
+    wxView();
+    ~wxView();
+
+    wxDocument *GetDocument() const { return m_viewDocument; }
+    virtual void SetDocument(wxDocument *doc);
+
+    wxString GetViewName() const { return m_viewTypeName; }
+    void SetViewName(const wxString& name) { m_viewTypeName = name; };
+
+    wxWindow *GetFrame() const { return m_viewFrame ; }
+    void SetFrame(wxWindow *frame) { m_viewFrame = frame; }
+
+    virtual void OnActivateView(bool activate, wxView *activeView, wxView *deactiveView);
+    virtual void OnDraw(wxDC *dc) = 0;
+    virtual void OnPrint(wxDC *dc, wxObject *info);
+    virtual void OnUpdate(wxView *sender, wxObject *hint = (wxObject *) NULL);
+    virtual void OnClosingDocument() {};
+    virtual void OnChangeFilename();
+
+    // Called by framework if created automatically by the default document
+    // manager class: gives view a chance to initialise
+    virtual bool OnCreate(wxDocument *WXUNUSED(doc), long WXUNUSED(flags)) { return TRUE; };
+
+    // Checks if the view is the last one for the document; if so, asks user
+    // to confirm save data (if modified). If ok, deletes itself and returns
+    // TRUE.
+    virtual bool Close(bool deleteWindow = TRUE);
+
+    // Override to do cleanup/veto close
+    virtual bool OnClose(bool deleteWindow);
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+    // Defeat compiler warning
+    bool OnClose() { return wxEvtHandler::OnClose(); }
+#endif
+
+    // Extend event processing to search the document's event table
+    virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
+
+    // A view's window can call this to notify the view it is (in)active.
+    // The function then notifies the document manager.
+    virtual void Activate(bool activate);
+
+    wxDocManager *GetDocumentManager() const
+        { return m_viewDocument->GetDocumentManager(); }
+
+#if wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
+    virtual wxPrintout *OnCreatePrintout();
+#endif
+
+protected:
+    wxDocument*       m_viewDocument;
+    wxString          m_viewTypeName;
+    wxWindow*         m_viewFrame;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxView)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxView)
+};
+
+// Represents user interface (and other) properties of documents and views
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocTemplate: public wxObject
+{
+
+friend class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocManager;
+
+public:
+    // Associate document and view types. They're for identifying what view is
+    // associated with what template/document type
+    wxDocTemplate(wxDocManager *manager,
+                  const wxString& descr,
+                  const wxString& filter,
+                  const wxString& dir,
+                  const wxString& ext,
+                  const wxString& docTypeName,
+                  const wxString& viewTypeName,
+                  wxClassInfo *docClassInfo = (wxClassInfo *) NULL,
+                  wxClassInfo *viewClassInfo = (wxClassInfo *)NULL,
+                  long flags = wxDEFAULT_TEMPLATE_FLAGS);
+
+    ~wxDocTemplate();
+
+    // By default, these two member functions dynamically creates document and
+    // view using dynamic instance construction. Override these if you need a
+    // different method of construction.
+    virtual wxDocument *CreateDocument(const wxString& path, long flags = 0);
+    virtual wxView *CreateView(wxDocument *doc, long flags = 0);
+
+    wxString GetDefaultExtension() const { return m_defaultExt; };
+    wxString GetDescription() const { return m_description; }
+    wxString GetDirectory() const { return m_directory; };
+    wxDocManager *GetDocumentManager() const { return m_documentManager; }
+    void SetDocumentManager(wxDocManager *manager) { m_documentManager = manager; }
+    wxString GetFileFilter() const { return m_fileFilter; };
+    long GetFlags() const { return m_flags; };
+    virtual wxString GetViewName() const { return m_viewTypeName; }
+    virtual wxString GetDocumentName() const { return m_docTypeName; }
+
+    void SetFileFilter(const wxString& filter) { m_fileFilter = filter; };
+    void SetDirectory(const wxString& dir) { m_directory = dir; };
+    void SetDescription(const wxString& descr) { m_description = descr; };
+    void SetDefaultExtension(const wxString& ext) { m_defaultExt = ext; };
+    void SetFlags(long flags) { m_flags = flags; };
+
+    bool IsVisible() const { return ((m_flags & wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE) == wxTEMPLATE_VISIBLE); }
+
+    virtual bool FileMatchesTemplate(const wxString& path);
+
+protected:
+    long              m_flags;
+    wxString          m_fileFilter;
+    wxString          m_directory;
+    wxString          m_description;
+    wxString          m_defaultExt;
+    wxString          m_docTypeName;
+    wxString          m_viewTypeName;
+    wxDocManager*     m_documentManager;
+
+    // For dynamic creation of appropriate instances.
+    wxClassInfo*      m_docClassInfo;
+    wxClassInfo*      m_viewClassInfo;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocTemplate)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocTemplate)
+};
+
+// One object of this class may be created in an application, to manage all
+// the templates and documents.
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocManager: public wxEvtHandler
+{
+public:
+    wxDocManager(long flags = wxDEFAULT_DOCMAN_FLAGS, bool initialize = TRUE);
+    ~wxDocManager();
+
+    virtual bool Initialize();
+
+    // Handlers for common user commands
+    void OnFileClose(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnFileCloseAll(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnFileNew(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnFileOpen(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnFileRevert(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnFileSave(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnFileSaveAs(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnPrint(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnPrintSetup(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnPreview(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnUndo(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnRedo(wxCommandEvent& event);
+
+    // Handlers for UI update commands
+    void OnUpdateFileOpen(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdateFileClose(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdateFileRevert(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdateFileNew(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdateFileSave(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdateFileSaveAs(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdateUndo(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdateRedo(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+
+    void OnUpdatePrint(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdatePrintSetup(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+    void OnUpdatePreview(wxUpdateUIEvent& event);
+
+    // Extend event processing to search the view's event table
+    virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
+
+    // called when file format detection didn't work, can be overridden to do
+    // something in this case
+    virtual void OnOpenFileFailure() { }
+
+    virtual wxDocument *CreateDocument(const wxString& path, long flags = 0);
+    virtual wxView *CreateView(wxDocument *doc, long flags = 0);
+    virtual void DeleteTemplate(wxDocTemplate *temp, long flags = 0);
+    virtual bool FlushDoc(wxDocument *doc);
+    virtual wxDocTemplate *MatchTemplate(const wxString& path);
+    virtual wxDocTemplate *SelectDocumentPath(wxDocTemplate **templates,
+            int noTemplates, wxString& path, long flags, bool save = FALSE);
+    virtual wxDocTemplate *SelectDocumentType(wxDocTemplate **templates,
+            int noTemplates, bool sort = FALSE);
+    virtual wxDocTemplate *SelectViewType(wxDocTemplate **templates,
+            int noTemplates, bool sort = FALSE);
+    virtual wxDocTemplate *FindTemplateForPath(const wxString& path);
+
+    void AssociateTemplate(wxDocTemplate *temp);
+    void DisassociateTemplate(wxDocTemplate *temp);
+
+    wxDocument *GetCurrentDocument() const;
+
+    void SetMaxDocsOpen(int n) { m_maxDocsOpen = n; }
+    int GetMaxDocsOpen() const { return m_maxDocsOpen; }
+
+    // Add and remove a document from the manager's list
+    void AddDocument(wxDocument *doc);
+    void RemoveDocument(wxDocument *doc);
+
+    // closes all currently open documents
+    bool CloseDocuments(bool force = TRUE);
+
+    // closes the specified document
+    bool CloseDocument(wxDocument* doc, bool force = FALSE);
+
+    // Clear remaining documents and templates
+    bool Clear(bool force = TRUE);
+
+    // Views or windows should inform the document manager
+    // when a view is going in or out of focus
+    virtual void ActivateView(wxView *view, bool activate = TRUE, bool deleting = FALSE);
+    virtual wxView *GetCurrentView() const;
+
+    wxList& GetDocuments() { return m_docs; }
+    wxList& GetTemplates() { return m_templates; }
+
+    // Make a default document name
+    virtual bool MakeDefaultName(wxString& buf);
+
+    // Make a frame title (override this to do something different)
+    virtual wxString MakeFrameTitle(wxDocument* doc);
+
+    virtual wxFileHistory *OnCreateFileHistory();
+    virtual wxFileHistory *GetFileHistory() const { return m_fileHistory; }
+
+    // File history management
+    virtual void AddFileToHistory(const wxString& file);
+    virtual void RemoveFileFromHistory(size_t i);
+    virtual size_t GetHistoryFilesCount() const;
+    virtual wxString GetHistoryFile(size_t i) const;
+    virtual void FileHistoryUseMenu(wxMenu *menu);
+    virtual void FileHistoryRemoveMenu(wxMenu *menu);
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+    virtual void FileHistoryLoad(wxConfigBase& config);
+    virtual void FileHistorySave(wxConfigBase& config);
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+    virtual void FileHistoryAddFilesToMenu();
+    virtual void FileHistoryAddFilesToMenu(wxMenu* menu);
+
+    wxString GetLastDirectory() const { return m_lastDirectory; }
+    void SetLastDirectory(const wxString& dir) { m_lastDirectory = dir; }
+
+    // Get the current document manager
+    static wxDocManager* GetDocumentManager() { return sm_docManager; }
+
+    // deprecated, use GetHistoryFilesCount() instead
+    wxDEPRECATED( size_t GetNoHistoryFiles() const );
+
+protected:
+    long              m_flags;
+    int               m_defaultDocumentNameCounter;
+    int               m_maxDocsOpen;
+    wxList            m_docs;
+    wxList            m_templates;
+    wxView*           m_currentView;
+    wxFileHistory*    m_fileHistory;
+    wxString          m_lastDirectory;
+    static wxDocManager* sm_docManager;
+
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxDocManager)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocManager)
+};
+
+inline size_t wxDocManager::GetNoHistoryFiles() const
+{
+    return GetHistoryFilesCount();
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// A default child frame
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocChildFrame : public wxFrame
+{
+public:
+    wxDocChildFrame(wxDocument *doc,
+                    wxView *view,
+                    wxFrame *frame,
+                    wxWindowID id,
+                    const wxString& title,
+                    const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                    const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                    long type = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE,
+                    const wxString& name = wxT("frame"));
+    ~wxDocChildFrame();
+
+    // Extend event processing to search the view's event table
+    virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
+
+    void OnActivate(wxActivateEvent& event);
+    void OnCloseWindow(wxCloseEvent& event);
+
+    wxDocument *GetDocument() const { return m_childDocument; }
+    wxView *GetView() const { return m_childView; }
+    void SetDocument(wxDocument *doc) { m_childDocument = doc; }
+    void SetView(wxView *view) { m_childView = view; }
+    bool Destroy() { m_childView = (wxView *)NULL; return wxFrame::Destroy(); }
+
+protected:
+    wxDocument*       m_childDocument;
+    wxView*           m_childView;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocChildFrame)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocChildFrame)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// A default parent frame
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocParentFrame : public wxFrame
+{
+public:
+    wxDocParentFrame(wxDocManager *manager,
+                     wxFrame *frame,
+                     wxWindowID id,
+                     const wxString& title,
+                     const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                     const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                     long type = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE,
+                     const wxString& name = wxT("frame"));
+
+    // Extend event processing to search the document manager's event table
+    virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
+
+    wxDocManager *GetDocumentManager() const { return m_docManager; }
+
+    void OnExit(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnMRUFile(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnCloseWindow(wxCloseEvent& event);
+
+protected:
+    wxDocManager *m_docManager;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocParentFrame)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocParentFrame)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Provide simple default printing facilities
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocPrintout : public wxPrintout
+{
+public:
+    wxDocPrintout(wxView *view = (wxView *) NULL, const wxString& title = wxT("Printout"));
+    bool OnPrintPage(int page);
+    bool HasPage(int page);
+    bool OnBeginDocument(int startPage, int endPage);
+    void GetPageInfo(int *minPage, int *maxPage, int *selPageFrom, int *selPageTo);
+
+    virtual wxView *GetView() { return m_printoutView; }
+
+protected:
+    wxView*       m_printoutView;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxDocPrintout)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDocPrintout)
+};
+#endif // wxUSE_PRINTING_ARCHITECTURE
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// File history management
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileHistory : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxFileHistory(size_t maxFiles = 9, wxWindowID idBase = wxID_FILE1);
+    ~wxFileHistory();
+
+    // Operations
+    virtual void AddFileToHistory(const wxString& file);
+    virtual void RemoveFileFromHistory(size_t i);
+    virtual int GetMaxFiles() const { return m_fileMaxFiles; }
+    virtual void UseMenu(wxMenu *menu);
+
+    // Remove menu from the list (MDI child may be closing)
+    virtual void RemoveMenu(wxMenu *menu);
+
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+    virtual void Load(wxConfigBase& config);
+    virtual void Save(wxConfigBase& config);
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+    virtual void AddFilesToMenu();
+    virtual void AddFilesToMenu(wxMenu* menu); // Single menu
+
+    // Accessors
+    virtual wxString GetHistoryFile(size_t i) const;
+    virtual size_t GetCount() const { return m_fileHistoryN; }
+
+    const wxList& GetMenus() const { return m_fileMenus; }
+
+    // deprecated, use GetCount() instead
+    wxDEPRECATED( size_t GetNoHistoryFiles() const );
+
+protected:
+    // Last n files
+    wxChar**          m_fileHistory;
+    // Number of files saved
+    size_t            m_fileHistoryN;
+    // Menus to maintain (may need several for an MDI app)
+    wxList            m_fileMenus;
+    // Max files to maintain
+    size_t            m_fileMaxFiles;
+
+private:
+    // The ID of the first history menu item (Doesn't have to be wxID_FILE1)
+    wxWindowID m_idBase;
+
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxFileHistory)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFileHistory)
+};
+
+inline size_t wxFileHistory::GetNoHistoryFiles() const
+{
+    return m_fileHistoryN;
+}
+
+#if wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM
+// For compatibility with existing file formats:
+// converts from/to a stream to/from a temporary file.
+bool WXDLLEXPORT wxTransferFileToStream(const wxString& filename, wxSTD ostream& stream);
+bool WXDLLEXPORT wxTransferStreamToFile(wxSTD istream& stream, const wxString& filename);
+#else
+// For compatibility with existing file formats:
+// converts from/to a stream to/from a temporary file.
+bool WXDLLEXPORT wxTransferFileToStream(const wxString& filename, wxOutputStream& stream);
+bool WXDLLEXPORT wxTransferStreamToFile(wxInputStream& stream, const wxString& filename);
+#endif // wxUSE_STD_IOSTREAM
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DOC_VIEW_ARCHITECTURE
+
+#endif // _WX_DOCH__

include/wx/dragimag.h

@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+#ifndef _WX_DRAGIMAG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_DRAGIMAG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_DRAGIMAGE
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxRect;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMemoryDC;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDC;
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WIN16__)  || defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#else
+#include "wx/msw/dragimag.h"
+#endif
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/generic/dragimgg.h"
+#define wxDragImage wxGenericDragImage
+#define sm_classwxDragImage sm_classwxGenericDragImage
+
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DRAGIMAGE
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_DRAGIMAG_H_BASE_

include/wx/dynarray.h

@@ -0,0 +1,628 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        dynarray.h
+// Purpose:     auto-resizable (i.e. dynamic) array support
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     12.09.97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef   _DYNARRAY_H
+#define   _DYNARRAY_H
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "dynarray.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+/*
+  This header defines the dynamic arrays and object arrays (i.e. arrays which
+  own their elements). Dynamic means that the arrays grow automatically as
+  needed.
+
+  These macros are ugly (especially if you look in the sources ;-), but they
+  allow us to define "template" classes without actually using templates and so
+  this works with all compilers (and may be also much faster to compile even
+  with a compiler which does support templates). The arrays defined with these
+  macros are type-safe.
+
+  Range checking is performed in debug build for both arrays and objarrays but
+  not in release build - so using an invalid index will just lead to a crash
+  then.
+
+  Note about memory usage: arrays never shrink automatically (although you may
+  use Shrink() function explicitly), they only grow, so loading 10 millions in
+  an array only to delete them 2 lines below might be a bad idea if the array
+  object is not going to be destroyed soon. However, as it does free memory
+  when destroyed, it is ok if the array is a local variable.
+ */
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+   The initial size by which an array grows when an element is added default
+   value avoids allocate one or two bytes when the array is created which is
+   rather inefficient
+*/
+#define WX_ARRAY_DEFAULT_INITIAL_SIZE    (16)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// types
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+    Callback compare function for quick sort.
+
+    It must return negative value, 0 or positive value if the first item is
+    less than, equal to or greater than the second one.
+ */
+extern "C"
+{
+typedef int (wxCMPFUNC_CONV *CMPFUNC)(const void* pItem1, const void* pItem2);
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Base class managing data having size of type 'long' (not used directly)
+//
+// NB: for efficiency this often used class has no virtual functions (hence no
+//     virtual table), even dtor is *not* virtual. If used as expected it
+//     won't create any problems because ARRAYs from DEFINE_ARRAY have no dtor
+//     at all, so it's not too important if it's not called (this happens when
+//     you cast "SomeArray *" as "BaseArray *" and then delete it)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define  _WX_DECLARE_BASEARRAY(T, name, classexp)                   \
+classexp name                                                       \
+{                                                                   \
+public:                                                             \
+  name();                                                           \
+  name(const name& array);                                          \
+  name& operator=(const name& src);                                 \
+  ~name();                                                          \
+                                                                    \
+  void Empty() { m_nCount = 0; }                                    \
+  void Clear();                                                     \
+  void Alloc(size_t uiSize);                                        \
+  void Shrink();                                                    \
+                                                                    \
+  size_t GetCount() const { return m_nCount; }                      \
+  void SetCount(size_t n, T defval = T(0));                         \
+  bool IsEmpty() const { return m_nCount == 0; }                    \
+  size_t Count() const { return m_nCount; }                         \
+                                                                    \
+  typedef T base_type;                                              \
+                                                                    \
+protected:                                                          \
+  T& Item(size_t uiIndex) const                                     \
+    { wxASSERT( uiIndex < m_nCount ); return m_pItems[uiIndex]; }   \
+  T& operator[](size_t uiIndex) const { return Item(uiIndex); }     \
+                                                                    \
+  int Index(T lItem, bool bFromEnd = FALSE) const;                  \
+  int Index(T lItem, CMPFUNC fnCompare) const;                      \
+  size_t IndexForInsert(T lItem, CMPFUNC fnCompare) const;          \
+  void Add(T lItem, size_t nInsert = 1);                            \
+  void Add(T lItem, CMPFUNC fnCompare);                             \
+  void Insert(T lItem, size_t uiIndex, size_t nInsert = 1);         \
+  void Remove(T lItem);                                             \
+  void RemoveAt(size_t uiIndex, size_t nRemove = 1);                \
+                                                                    \
+  void Sort(CMPFUNC fnCompare);                                     \
+                                                                    \
+private:                                                            \
+  void Grow(size_t nIncrement = 0);                                 \
+  bool Realloc(size_t nSize);                                       \
+                                                                    \
+  size_t  m_nSize,                                                  \
+          m_nCount;                                                 \
+                                                                    \
+  T      *m_pItems;                                                 \
+}
+
+// ============================================================================
+// The private helper macros containing the core of the array classes
+// ============================================================================
+
+// Implementation notes:
+//
+// JACS: Salford C++ doesn't like 'var->operator=' syntax, as in:
+//          { ((wxBaseArray *)this)->operator=((const wxBaseArray&)src);
+//       so using a temporary variable instead.
+//
+// The classes need a (even trivial) ~name() to link under Mac X
+//
+// _WX_ERROR_REMOVE is needed to resolve the name conflict between the wxT()
+// macro and T typedef: we can't use wxT() inside WX_DEFINE_ARRAY!
+
+#define _WX_ERROR_REMOVE wxT("removing inexisting element in wxArray::Remove")
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// _WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY: array for simple types
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define  _WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base, classexp)                \
+wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT2(sizeof(T) <= sizeof(base::base_type),          \
+                       TypeTooBigToBeStoredIn##base,                  \
+                       name);                                         \
+typedef int (CMPFUNC_CONV *CMPFUNC##T)(T *pItem1, T *pItem2);         \
+classexp name : public base                                           \
+{                                                                     \
+public:                                                               \
+  name() { }                                                          \
+  ~name() { }                                                         \
+                                                                      \
+  name& operator=(const name& src)                                    \
+    { base* temp = (base*) this;                                      \
+      (*temp) = ((const base&)src);                                   \
+      return *this; }                                                 \
+                                                                      \
+  T& operator[](size_t uiIndex) const                                 \
+    { return (T&)(base::Item(uiIndex)); }                             \
+  T& Item(size_t uiIndex) const                                       \
+    { return (T&)(base::Item(uiIndex)); }                             \
+  T& Last() const                                                     \
+    { return (T&)(base::Item(Count() - 1)); }                         \
+                                                                      \
+  int Index(T Item, bool bFromEnd = FALSE) const                      \
+    { return base::Index((base_type)Item, bFromEnd); }                \
+                                                                      \
+  void Add(T Item, size_t nInsert = 1)                                \
+    { base::Add((base_type)Item, nInsert); }                          \
+  void Insert(T Item, size_t uiIndex, size_t nInsert = 1)             \
+    { base::Insert((base_type)Item, uiIndex, nInsert) ; }             \
+                                                                      \
+  void RemoveAt(size_t uiIndex, size_t nRemove = 1)                   \
+    { base::RemoveAt(uiIndex, nRemove); }                             \
+  void Remove(T Item)                                                 \
+    { int iIndex = Index(Item);                                       \
+      wxCHECK2_MSG( iIndex != wxNOT_FOUND, return,                    \
+         _WX_ERROR_REMOVE);                                           \
+      base::RemoveAt((size_t)iIndex); }                               \
+                                                                      \
+  void Sort(CMPFUNC##T fCmp) { base::Sort((CMPFUNC)fCmp); }           \
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// _WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY: sorted array for simple data types
+//    cannot handle types with size greater than pointer because of sorting
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define _WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base, defcomp, classexp) \
+wxCOMPILE_TIME_ASSERT2(sizeof(T) <= sizeof(void *),                   \
+                       TypeTooBigToBeStoredInSorted##base,            \
+                       name);                                         \
+typedef int (CMPFUNC_CONV *SCMPFUNC##T)(T pItem1, T pItem2);          \
+classexp name : public base                                           \
+{                                                                     \
+public:                                                               \
+  name(SCMPFUNC##T fn defcomp) { m_fnCompare = fn; }                  \
+                                                                      \
+  name& operator=(const name& src)                                    \
+    { base* temp = (base*) this;                                      \
+      (*temp) = ((const base&)src);                                   \
+      m_fnCompare = src.m_fnCompare;                                  \
+      return *this; }                                                 \
+                                                                      \
+  T& operator[](size_t uiIndex) const                                 \
+    { return (T&)(base::Item(uiIndex)); }                             \
+  T& Item(size_t uiIndex) const                                       \
+    { return (T&)(base::Item(uiIndex)); }                             \
+  T& Last() const                                                     \
+    { return (T&)(base::Item(Count() - 1)); }                         \
+                                                                      \
+  int Index(T Item) const                                             \
+    { return base::Index(Item, (CMPFUNC)m_fnCompare); }               \
+                                                                      \
+  size_t IndexForInsert(T Item) const                                 \
+    { return base::IndexForInsert(Item, (CMPFUNC)m_fnCompare); }      \
+                                                                      \
+  void AddAt(T item, size_t index)                                    \
+    { base::Insert(item, index); }                                    \
+                                                                      \
+  void Add(T Item)                                                    \
+    { base::Add(Item, (CMPFUNC)m_fnCompare); }                        \
+                                                                      \
+  void RemoveAt(size_t uiIndex, size_t nRemove = 1)                   \
+    { base::RemoveAt(uiIndex, nRemove); }                             \
+  void Remove(T Item)                                                 \
+    { int iIndex = Index(Item);                                       \
+      wxCHECK2_MSG( iIndex != wxNOT_FOUND, return,                    \
+        _WX_ERROR_REMOVE );                                           \
+      base::RemoveAt((size_t)iIndex); }                               \
+                                                                      \
+private:                                                              \
+  SCMPFUNC##T m_fnCompare;                                            \
+}
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// _WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY: an array for pointers to type T with owning semantics
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define _WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY(T, name, base, classexp)                    \
+typedef int (CMPFUNC_CONV *CMPFUNC##T)(T **pItem1, T **pItem2);          \
+classexp name : public base                                              \
+{                                                                        \
+typedef int (CMPFUNC_CONV *CMPFUNC##base)(void **pItem1, void **pItem2); \
+public:                                                                  \
+  name() { }                                                             \
+  name(const name& src);                                                 \
+  name& operator=(const name& src);                                      \
+                                                                         \
+  ~name();                                                               \
+                                                                         \
+  T& operator[](size_t uiIndex) const                                    \
+    { return *(T*)base::Item(uiIndex); }                                 \
+  T& Item(size_t uiIndex) const                                          \
+    { return *(T*)base::Item(uiIndex); }                                 \
+  T& Last() const                                                        \
+    { return *(T*)(base::Item(Count() - 1)); }                           \
+                                                                         \
+  int Index(const T& Item, bool bFromEnd = FALSE) const;                 \
+                                                                         \
+  void Add(const T& Item, size_t nInsert = 1);                           \
+  void Add(const T* pItem)                                               \
+    { base::Add((T*)pItem); }                                            \
+                                                                         \
+  void Insert(const T& Item,  size_t uiIndex, size_t nInsert = 1);       \
+  void Insert(const T* pItem, size_t uiIndex)                            \
+    { base::Insert((T*)pItem, uiIndex); }                                \
+                                                                         \
+  void Empty() { DoEmpty(); base::Empty(); }                             \
+  void Clear() { DoEmpty(); base::Clear(); }                             \
+                                                                         \
+  T* Detach(size_t uiIndex)                                              \
+    { T* p = (T*)base::Item(uiIndex);                                    \
+      base::RemoveAt(uiIndex); return p; }                               \
+  void RemoveAt(size_t uiIndex, size_t nRemove = 1);                     \
+                                                                         \
+  void Sort(CMPFUNC##T fCmp) { base::Sort((CMPFUNC##base)fCmp); }        \
+                                                                         \
+private:                                                                 \
+  void DoEmpty();                                                        \
+  void DoCopy(const name& src);                                          \
+}
+
+// ============================================================================
+// The public macros for declaration and definition of the dynamic arrays
+// ============================================================================
+
+// Please note that for each macro WX_FOO_ARRAY we also have
+// WX_FOO_EXPORTED_ARRAY and WX_FOO_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY which are exactly the
+// same except that they use an additional __declspec(dllexport) or equivalent
+// under Windows if needed.
+//
+// The first (just EXPORTED) macros do it if wxWindows was compiled as a DLL
+// and so must be used used inside the library. The second kind (USER_EXPORTED)
+// allow the user code to do it when it wants. This is needed if you have a dll
+// that wants to export a wxArray daubed with your own import/export goo.
+//
+// Finally, you can define the macro below as something special to modify the
+// arrays defined by a simple WX_FOO_ARRAY as well. By default is is empty.
+#define wxARRAY_DEFAULT_EXPORT
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// WX_DECLARE_BASEARRAY(T, name) declare an array class named "name" containing
+// the elements of type T
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WX_DECLARE_BASEARRAY(T, name)                             \
+    WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(T, name, wxARRAY_DEFAULT_EXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(T, name)                    \
+    WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(T, name, WXDLLEXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(T, name, expmode)      \
+    typedef T _wxArray##name;                                     \
+    _WX_DECLARE_BASEARRAY(_wxArray##name, name, class expmode)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base) define an array class named "name" deriving
+// from class "base" containing the elements of type T
+//
+// Note that the class defined has only inline function and doesn't take any
+// space at all so there is no size penalty for defining multiple array classes
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base)                        \
+    WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base, wxARRAY_DEFAULT_EXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base)               \
+    WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base, WXDLLEXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base, expmode) \
+    typedef T _wxArray##name;                                     \
+    _WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(_wxArray##name, name, base, class expmode)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY: this is the same as the previous macro, but it
+// defines a sorted array.
+//
+// Differences:
+//  1) it must be given a COMPARE function in ctor which takes 2 items of type
+//     T* and should return -1, 0 or +1 if the first one is less/greater
+//     than/equal to the second one.
+//  2) the Add() method inserts the item in such was that the array is always
+//     sorted (it uses the COMPARE function)
+//  3) it has no Sort() method because it's always sorted
+//  4) Index() method is much faster (the sorted arrays use binary search
+//     instead of linear one), but Add() is slower.
+//  5) there is no Insert() method because you can't insert an item into the
+//     given position in a sorted array but there is IndexForInsert()/AddAt()
+//     pair which may be used to optimize a common operation of "insert only if
+//     not found"
+//
+// Note that you have to specify the comparison function when creating the
+// objects of this array type. If, as in 99% of cases, the comparison function
+// is the same for all objects of a class, WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP below
+// is more convenient.
+//
+// Summary: use this class when the speed of Index() function is important, use
+// the normal arrays otherwise.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define wxARRAY_EMPTY_CMP
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base)                         \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base,               \
+                                             wxARRAY_DEFAULT_EXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base)                \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base, WXDLLEXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, base, expmode)  \
+    typedef T _wxArray##name;                                             \
+    _WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(_wxArray##name, name, base,               \
+                                wxARRAY_EMPTY_CMP, class expmode)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP: exactly the same as above but the comparison
+// function is provided by this macro and the objects of this class have a
+// default constructor which just uses it.
+//
+// The arguments are: the element type, the comparison function and the array
+// name
+//
+// NB: this is, of course, how WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY() should have worked
+//     from the very beginning - unfortunately I didn't think about this earlier
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, base)               \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, base,     \
+                                                 wxARRAY_DEFAULT_EXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, base)      \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, base,     \
+                                                 WXDLLEXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, base, \
+                                                     expmode)                \
+    typedef T _wxArray##name;                                                \
+    _WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(_wxArray##name, name, base, = cmpfunc,       \
+                                class expmode)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY(T, name): this macro generates a new array class
+// named "name" which owns the objects of type T it contains, i.e. it will
+// delete them when it is destroyed.
+//
+// An element is of type T*, but arguments of type T& are taken (see below!)
+// and T& is returned.
+//
+// Don't use this for simple types such as "int" or "long"!
+//
+// Note on Add/Insert functions:
+//  1) function(T*) gives the object to the array, i.e. it will delete the
+//     object when it's removed or in the array's dtor
+//  2) function(T&) will create a copy of the object and work with it
+//
+// Also:
+//  1) Remove() will delete the object after removing it from the array
+//  2) Detach() just removes the object from the array (returning pointer to it)
+//
+// NB1: Base type T should have an accessible copy ctor if Add(T&) is used
+// NB2: Never ever cast a array to it's base type: as dtor is not virtual
+//      and so you risk having at least the memory leaks and probably worse
+//
+// Some functions of this class are not inline, so it takes some space to
+// define new class from this template even if you don't use it - which is not
+// the case for the simple (non-object) array classes
+//
+// To use an objarray class you must
+//      #include "dynarray.h"
+//      WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY(element_type, list_class_name)
+//      #include "arrimpl.cpp"
+//      WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY(list_class_name) // name must be the same as above!
+//
+// This is necessary because at the moment of DEFINE_OBJARRAY class parsing the
+// element_type must be fully defined (i.e. forward declaration is not
+// enough), while WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY may be done anywhere. The separation of
+// two allows to break cicrcular dependencies with classes which have member
+// variables of objarray type.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY(T, name)                        \
+    WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(T, name, wxARRAY_DEFAULT_EXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(T, name)               \
+    WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(T, name, WXDLLEXPORT)
+
+#define WX_DECLARE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(T, name, expmode) \
+    typedef T _wxObjArray##name;                            \
+    _WX_DECLARE_OBJARRAY(_wxObjArray##name, name, wxArrayPtrVoid, class expmode)
+
+// WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY is going to be redefined when arrimpl.cpp is included,
+// try to provoke a human-understandable error if it used incorrectly.
+//
+// there is no real need for 3 different macros in the DEFINE case but do it
+// anyhow for consistency
+#define WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY(name) DidYouIncludeArrimplCpp
+#define WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(name)   WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY(name)
+#define WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_OBJARRAY(name)   WX_DEFINE_OBJARRAY(name)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Some commonly used predefined base arrays
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(const void *, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid);
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(short,        wxBaseArrayShort);
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(int,          wxBaseArrayInt);
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(long,         wxBaseArrayLong);
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_BASEARRAY(double,       wxBaseArrayDouble);
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Convenience macros to define arrays from base arrays
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_ARRAY(T, name)                                       \
+    WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid)
+#define WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY(T, name)                              \
+    WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid)
+#define WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY(T, name, expmode)                \
+    WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_SHORT(T, name)                                 \
+    WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayShort)
+#define WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_SHORT(T, name)                        \
+    WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayShort)
+#define WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_SHORT(T, name, expmode)          \
+    WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayShort, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_INT(T, name)                                   \
+    WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayInt)
+#define WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT(T, name)                          \
+    WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayInt)
+#define WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT(T, name, expmode)            \
+    WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayInt, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_LONG(T, name)                                  \
+    WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayLong)
+#define WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_LONG(T, name)                         \
+    WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayLong)
+#define WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_LONG(T, name, expmode)           \
+    WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayLong, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_DOUBLE(T, name)                                \
+    WX_DEFINE_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayDouble)
+#define WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_DOUBLE(T, name)                       \
+    WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayDouble)
+#define WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_DOUBLE(T, name, expmode)         \
+    WX_DEFINE_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayDouble, expmode)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Convenience macros to define sorted arrays from base arrays
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY(T, name)                                \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY(T, name)                       \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY(T, name, expmode)         \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_SHORT(T, name)                          \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayShort)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_SHORT(T, name)                 \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayShort)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_SHORT(T, name, expmode)   \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayShort, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_INT(T, name)                            \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayInt)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT(T, name)                   \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayInt)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT(T, name, expmode)     \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayInt, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_LONG(T, name)                           \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayLong)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_LONG(T, name)                  \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayLong)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_LONG(T, name, expmode)    \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY(T, name, wxBaseArrayLong, expmode)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Convenience macros to define sorted arrays from base arrays
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name)                   \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name)          \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayPtrVoid)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc,           \
+                                                     name, expmode)    \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name,     \
+                                                 wxBaseArrayPtrVoid, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_CMP_SHORT(T, cmpfunc, name)             \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayShort)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP_SHORT(T, cmpfunc, name)    \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayShort)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP_SHORT(T, cmpfunc,     \
+                                                       name, expmode)  \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name,     \
+                                                 wxBaseArrayShort, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_CMP_INT(T, cmpfunc, name)               \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayInt)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP_INT(T, cmpfunc, name)      \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayInt)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP_INT(T, cmpfunc,       \
+                                                     name, expmode)    \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name,     \
+                                                 wxBaseArrayInt, expmode)
+
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_ARRAY_CMP_LONG(T, cmpfunc, name)              \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayLong)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP_LONG(T, cmpfunc, name)     \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name, wxBaseArrayLong)
+#define WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_ARRAY_CMP_LONG(T, cmpfunc,      \
+                                                      name, expmode)   \
+    WX_DEFINE_SORTED_USER_EXPORTED_TYPEARRAY_CMP(T, cmpfunc, name,     \
+                                                 wxBaseArrayLong, expmode)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Some commonly used predefined arrays
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_SHORT (short,  wxArrayShort);
+WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_INT   (int,    wxArrayInt);
+WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY_LONG  (long,   wxArrayLong);
+WX_DEFINE_EXPORTED_ARRAY       (void *, wxArrayPtrVoid);
+
+// -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// convenience macros
+// -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// append all element of one array to another one
+#define WX_APPEND_ARRAY(array, other)                                         \
+    {                                                                         \
+        size_t count = (other).Count();                                       \
+        for ( size_t n = 0; n < count; n++ )                                  \
+        {                                                                     \
+            (array).Add((other)[n]);                                          \
+        }                                                                     \
+    }
+
+// delete all array elements
+//
+// NB: the class declaration of the array elements must be visible from the
+//     place where you use this macro, otherwise the proper destructor may not
+//     be called (a decent compiler should give a warning about it, but don't
+//     count on it)!
+#define WX_CLEAR_ARRAY(array)                                                 \
+    {                                                                         \
+        size_t count = (array).Count();                                       \
+        for ( size_t n = 0; n < count; n++ )                                  \
+        {                                                                     \
+            delete (array)[n];                                                \
+        }                                                                     \
+                                                                              \
+        (array).Empty();                                                      \
+    }
+
+#endif // _DYNARRAY_H
+

include/wx/dynlib.h

@@ -0,0 +1,246 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/dynlib.h
+// Purpose:     Dynamic library loading classes
+// Author:      Guilhem Lavaux, Vadim Zeitlin, Vaclav Slavik
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     20/07/98
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Guilhem Lavaux
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DYNLIB_H__
+#define _WX_DYNLIB_H__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#   pragma interface "dynlib.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/setup.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_DYNAMIC_LOADER
+
+#include "wx/dynload.h"  // Use the new (version of) wxDynamicLibrary instead
+
+#elif wxUSE_DYNLIB_CLASS
+
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/list.h"
+#include "wx/hash.h"
+
+// this is normally done by configure, but I leave it here for now...
+#if defined(__UNIX__) && !(defined(HAVE_DLOPEN) || defined(HAVE_SHL_LOAD))
+#   if defined(__LINUX__) || defined(__SOLARIS__) || defined(__SUNOS__) || defined(__FREEBSD__)
+#      define HAVE_DLOPEN
+#   elif defined(__HPUX__)
+#      define HAVE_SHL_LOAD
+#   endif // Unix flavour
+#endif // !Unix or already have some HAVE_xxx defined
+
+// Note: WXPM/EMX has to be tested first, since we want to use
+// native version, even if configure detected presence of DLOPEN.
+#if defined(__WXPM__) || defined(__EMX__)
+#   define INCL_DOS
+#   include <os2.h>
+    typedef HMODULE wxDllType;
+#elif defined(HAVE_DLOPEN)
+#   include <dlfcn.h>
+    typedef void *wxDllType;
+#elif defined(HAVE_SHL_LOAD)
+#   include <dl.h>
+    typedef shl_t wxDllType;
+#elif defined(__WINDOWS__)
+#   include <windows.h>         // needed to get HMODULE
+    typedef HMODULE wxDllType;
+#elif defined(__DARWIN__)
+    typedef void *wxDllType;
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    typedef void *wxDllType;
+#else
+#   error "wxLibrary can't be compiled on this platform, sorry."
+#endif // OS
+
+// LoadLibrary is defined in windows.h as LoadLibraryA, but wxDllLoader method
+// should be called LoadLibrary, not LoadLibraryA or LoadLibraryW!
+#if defined(__WIN32__) && defined(LoadLibrary)
+#   include "wx/msw/winundef.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDllLoader: low level DLL functions, use wxDynamicLibrary in your code
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+    wxDllLoader is a class providing an interface similar to unix's dlopen().
+    It is used by wxDynamicLibrary wxLibrary and manages the actual loading of
+    DLLs and the resolving of symbols in them. There are no instances of this
+    class, it simply serves as a namespace for its static member functions.
+*/
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDllLoader
+{
+public:
+    /*
+      This function loads the shared library libname into memory.
+
+      libname may be either the full path to the file or just the filename in
+      which case the library is searched for in all standard locations
+      (use GetDllExt() to construct the filename)
+
+      if success pointer is not NULL, it will be filled with TRUE if everything
+      went ok and FALSE otherwise
+     */
+    static wxDllType LoadLibrary(const wxString& libname, bool *success = 0);
+
+    /*
+      This function unloads the shared library previously loaded with
+      LoadLibrary
+     */
+    static void UnloadLibrary(wxDllType dll);
+
+    /*
+       This function returns a valid handle for the main program
+       itself or NULL if back linking is not supported by the current platform
+       (e.g. Win32).
+     */
+    static wxDllType GetProgramHandle();
+
+    /*
+       This function resolves a symbol in a loaded DLL, such as a
+       variable or function name.
+
+       dllHandle Handle of the DLL, as returned by LoadDll().
+       name Name of the symbol.
+
+       Returns the pointer to the symbol or NULL on error.
+     */
+    static void *GetSymbol(wxDllType dllHandle,
+                           const wxString &name,
+                           bool *success = NULL);
+
+    // return the standard DLL extension (with leading dot) for this platform
+    static const wxString &GetDllExt() { return ms_dllext; }
+
+private:
+    // forbid construction of objects
+    wxDllLoader();
+    static const wxString   ms_dllext;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDynamicLibrary - friendly interface to wxDllLoader
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDynamicLibrary
+{
+public:
+    // ctors
+    wxDynamicLibrary() { m_library = 0; }
+    wxDynamicLibrary(const wxString& name) { Load(name); }
+
+    // return TRUE if the library was loaded successfully
+    bool IsLoaded() const { return m_library != 0; }
+    operator bool() const { return IsLoaded(); }
+
+    // load the library with the given name (full or not), return TRUE on
+    // success
+    bool Load(const wxString& name)
+    {
+        m_library = wxDllLoader::LoadLibrary(name);
+
+        return IsLoaded();
+    }
+
+    // unload the library, also done automatically in dtor
+    void Unload()
+    {
+        if ( IsLoaded() )
+            wxDllLoader::UnloadLibrary(m_library);
+    }
+
+    // load a symbol from the library, return NULL if an error occured or
+    // symbol wasn't found
+    void *GetSymbol(const wxString& name) const
+    {
+        wxCHECK_MSG( IsLoaded(), NULL,
+                     _T("can't load symbol from unloaded library") );
+
+        return wxDllLoader::GetSymbol(m_library, name);
+    }
+
+    // unload the library
+    //
+    // NB: dtor is not virtual, don't derive from this class
+    ~wxDynamicLibrary() { Unload(); }
+
+private:
+    // the handle to DLL or NULL
+    wxDllType m_library;
+
+    // no copy ctor/assignment operators (or we'd try to unload the library
+    // twice)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDynamicLibrary)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxLibrary
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxLibrary : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxLibrary(wxDllType handle);
+    virtual ~wxLibrary();
+
+    // Get a symbol from the dynamic library
+    void *GetSymbol(const wxString& symbname);
+
+    // Create the object whose classname is "name"
+    wxObject *CreateObject(const wxString& name);
+
+protected:
+    void PrepareClasses(wxClassInfo *first);
+
+    wxDllType m_handle;
+
+public:
+    wxHashTable classTable;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxLibraries
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxLibraries
+{
+public:
+    wxLibraries();
+    ~wxLibraries();
+
+    // caller is responsible for deleting the returned pointer if !NULL
+    wxLibrary *LoadLibrary(const wxString& basename);
+
+    wxObject *CreateObject(const wxString& name);
+
+protected:
+    wxList m_loaded;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Global variables
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+extern WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(wxLibraries) wxTheLibraries;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Interesting defines
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define WXDLL_ENTRY_FUNCTION() \
+extern "C" WXEXPORT const wxClassInfo *wxGetClassFirst(); \
+const wxClassInfo *wxGetClassFirst() { \
+  return wxClassInfo::GetFirst(); \
+}
+
+#endif // wxUSE_DYNLIB_CLASS
+
+#endif // _WX_DYNLIB_H__

include/wx/dynload.h

@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:         dynload.h
+// Purpose:      Dynamic loading framework
+// Author:       Ron Lee, David Falkinder, Vadim Zeitlin and a cast of 1000's
+//               (derived in part from dynlib.cpp (c) 1998 Guilhem Lavaux)
+// Modified by:
+// Created:      03/12/01
+// RCS-ID:       $Id$
+// Copyright:    (c) 2001 Ron Lee <ron@debian.org>
+// Licence:      wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_DYNAMICLOADER_H__
+#define _WX_DYNAMICLOADER_H__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "dynload.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_DYNAMIC_LOADER
+
+#include "wx/hashmap.h"
+#include "wx/module.h"
+
+// FIXME: can this go in private.h or something too??
+#if defined(__WXPM__) || defined(__EMX__)
+#define INCL_DOS
+#include <os2.h>
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __WXMSW__
+#include "wx/msw/private.h"
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPluginLibrary;
+
+WX_DECLARE_EXPORTED_STRING_HASH_MAP(wxPluginLibrary *, wxDLManifest);
+typedef wxDLManifest wxDLImports;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// conditional compilation
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // Note: WXPM/EMX has to be tested first, since we want to use
+    // native version, even if configure detected presence of DLOPEN.
+
+#if defined(__WXPM__) || defined(__EMX__) || defined(__WINDOWS__)
+typedef HMODULE             wxDllType;
+#elif defined(HAVE_DLOPEN)
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+typedef void               *wxDllType;
+#elif defined(HAVE_SHL_LOAD)
+#include <dl.h>
+typedef shl_t               wxDllType;
+#elif defined(__DARWIN__)
+typedef void               *wxDllType;
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+typedef CFragConnectionID   wxDllType;
+#else
+#error "Dynamic Loading classes can't be compiled on this platform, sorry."
+#endif
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDynamicLibrary
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//FIXME:  This class isn't really common at all, it should be moved
+//        into platform dependent files.
+
+// NOTE: this class is (deliberately) not virtual, do not attempt
+//       to use it polymorphically.
+
+enum wxDLFlags
+{
+    wxDL_LAZY       = 0x00000001,   // resolve undefined symbols at first use
+    wxDL_NOW        = 0x00000002,   // resolve undefined symbols on load
+    wxDL_GLOBAL     = 0x00000004,   // export extern symbols to subsequently
+                                    // loaded libs.
+    wxDL_VERBATIM   = 0x00000008,   // Attempt to load the supplied library
+                                    // name without appending the usual dll
+                                    // filename extension.
+
+    wxDL_NOSHARE    = 0x00000010,   // load new DLL, don't reuse already loaded
+
+    // FIXME: why? (VZ)
+#ifdef __osf__
+    wxDL_DEFAULT    = wxDL_LAZY
+#else
+    wxDL_DEFAULT    = wxDL_LAZY | wxDL_GLOBAL
+#endif
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDynamicLibrary
+{
+public:
+
+        // return a valid handle for the main program itself or NULL if
+        // back linking is not supported by the current platform (e.g. Win32)
+
+    static wxDllType         GetProgramHandle();
+
+        // return the platform standard DLL extension (with leading dot)
+
+    static const wxChar *GetDllExt() { return ms_dllext; }
+
+    wxDynamicLibrary() : m_handle(0) {}
+    wxDynamicLibrary(wxString libname, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT)
+        : m_handle(0)
+    {
+        Load(libname, flags);
+    }
+    ~wxDynamicLibrary() { Unload(); }
+
+        // return TRUE if the library was loaded successfully
+
+    bool IsLoaded() const { return m_handle != 0; }
+
+        // load the library with the given name
+        // (full or not), return TRUE on success
+
+    bool Load(wxString libname, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT);
+
+        // detach the library object from its handle, i.e. prevent the object
+        // from unloading the library in its dtor -- the caller is now
+        // responsible for doing this
+    wxDllType Detach() { wxDllType h = m_handle; m_handle = 0; return h; }
+
+        // unload the library, also done automatically in dtor
+
+    void Unload();
+
+        // Return the raw handle from dlopen and friends.
+
+    wxDllType GetLibHandle() const { return m_handle; }
+
+        // resolve a symbol in a loaded DLL, such as a variable or function
+        // name.  'name' is the (possibly mangled) name of the symbol.
+        // (use extern "C" to export unmangled names)
+        //
+        // Since it is perfectly valid for the returned symbol to actually be
+        // NULL, that is not always indication of an error.  Pass and test the
+        // parameter 'success' for a true indication of success or failure to
+        // load the symbol.
+        //
+        // Returns a pointer to the symbol on success, or NULL if an error
+        // occurred or the symbol wasn't found.
+
+    void *GetSymbol(const wxString& name, bool *success = 0) const;
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+    operator bool() const { return IsLoaded(); }
+#endif
+
+protected:
+
+        // Platform specific shared lib suffix.
+
+    static const wxChar *ms_dllext;
+
+        // the handle to DLL or NULL
+
+    wxDllType m_handle;
+
+        // no copy ctor/assignment operators
+        // or we'd try to unload the library twice
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxDynamicLibrary)
+};
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxPluginLibrary
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// NOTE: Do not attempt to use a base class pointer to this class.
+//       wxDL is not virtual and we deliberately hide some of it's
+//       methods here.
+//
+//       Unless you know exacty why you need to, you probably shouldn't
+//       instantiate this class directly anyway, use wxPluginManager
+//       instead.
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPluginLibrary : public wxDynamicLibrary
+{
+public:
+
+    static wxDLImports* ms_classes;  // Static hash of all imported classes.
+
+    wxPluginLibrary( const wxString &libname, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT );
+    ~wxPluginLibrary();
+
+    wxPluginLibrary  *RefLib();
+    bool              UnrefLib();
+
+        // These two are called by the PluginSentinel on (PLUGGABLE) object
+        // creation/destruction.  There is usually no reason for the user to
+        // call them directly.  We have to separate this from the link count,
+        // since the two are not interchangeable.
+
+        // FIXME: for even better debugging PluginSentinel should register
+        //        the name of the class created too, then we can state
+        //        exactly which object was not destroyed which may be
+        //        difficult to find otherwise.  Also this code should
+        //        probably only be active in DEBUG mode, but let's just
+        //        get it right first.
+
+    void  RefObj() { ++m_objcount; }
+    void  UnrefObj()
+    {
+        wxASSERT_MSG( m_objcount > 0, _T("Too many objects deleted??") );
+        --m_objcount;
+    }
+
+        // Override/hide some base class methods
+
+    bool  IsLoaded() const { return m_linkcount > 0; }
+    void  Unload() { UnrefLib(); }
+
+private:
+
+    wxClassInfo    *m_before;       // sm_first before loading this lib
+    wxClassInfo    *m_after;        // ..and after.
+
+    size_t          m_linkcount;    // Ref count of library link calls
+    size_t          m_objcount;     // ..and (pluggable) object instantiations.
+    wxModuleList    m_wxmodules;    // any wxModules that we initialised.
+
+    void    UpdateClassInfo();      // Update the wxClassInfo table
+    void    RestoreClassInfo();     // Restore the original wxClassInfo state.
+    void    RegisterModules();      // Init any wxModules in the lib.
+    void    UnregisterModules();    // Cleanup any wxModules we installed.
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxPluginLibrary)
+};
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPluginManager
+{
+public:
+
+        // Static accessors.
+
+    static wxPluginLibrary    *LoadLibrary( const wxString &libname,
+                                            int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT );
+    static bool                UnloadLibrary(const wxString &libname);
+
+        // This is used by wxDllLoader.  It's wrapped in the compatibility
+        // macro because it's of arguable use outside of that.
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+    static wxPluginLibrary *GetObjectFromHandle(wxDllType handle);
+#endif
+
+        // Instance methods.
+
+    wxPluginManager() : m_entry(NULL) {};
+    wxPluginManager(const wxString &libname, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT)
+    {
+        Load(libname, flags);
+    }
+    ~wxPluginManager() { Unload(); }
+
+    bool   Load(const wxString &libname, int flags = wxDL_DEFAULT);
+    void   Unload();
+
+    bool   IsLoaded() const { return m_entry && m_entry->IsLoaded(); }
+    void  *GetSymbol(const wxString &symbol, bool *success = 0)
+    {
+        return m_entry->GetSymbol( symbol, success );
+    }
+
+    static void CreateManifest() { ms_manifest = new wxDLManifest(wxKEY_STRING); }
+    static void ClearManifest() { delete ms_manifest; ms_manifest = NULL; }
+
+private:
+    // return the pointer to the entry for the library with given name in
+    // ms_manifest or NULL if none
+    static wxPluginLibrary *FindByName(const wxString& name)
+    {
+        const wxDLManifest::iterator i = ms_manifest->find(name);
+
+        return i == ms_manifest->end() ? NULL : i->second;
+    }
+
+    static wxDLManifest* ms_manifest;  // Static hash of loaded libs.
+    wxPluginLibrary*     m_entry;      // Cache our entry in the manifest.
+
+    // We could allow this class to be copied if we really
+    // wanted to, but not without modification.
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxPluginManager)
+};
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxDllLoader
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    //  Cross platform wrapper for dlopen and friends.
+    //  There are no instances of this class, it simply
+    //  serves as a namespace for its static member functions.
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxDllLoader
+{
+public:
+
+    static wxDllType    LoadLibrary(const wxString& name, bool *success = NULL);
+    static void         UnloadLibrary(wxDllType dll);
+
+    static wxDllType GetProgramHandle() { return wxDynamicLibrary::GetProgramHandle(); }
+
+    static void *GetSymbol(wxDllType dllHandle, const wxString &name, bool *success = 0);
+
+    static wxString GetDllExt() { return wxDynamicLibrary::GetDllExt(); }
+
+private:
+
+    wxDllLoader();                    // forbid construction of objects
+};
+#endif
+
+#endif  // wxUSE_DYNAMIC_LOADER
+#endif  // _WX_DYNAMICLOADER_H__
+

include/wx/effects.h

@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        effects.h
+// Purpose:     wxEffects class
+//              Draws 3D effects.
+// Author:      Julian Smart et al
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     25/4/2000
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart
+// Licence:   	wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "effects.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef _WX_EFFECTS_H_
+#define _WX_EFFECTS_H_
+
+/*
+ * wxEffects: various 3D effects
+ */
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxEffects: public wxObject
+{
+DECLARE_CLASS(wxEffects)
+
+public:
+    // Assume system colours
+    wxEffects() ;
+    // Going from lightest to darkest
+    wxEffects(const wxColour& highlightColour, const wxColour& lightShadow,
+              const wxColour& faceColour, const wxColour& mediumShadow,
+              const wxColour& darkShadow) ;
+
+    // Accessors
+    wxColour GetHighlightColour() const { return m_highlightColour; }
+    wxColour GetLightShadow() const { return m_lightShadow; }
+    wxColour GetFaceColour() const { return m_faceColour; }
+    wxColour GetMediumShadow() const { return m_mediumShadow; }
+    wxColour GetDarkShadow() const { return m_darkShadow; }
+
+    void SetHighlightColour(const wxColour& c) { m_highlightColour = c; }
+    void SetLightShadow(const wxColour& c) { m_lightShadow = c; }
+    void SetFaceColour(const wxColour& c) { m_faceColour = c; }
+    void SetMediumShadow(const wxColour& c) { m_mediumShadow = c; }
+    void SetDarkShadow(const wxColour& c) { m_darkShadow = c; }
+
+    void Set(const wxColour& highlightColour, const wxColour& lightShadow,
+             const wxColour& faceColour, const wxColour& mediumShadow,
+             const wxColour& darkShadow)
+    {
+        SetHighlightColour(highlightColour);
+        SetLightShadow(lightShadow);
+        SetFaceColour(faceColour);
+        SetMediumShadow(mediumShadow);
+        SetDarkShadow(darkShadow);
+    }
+
+    // Draw a sunken edge
+    void DrawSunkenEdge(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& rect, int borderSize = 1);
+
+    // Tile a bitmap
+    bool TileBitmap(const wxRect& rect, wxDC& dc, wxBitmap& bitmap);
+
+protected:
+    wxColour    m_highlightColour;  // Usually white
+    wxColour    m_lightShadow;      // Usually light grey
+    wxColour    m_faceColour;       // Usually grey
+    wxColour    m_mediumShadow;     // Usually dark grey
+    wxColour    m_darkShadow;       // Usually black
+};
+
+#endif
+

include/wx/encconv.h

@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/encconv.h
+// Purpose:     wxEncodingConverter class for converting between different
+//              font encodings
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
+// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_ENCCONV_H_
+#define _WX_ENCCONV_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "encconv.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+#include "wx/object.h"
+#include "wx/fontenc.h"
+#include "wx/dynarray.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum
+{
+    wxCONVERT_STRICT,
+    wxCONVERT_SUBSTITUTE
+};
+
+
+enum
+{
+    wxPLATFORM_CURRENT = -1,
+
+    wxPLATFORM_UNIX = 0,
+    wxPLATFORM_WINDOWS,
+    wxPLATFORM_OS2,
+    wxPLATFORM_MAC
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// types
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+WX_DEFINE_ARRAY_INT(wxFontEncoding, wxFontEncodingArray);
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxEncodingConverter
+//                  This class is capable of converting strings between any two
+//                  8bit encodings/charsets. It can also convert from/to Unicode
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxEncodingConverter : public wxObject
+{
+    public:
+
+            wxEncodingConverter();
+            ~wxEncodingConverter() { if (m_Table) delete[] m_Table; }
+
+            // Initialize conversion. Both output or input encoding may
+            // be wxFONTENCODING_UNICODE, but only if wxUSE_WCHAR_T is set to 1.
+            //
+            // All subsequent calls to Convert() will interpret it's argument
+            // as a string in input_enc encoding and will output string in
+            // output_enc encoding.
+            //
+            // You must call this method before calling Convert. You may call
+            // it more than once in order to switch to another conversion
+            //
+            // Method affects behaviour of Convert() in case input character
+            // cannot be converted because it does not exist in output encoding:
+            //     wxCONVERT_STRICT --
+            //              follow behaviour of GNU Recode - just copy unconvertable
+            //              characters to output and don't change them (it's integer
+            //              value will stay the same)
+            //     wxCONVERT_SUBSTITUTE --
+            //              try some (lossy) substitutions - e.g. replace
+            //              unconvertable latin capitals with acute by ordinary
+            //              capitals, replace en-dash or em-dash by '-' etc.
+            //     both modes gurantee that output string will have same length
+            //     as input string
+            //
+            // Returns FALSE if given conversion is impossible, TRUE otherwise
+            // (conversion may be impossible either if you try to convert
+            // to Unicode with non-Unicode build of wxWindows or if input
+            // or output encoding is not supported.)
+            bool Init(wxFontEncoding input_enc, wxFontEncoding output_enc, int method = wxCONVERT_STRICT);
+
+            // Convert input string according to settings passed to Init.
+            // Note that you must call Init before using Convert!
+            void Convert(const char* input, char* output);
+            void Convert(char* str) { Convert(str, str); }
+            wxString Convert(const wxString& input);
+
+#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T
+            void Convert(const char* input, wchar_t* output);
+            void Convert(const wchar_t* input, char* output);
+            void Convert(const wchar_t* input, wchar_t* output);
+            void Convert(wchar_t* str) { Convert(str, str); }
+#endif
+            // Return equivalent(s) for given font that are used
+            // under given platform. wxPLATFORM_CURRENT means the plaform
+            // this binary was compiled for
+            //
+            // Examples:
+            //     current platform          enc    returned value
+            // -----------------------------------------------------
+            //     unix                   CP1250         {ISO8859_2}
+            //     unix                ISO8859_2                  {}
+            //     windows             ISO8859_2            {CP1250}
+            //
+            // Equivalence is defined in terms of convertibility:
+            // 2 encodings are equivalent if you can convert text between
+            // then without loosing information (it may - and will - happen
+            // that you loose special chars like quotation marks or em-dashes
+            // but you shouldn't loose any diacritics and language-specific
+            // characters when converting between equivalent encodings).
+            //
+            // Convert() method is not limited to converting between
+            // equivalent encodings, it can convert between arbitrary
+            // two encodings!
+            //
+            // Remember that this function does _NOT_ check for presence of
+            // fonts in system. It only tells you what are most suitable
+            // encodings. (It usually returns only one encoding)
+            //
+            // Note that argument enc itself may be present in returned array!
+            // (so that you can -- as a side effect -- detect whether the
+            // encoding is native for this platform or not)
+            static wxFontEncodingArray GetPlatformEquivalents(wxFontEncoding enc, int platform = wxPLATFORM_CURRENT);
+
+            // Similar to GetPlatformEquivalent, but this one will return ALL
+            // equivalent encodings, regardless the platform, including itself.
+            static wxFontEncodingArray GetAllEquivalents(wxFontEncoding enc);
+
+    private:
+
+#if wxUSE_WCHAR_T
+            wchar_t *m_Table;
+#else
+            char *m_Table;
+#endif
+            bool m_UnicodeInput, m_UnicodeOutput;
+            bool m_JustCopy;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxEncodingConverter)
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+#endif  // _WX_ENCCONV_H_

include/wx/evtloop.h

@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/evtloop.h
+// Purpose:     declares wxEventLoop class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01.06.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2001 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_EVTLOOP_H_
+#define _WX_EVTLOOP_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "evtloop.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxEventLoop: a GUI event loop
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxEventLoop
+{
+public:
+    // ctor
+    wxEventLoop() { m_impl = NULL; }
+
+    // dtor
+    virtual ~wxEventLoop();
+
+    // start the event loop, return the exit code when it is finished
+    virtual int Run();
+
+    // exit from the loop with the given exit code
+    virtual void Exit(int rc = 0);
+
+    // return TRUE if any events are available
+    virtual bool Pending() const;
+
+    // dispatch a single event, return FALSE if we should exit from the loop
+    virtual bool Dispatch();
+
+    // is the event loop running now?
+    virtual bool IsRunning() const;
+    
+    // return currently active (running) event loop, may be NULL
+    static wxEventLoop *GetActive() { return ms_activeLoop; }
+
+    // set currently active (running) event loop
+    static void SetActive(wxEventLoop* loop) { ms_activeLoop = loop; }
+
+protected:
+    // the pointer to the port specific implementation class
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxEventLoopImpl *m_impl;
+    // the pointer to currently active loop
+    static wxEventLoop *ms_activeLoop;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxEventLoop)
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_EVTLOOP_H_

include/wx/fdrepdlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/fdrepdlg.h
+// Purpose:     wxFindReplaceDialog class
+// Author:      Markus Greither and Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     23/03/2001
+// RCS-ID:
+// Copyright:   (c) Markus Greither
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FINDREPLACEDLG_H_
+#define _WX_FINDREPLACEDLG_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "fdrepdlg.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_FINDREPLDLG
+
+#include "wx/dialog.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFindDialogEvent;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFindReplaceDialog;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFindReplaceData;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFindReplaceDialogImpl;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Flags for wxFindReplaceData.Flags
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// flages used by wxFindDialogEvent::GetFlags()
+enum wxFindReplaceFlags
+{
+    // downward search/replace selected (otherwise - upwards)
+    wxFR_DOWN       = 1,
+
+    // whole word search/replace selected
+    wxFR_WHOLEWORD  = 2,
+
+    // case sensitive search/replace selected (otherwise - case insensitive)
+    wxFR_MATCHCASE  = 4
+};
+
+// these flags can be specified in wxFindReplaceDialog ctor or Create()
+enum wxFindReplaceDialogStyles
+{
+    // replace dialog (otherwise find dialog)
+    wxFR_REPLACEDIALOG = 1,
+
+    // don't allow changing the search direction
+    wxFR_NOUPDOWN      = 2,
+
+    // don't allow case sensitive searching
+    wxFR_NOMATCHCASE   = 4,
+
+    // don't allow whole word searching
+    wxFR_NOWHOLEWORD   = 8
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFindReplaceData: holds Setup Data/Feedback Data for wxFindReplaceDialog
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFindReplaceData : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxFindReplaceData() { Init(); }
+    wxFindReplaceData(wxUint32 flags) { Init(); SetFlags(flags); }
+
+    // accessors
+    const wxString& GetFindString() { return m_FindWhat; }
+    const wxString& GetReplaceString() { return m_ReplaceWith; }
+
+    int GetFlags() const { return m_Flags; }
+
+    // setters: may only be called before showing the dialog, no effect later
+    void SetFlags(wxUint32 flags) { m_Flags = flags; }
+
+    void SetFindString(const wxString& str) { m_FindWhat = str; }
+    void SetReplaceString(const wxString& str) { m_ReplaceWith = str; }
+
+protected:
+    void Init();
+
+private:
+    wxUint32 m_Flags;
+    wxString m_FindWhat,
+             m_ReplaceWith;
+
+    friend class wxFindReplaceDialogBase;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFindReplaceDialogBase
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFindReplaceDialogBase : public wxDialog
+{
+public:
+    // ctors and such
+    wxFindReplaceDialogBase() { m_FindReplaceData = NULL; }
+    wxFindReplaceDialogBase(wxWindow * WXUNUSED(parent),
+                            wxFindReplaceData *data,
+                            const wxString& WXUNUSED(title),
+                            int WXUNUSED(style) = 0)
+    {
+        m_FindReplaceData = data;
+    }
+
+    virtual ~wxFindReplaceDialogBase();
+
+    // find dialog data access
+    const wxFindReplaceData *GetData() const { return m_FindReplaceData; }
+    void SetData(wxFindReplaceData *data) { m_FindReplaceData = data; }
+
+    // implementation only, don't use
+    void Send(wxFindDialogEvent& event);
+
+protected:
+    wxFindReplaceData *m_FindReplaceData;
+
+    // the last string we searched for
+    wxString m_lastSearch;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFindReplaceDialogBase)
+};
+
+// include wxFindReplaceDialog declaration
+#if defined(__WXMSW__) && !defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/msw/fdrepdlg.h"
+#else
+    #define wxGenericFindReplaceDialog wxFindReplaceDialog
+    #define sm_classwxGenericFindReplaceDialog sm_classwxFindReplaceDialog
+
+    #include "wx/generic/fdrepdlg.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFindReplaceDialog events
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFindDialogEvent : public wxCommandEvent
+{
+public:
+    wxFindDialogEvent(wxEventType commandType = wxEVT_NULL, int id = 0)
+        : wxCommandEvent(commandType, id) { }
+
+    int GetFlags() const { return GetInt(); }
+    wxString GetFindString() const { return GetString(); }
+    const wxString& GetReplaceString() const { return m_strReplace; }
+
+    wxFindReplaceDialog *GetDialog() const
+        { return wxStaticCast(GetEventObject(), wxFindReplaceDialog); }
+
+    // implementation only
+    void SetFlags(int flags) { SetInt(flags); }
+    void SetFindString(const wxString& str) { SetString(str); }
+    void SetReplaceString(const wxString& str) { m_strReplace = str; }
+
+private:
+    wxString m_strReplace;
+
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxFindDialogEvent)
+};
+
+BEGIN_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND, 510)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_NEXT, 511)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_REPLACE, 512)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_REPLACE_ALL, 513)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TYPE(wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_CLOSE, 514)
+END_DECLARE_EVENT_TYPES()
+
+typedef void (wxEvtHandler::*wxFindDialogEventFunction)(wxFindDialogEvent&);
+
+#define EVT_FIND(id, fn) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( \
+        wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND, id, -1, \
+        (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxFindDialogEventFunction) \
+        & fn, \
+        (wxObject *) NULL \
+    ),
+
+#define EVT_FIND_NEXT(id, fn) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( \
+        wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_NEXT, id, -1, \
+        (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxFindDialogEventFunction) \
+        & fn, \
+        (wxObject *) NULL \
+    ),
+
+#define EVT_FIND_REPLACE(id, fn) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( \
+        wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_REPLACE, id, -1, \
+        (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxFindDialogEventFunction) \
+        & fn, \
+        (wxObject *) NULL \
+    ),
+
+#define EVT_FIND_REPLACE_ALL(id, fn) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( \
+        wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_REPLACE_ALL, id, -1, \
+        (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxFindDialogEventFunction) \
+        & fn, \
+        (wxObject *) NULL \
+    ),
+
+#define EVT_FIND_CLOSE(id, fn) \
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE_ENTRY( \
+        wxEVT_COMMAND_FIND_CLOSE, id, -1, \
+        (wxObjectEventFunction)(wxEventFunction)(wxFindDialogEventFunction) \
+        & fn, \
+        (wxObject *) NULL \
+    ),
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FINDREPLDLG
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_FDREPDLG_H

include/wx/features.h

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/features.h
+// Purpose:     test macros for the features which might be available in some
+//              wxWindows ports but not others
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     18.03.02
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2002 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FEATURES_H_
+#define _WX_FEATURES_H_
+
+// radio menu items are currently only implemented in wxGTK and wxMSW
+#if defined(__WXGTK__) || defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #define wxHAS_RADIO_MENU_ITEMS
+#else
+    #undef wxHAS_RADIO_MENU_ITEMS
+#endif
+
+// the raw keyboard codes are generated under wxGTK and wxMSW only
+#if defined(__WXGTK__) || defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #define wxHAS_RAW_KEY_CODES
+#else
+    #undef wxHAS_RAW_KEY_CODES
+#endif
+
+// taskbar is only implemented in wxMSW and X11 ports
+#if defined(__WXMSW__) || \
+        defined(__WXGTK__) || defined(__WXMOTIF__) || defined(__WXX11__)
+    #define wxHAS_TASK_BAR_ICON
+#else
+    #undef wxHAS_TASK_BAR_ICON
+#endif
+
+#endif // _WX_FEATURES_H_
+

include/wx/ffile.h

@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/ffile.h
+// Purpose:     wxFFile - encapsulates "FILE *" stream
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     14.07.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef   _WX_FFILE_H_
+#define   _WX_FFILE_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "ffile.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"        // for wxUSE_FFILE
+
+#if wxUSE_FFILE
+
+#ifndef WX_PRECOMP
+  #include  "wx/string.h"
+  #include  "wx/filefn.h"
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// class wxFFile: standard C stream library IO
+//
+// NB: for space efficiency this class has no virtual functions, including
+//     dtor which is _not_ virtual, so it shouldn't be used as a base class.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFFile
+{
+public:
+  // ctors
+  // -----
+    // def ctor
+  wxFFile() { m_fp = NULL; }
+    // open specified file (may fail, use IsOpened())
+  wxFFile(const wxChar *filename, const wxChar *mode = _T("r"));
+    // attach to (already opened) file
+  wxFFile(FILE *fp) { m_fp = fp; }
+
+  // open/close
+    // open a file (existing or not - the mode controls what happens)
+  bool Open(const wxChar *filename, const wxChar *mode = _T("r"));
+    // closes the opened file (this is a NOP if not opened)
+  bool Close();
+
+  // assign an existing file descriptor and get it back from wxFFile object
+  void Attach(FILE *fp, const wxString& name = wxT(""))
+    { Close(); m_fp = fp; m_name = name; }
+  void Detach() { m_fp = NULL; }
+  FILE *fp() const { return m_fp; }
+
+  // read/write (unbuffered)
+    // read all data from the file into a string (useful for text files)
+  bool ReadAll(wxString *str);
+    // returns number of bytes read - use Eof() and Error() to see if an error
+    // occured or not
+  size_t Read(void *pBuf, size_t nCount);
+    // returns the number of bytes written
+  size_t Write(const void *pBuf, size_t nCount);
+    // returns true on success
+  bool Write(const wxString& s, wxMBConv& conv = wxConvUTF8)
+  {
+      const wxWX2MBbuf buf = s.mb_str(conv);
+      size_t size = strlen(buf);
+      return Write((const char *)buf, size) == size;
+  }
+    // flush data not yet written
+  bool Flush();
+
+  // file pointer operations (return ofsInvalid on failure)
+    // move ptr ofs bytes related to start/current pos/end of file
+  bool Seek(long ofs, wxSeekMode mode = wxFromStart);
+    // move ptr to ofs bytes before the end
+  bool SeekEnd(long ofs = 0) { return Seek(ofs, wxFromEnd); }
+    // get current position in the file
+  size_t Tell() const;
+    // get current file length
+  size_t Length() const;
+
+  // simple accessors
+    // is file opened?
+  bool IsOpened() const { return m_fp != NULL; }
+    // is end of file reached?
+  bool Eof() const { return feof(m_fp) != 0; }
+    // is an error occured?
+  bool Error() const { return ferror(m_fp) != 0; }
+    // get the file name
+  const wxString& GetName() const { return m_name; }
+
+  // dtor closes the file if opened
+  ~wxFFile() { Close(); }
+
+private:
+  // copy ctor and assignment operator are private because it doesn't make
+  // sense to copy files this way: attempt to do it will provoke a compile-time
+  // error.
+  wxFFile(const wxFFile&);
+  wxFFile& operator=(const wxFFile&);
+
+  FILE *m_fp;       // IO stream or NULL if not opened
+
+  wxString m_name;  // the name of the file (for diagnostic messages)
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FFILE
+
+#endif // _WX_FFILE_H_
+

include/wx/file.h

@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        file.h
+// Purpose:     wxFile - encapsulates low-level "file descriptor"
+//              wxTempFile - safely replace the old file
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29/01/98
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FILEH__
+#define _WX_FILEH__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "file.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef WX_PRECOMP
+  #include  "wx/string.h"
+  #include  "wx/filefn.h"
+  #include  "wx/strconv.h"
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_FILE
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// we redefine these constants here because S_IREAD &c are _not_ standard
+// however, we do assume that the values correspond to the Unix umask bits
+#define wxS_IRUSR 00400
+#define wxS_IWUSR 00200
+#define wxS_IXUSR 00100
+
+#define wxS_IRGRP 00040
+#define wxS_IWGRP 00020
+#define wxS_IXGRP 00010
+
+#define wxS_IROTH 00004
+#define wxS_IWOTH 00002
+#define wxS_IXOTH 00001
+
+// default mode for the new files: corresponds to umask 022
+#define wxS_DEFAULT   (wxS_IRUSR | wxS_IWUSR | wxS_IRGRP | wxS_IWGRP |\
+                       wxS_IROTH | wxS_IWOTH)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// class wxFile: raw file IO
+//
+// NB: for space efficiency this class has no virtual functions, including
+//     dtor which is _not_ virtual, so it shouldn't be used as a base class.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFile
+{
+public:
+  // more file constants
+  // -------------------
+    // opening mode
+  enum OpenMode { read, write, read_write, write_append, write_excl };
+    // standard values for file descriptor
+  enum { fd_invalid = -1, fd_stdin, fd_stdout, fd_stderr };
+
+  // static functions
+  // ----------------
+    // check whether a regular file by this name exists
+  static bool Exists(const wxChar *name);
+    // check whetther we can access the given file in given mode
+    // (only read and write make sense here)
+  static bool Access(const wxChar *name, OpenMode mode);
+
+  // ctors
+  // -----
+    // def ctor
+  wxFile() { m_fd = fd_invalid; }
+    // open specified file (may fail, use IsOpened())
+  wxFile(const wxChar *szFileName, OpenMode mode = read);
+    // attach to (already opened) file
+  wxFile(int fd) { m_fd = fd; }
+
+  // open/close
+    // create a new file (with the default value of bOverwrite, it will fail if
+    // the file already exists, otherwise it will overwrite it and succeed)
+  bool Create(const wxChar *szFileName, bool bOverwrite = FALSE,
+              int access = wxS_DEFAULT);
+  bool Open(const wxChar *szFileName, OpenMode mode = read,
+            int access = wxS_DEFAULT);
+  bool Close();  // Close is a NOP if not opened
+
+  // assign an existing file descriptor and get it back from wxFile object
+  void Attach(int fd) { Close(); m_fd = fd; }
+  void Detach()       { m_fd = fd_invalid;  }
+  int  fd() const { return m_fd; }
+
+  // read/write (unbuffered)
+    // returns number of bytes read or ofsInvalid on error
+  off_t Read(void *pBuf, off_t nCount);
+    // returns the number of bytes written
+  size_t Write(const void *pBuf, size_t nCount);
+    // returns true on success
+  bool Write(const wxString& s, wxMBConv& conv = wxConvUTF8)
+  {
+      const wxWX2MBbuf buf = s.mb_str(conv);
+      size_t size = strlen(buf);
+      return Write((const char *) buf, size) == size;
+  }
+    // flush data not yet written
+  bool Flush();
+
+  // file pointer operations (return ofsInvalid on failure)
+    // move ptr ofs bytes related to start/current off_t/end of file
+  off_t Seek(off_t ofs, wxSeekMode mode = wxFromStart);
+    // move ptr to ofs bytes before the end
+  off_t SeekEnd(off_t ofs = 0) { return Seek(ofs, wxFromEnd); }
+    // get current off_t
+  off_t Tell() const;
+    // get current file length
+  off_t Length() const;
+
+  // simple accessors
+    // is file opened?
+  bool IsOpened() const { return m_fd != fd_invalid; }
+    // is end of file reached?
+  bool Eof() const;
+    // has an error occured?
+  bool Error() const { return m_error; }
+
+  // dtor closes the file if opened
+  ~wxFile() { Close(); }
+
+private:
+  // copy ctor and assignment operator are private because
+  // it doesn't make sense to copy files this way:
+  // attempt to do it will provoke a compile-time error.
+  wxFile(const wxFile&);
+  wxFile& operator=(const wxFile&);
+
+  int m_fd; // file descriptor or INVALID_FD if not opened
+  bool m_error; // error memory
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// class wxTempFile: if you want to replace another file, create an instance
+// of wxTempFile passing the name of the file to be replaced to the ctor. Then
+// you can write to wxTempFile and call Commit() function to replace the old
+// file (and close this one) or call Discard() to cancel the modification. If
+// you call neither of them, dtor will call Discard().
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxTempFile
+{
+public:
+  // ctors
+    // default
+  wxTempFile() { }
+    // associates the temp file with the file to be replaced and opens it
+  wxTempFile(const wxString& strName);
+
+  // open the temp file (strName is the name of file to be replaced)
+  bool Open(const wxString& strName);
+
+  // is the file opened?
+  bool IsOpened() const { return m_file.IsOpened(); }
+
+  // I/O (both functions return true on success, false on failure)
+  bool Write(const void *p, size_t n) { return m_file.Write(p, n) != 0; }
+  bool Write(const wxString& str, wxMBConv& conv = wxConvUTF8)
+    { return m_file.Write(str, conv); }
+
+  // different ways to close the file
+    // validate changes and delete the old file of name m_strName
+  bool Commit();
+    // discard changes
+  void Discard();
+
+  // dtor calls Discard() if file is still opened
+ ~wxTempFile();
+
+private:
+  // no copy ctor/assignment operator
+  wxTempFile(const wxTempFile&);
+  wxTempFile& operator=(const wxTempFile&);
+
+  wxString  m_strName,  // name of the file to replace in Commit()
+            m_strTemp;  // temporary file name
+  wxFile    m_file;     // the temporary file
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FILE
+
+#endif // _WX_FILEH__

include/wx/fileconf.h

@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/fileconf.h
+// Purpose:     wxFileConfig derivation of wxConfigBase
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     07.04.98 (adapted from appconf.cpp)
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1997 Karsten Ball<6C>der   &  Vadim Zeitlin
+//                       Ballueder@usa.net     <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef   _FILECONF_H
+#define   _FILECONF_H
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "fileconf.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+#include "wx/textfile.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileConfig
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+  wxFileConfig derives from base Config and implements file based config class,
+  i.e. it uses ASCII disk files to store the information. These files are
+  alternatively called INI, .conf or .rc in the documentation. They are
+  organized in groups or sections, which can nest (i.e. a group contains
+  subgroups, which contain their own subgroups &c). Each group has some
+  number of entries, which are "key = value" pairs. More precisely, the format
+  is:
+
+  # comments are allowed after either ';' or '#' (Win/UNIX standard)
+
+  # blank lines (as above) are ignored
+
+  # global entries are members of special (no name) top group
+  written_for = Windows
+  platform    = Linux
+
+  # the start of the group 'Foo'
+  [Foo]                           # may put comments like this also
+  # following 3 lines are entries
+  key = value
+  another_key = "  strings with spaces in the beginning should be quoted, \
+                   otherwise the spaces are lost"
+  last_key = but you don't have to put " normally (nor quote them, like here)
+
+  # subgroup of the group 'Foo'
+  # (order is not important, only the name is: separator is '/', as in paths)
+  [Foo/Bar]
+  # entries prefixed with "!" are immutable, i.e. can't be changed if they are
+  # set in the system-wide config file
+  !special_key = value
+  bar_entry = whatever
+
+  [Foo/Bar/Fubar]   # depth is (theoretically :-) unlimited
+  # may have the same name as key in another section
+  bar_entry = whatever not
+
+  You have {read/write/delete}Entry functions (guess what they do) and also
+  setCurrentPath to select current group. enum{Subgroups/Entries} allow you
+  to get all entries in the config file (in the current group). Finally,
+  flush() writes immediately all changed entries to disk (otherwise it would
+  be done automatically in dtor)
+
+  wxFileConfig manages not less than 2 config files for each program: global
+  and local (or system and user if you prefer). Entries are read from both of
+  them and the local entries override the global ones unless the latter is
+  immutable (prefixed with '!') in which case a warning message is generated
+  and local value is ignored. Of course, the changes are always written to local
+  file only.
+
+  The names of these files can be specified in a number of ways. First of all,
+  you can use the standard convention: using the ctor which takes 'strAppName'
+  parameter will probably be sufficient for 90% of cases. If, for whatever
+  reason you wish to use the files with some other names, you can always use the
+  second ctor.
+
+  wxFileConfig also may automatically expand the values of environment variables
+  in the entries it reads: for example, if you have an entry
+    score_file = $HOME/.score
+  a call to Read(&str, "score_file") will return a complete path to .score file
+  unless the expansion was previousle disabled with SetExpandEnvVars(FALSE) call
+  (it's on by default, the current status can be retrieved with
+   IsExpandingEnvVars function).
+*/
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileConfigGroup;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileConfigEntry;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileConfigLineList;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxInputStream;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileConfig : public wxConfigBase
+{
+public:
+  // construct the "standard" full name for global (system-wide) and
+  // local (user-specific) config files from the base file name.
+  //
+  // the following are the filenames returned by this functions:
+  //            global                local
+  // Unix   /etc/file.ext           ~/.file
+  // Win    %windir%\file.ext   %USERPROFILE%\file.ext
+  //
+  // where file is the basename of szFile, ext is it's extension
+  // or .conf (Unix) or .ini (Win) if it has none
+  static wxString GetGlobalFileName(const wxChar *szFile);
+  static wxString GetLocalFileName(const wxChar *szFile);
+
+  // ctor & dtor
+    // New constructor: one size fits all. Specify wxCONFIG_USE_LOCAL_FILE or
+    // wxCONFIG_USE_GLOBAL_FILE to say which files should be used.
+  wxFileConfig(const wxString& appName = wxT(""),
+               const wxString& vendorName = wxT(""),
+               const wxString& localFilename = wxT(""),
+               const wxString& globalFilename = wxT(""),
+               long style = wxCONFIG_USE_LOCAL_FILE,
+               wxMBConv& conv = wxConvUTF8);
+
+#if wxUSE_STREAMS
+    // ctor that takes an input stream.
+  wxFileConfig(wxInputStream &inStream,
+               wxMBConv& conv = wxConvUTF8);
+#endif // wxUSE_STREAMS
+
+    // dtor will save unsaved data
+  virtual ~wxFileConfig();
+
+  // under Unix, set the umask to be used for the file creation, do nothing
+  // under other systems
+#ifdef __UNIX__
+  void SetUmask(int mode) { m_umask = mode; }
+#else // !__UNIX__
+  void SetUmask(int WXUNUSED(mode)) { }
+#endif // __UNIX__/!__UNIX__
+
+  // implement inherited pure virtual functions
+  virtual void SetPath(const wxString& strPath);
+  virtual const wxString& GetPath() const { return m_strPath; }
+
+  virtual bool GetFirstGroup(wxString& str, long& lIndex) const;
+  virtual bool GetNextGroup (wxString& str, long& lIndex) const;
+  virtual bool GetFirstEntry(wxString& str, long& lIndex) const;
+  virtual bool GetNextEntry (wxString& str, long& lIndex) const;
+
+  virtual size_t GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = FALSE) const;
+  virtual size_t GetNumberOfGroups(bool bRecursive = FALSE) const;
+
+  virtual bool HasGroup(const wxString& strName) const;
+  virtual bool HasEntry(const wxString& strName) const;
+
+  virtual bool Flush(bool bCurrentOnly = FALSE);
+
+  virtual bool RenameEntry(const wxString& oldName, const wxString& newName);
+  virtual bool RenameGroup(const wxString& oldName, const wxString& newName);
+
+  virtual bool DeleteEntry(const wxString& key, bool bGroupIfEmptyAlso = TRUE);
+  virtual bool DeleteGroup(const wxString& szKey);
+  virtual bool DeleteAll();
+
+public:
+  // functions to work with this list
+  wxFileConfigLineList *LineListAppend(const wxString& str);
+  wxFileConfigLineList *LineListInsert(const wxString& str,
+                           wxFileConfigLineList *pLine);    // NULL => Prepend()
+  void      LineListRemove(wxFileConfigLineList *pLine);
+  bool      LineListIsEmpty();
+
+protected:
+  virtual bool DoReadString(const wxString& key, wxString *pStr) const;
+  virtual bool DoReadLong(const wxString& key, long *pl) const;
+
+  virtual bool DoWriteString(const wxString& key, const wxString& szValue);
+  virtual bool DoWriteLong(const wxString& key, long lValue);
+
+private:
+  // GetXXXFileName helpers: return ('/' terminated) directory names
+  static wxString GetGlobalDir();
+  static wxString GetLocalDir();
+
+  // common part of all ctors (assumes that m_str{Local|Global}File are already
+  // initialized
+  void Init();
+
+  // common part of from dtor and DeleteAll
+  void CleanUp();
+
+  // parse the whole file
+  void Parse(wxTextBuffer& buffer, bool bLocal);
+
+  // the same as SetPath("/")
+  void SetRootPath();
+
+  // member variables
+  // ----------------
+  wxFileConfigLineList *m_linesHead,        // head of the linked list
+                       *m_linesTail;        // tail
+
+  wxString    m_strLocalFile,     // local  file name passed to ctor
+              m_strGlobalFile;    // global
+  wxString    m_strPath;          // current path (not '/' terminated)
+
+  wxFileConfigGroup *m_pRootGroup,      // the top (unnamed) group
+                    *m_pCurrentGroup;   // the current group
+
+  wxMBConv   &m_conv;
+        
+#ifdef __UNIX__
+  int m_umask;                    // the umask to use for file creation
+#endif // __UNIX__
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFileConfig)
+};
+
+#endif
+  // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+#endif  
+  //_FILECONF_H
+

include/wx/filedlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        filedlg.h
+// Purpose:     wxFileDialog base header
+// Author:      Robert Roebling
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     8/17/99
+// Copyright:   (c) Robert Roebling
+// RCS-ID:
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FILEDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_FILEDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#if wxUSE_FILEDLG
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "filedlg.h"
+#endif
+
+//----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileDialog data and generic functions
+//----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum
+{
+    wxOPEN              = 0x0001,
+    wxSAVE              = 0x0002,
+    wxOVERWRITE_PROMPT  = 0x0004,
+    wxHIDE_READONLY     = 0x0008,
+    wxFILE_MUST_EXIST   = 0x0010,
+    wxMULTIPLE          = 0x0020,
+    wxCHANGE_DIR        = 0x0040
+};
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxFileSelectorPromptStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxFileSelectorDefaultWildcardStr;
+
+// Parses the filterStr, returning the number of filters.
+// Returns 0 if none or if there's a problem, they arrays will contain an equal
+// number of items found before the error.
+// filterStr is in the form:
+// "All files (*.*)|*.*|Image Files (*.jpeg *.png)|*.jpg;*.png"
+extern int wxParseFileFilter(const wxString& filterStr,
+                             wxArrayString& descriptions,
+                             wxArrayString& filters);
+
+//----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileDialog convenience functions
+//----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// File selector - backward compatibility
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString
+wxFileSelector(const wxChar *message = wxFileSelectorPromptStr,
+               const wxChar *default_path = NULL,
+               const wxChar *default_filename = NULL,
+               const wxChar *default_extension = NULL,
+               const wxChar *wildcard = wxFileSelectorDefaultWildcardStr,
+               int flags = 0,
+               wxWindow *parent = NULL,
+               int x = -1, int y = -1);
+
+// An extended version of wxFileSelector
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString
+wxFileSelectorEx(const wxChar *message = wxFileSelectorPromptStr,
+                 const wxChar *default_path = NULL,
+                 const wxChar *default_filename = NULL,
+                 int *indexDefaultExtension = NULL,
+                 const wxChar *wildcard = wxFileSelectorDefaultWildcardStr,
+                 int flags = 0,
+                 wxWindow *parent = NULL,
+                 int x = -1, int y = -1);
+
+// Ask for filename to load
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString
+wxLoadFileSelector(const wxChar *what,
+                   const wxChar *extension,
+                   const wxChar *default_name = (const wxChar *)NULL,
+                   wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL);
+
+// Ask for filename to save
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString
+wxSaveFileSelector(const wxChar *what,
+                   const wxChar *extension,
+                   const wxChar *default_name = (const wxChar *) NULL,
+                   wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL);
+
+
+#if defined (__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+#include "wx/generic/filedlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/filedlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/filedlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/generic/filedlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/generic/filedlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/generic/filedlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/filedlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/generic/filedlgg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/filedlg.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FILEDLG
+
+#endif // _WX_FILEDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/filefn.h

@@ -0,0 +1,386 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        filefn.h
+// Purpose:     File- and directory-related functions
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29/01/98
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1998 Julian Smart
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef   _FILEFN_H_
+#define   _FILEFN_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "filefn.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/list.h"
+
+#ifndef __WXWINCE__
+#include <time.h>
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __WXWINCE__
+    typedef long off_t;
+#else
+
+// define off_t
+#if !defined(__WXMAC__) || defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__MACH__)
+    #include  <sys/types.h>
+#else
+    typedef long off_t;
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__VISUALC__) || ( defined(__MWERKS__) && defined( __INTEL__) )
+    typedef _off_t off_t;
+#elif defined(__BORLANDC__) && defined(__WIN16__)
+    typedef long off_t;
+#elif defined(__SYMANTEC__)
+    typedef long off_t;
+#elif defined(__MWERKS__) && !defined(__INTEL__) && !defined(__MACH__)
+    typedef long off_t;
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__VISAGECPP__) && __IBMCPP__ >= 400
+//
+// VisualAge C++ V4.0 cannot have any external linkage const decs
+// in headers included by more than one primary source
+//
+extern const off_t wxInvalidOffset;
+#else
+const off_t wxInvalidOffset = (off_t)-1;
+#endif
+
+enum wxSeekMode
+{
+  wxFromStart,
+  wxFromCurrent,
+  wxFromEnd
+};
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxEmptyString;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// declare our versions of low level file functions: some compilers prepend
+// underscores to the usual names, some also have Unicode versions of them
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Microsoft compiler loves underscores, feed them to it
+#if defined( __VISUALC__ ) \
+    || ( defined(__MINGW32__) && !defined(__WINE__) && wxCHECK_W32API_VERSION( 0, 5 ) ) \
+    || ( defined(__MWERKS__) && defined(__WXMSW__) )
+    // functions
+#ifdef __BORLANDC__
+    #define   _tell        tell
+#endif
+    #define   wxClose      _close
+    #define   wxRead       _read
+    #define   wxWrite      _write
+    #define   wxLseek      _lseek
+    #define   wxFsync      _commit
+    #define   wxEof        _eof
+
+    #define   wxTell       _tell
+
+    #if wxUSE_UNICODE
+        #if wxUSE_UNICODE_MSLU
+            #define   wxOpen       wxMSLU__wopen
+ 
+            #define   wxAccess     wxMSLU__waccess
+            #define   wxMkDir      wxMSLU__wmkdir
+            #define   wxRmDir      wxMSLU__wrmdir
+            #define   wxStat       wxMSLU__wstat
+        #else
+            #define   wxOpen       _wopen
+            #define   wxAccess     _waccess
+            #define   wxMkDir      _wmkdir
+            #define   wxRmDir      _wrmdir
+            #define   wxStat       _wstat
+        #endif
+    #else // !wxUSE_UNICODE
+#ifdef __BORLANDC__
+        #define   wxOpen       open
+#else
+        #define   wxOpen       _open
+#endif
+        #define   wxAccess     _access
+        #define   wxMkDir      _mkdir
+        #define   wxRmDir      _rmdir
+        #define   wxStat       _stat
+    #endif
+
+    // types
+    #define   wxStructStat struct _stat
+
+    // constants (unless already defined by the user code)
+    #if !defined(O_RDONLY) && !defined(__BORLANDC__)
+        #define   O_RDONLY    _O_RDONLY
+        #define   O_WRONLY    _O_WRONLY
+        #define   O_RDWR      _O_RDWR
+        #define   O_EXCL      _O_EXCL
+        #define   O_CREAT     _O_CREAT
+        #define   O_BINARY    _O_BINARY
+    #endif
+
+    #ifndef __BORLANDC__
+        #define   S_IFMT      _S_IFMT
+        #define   S_IFDIR     _S_IFDIR
+        #define   S_IFREG     _S_IFREG
+    #endif // O_RDONLY
+#else
+    // functions
+    #define   wxClose      close
+    #define   wxRead       read
+    #define   wxWrite      write
+    #define   wxLseek      lseek
+    #define   wxFsync      commit
+    #define   wxEof        eof
+
+    #define   wxMkDir      mkdir
+    #define   wxRmDir      rmdir
+
+    #define   wxTell(fd)   lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_CUR)
+
+    #define   wxStructStat struct stat
+    
+#if wxUSE_UNICODE
+#   define wxNEED_WX_UNISTD_H
+#if defined(__MWERKS__) && defined(macintosh)
+	#include <sys/stat.h>
+#endif
+WXDLLEXPORT int wxStat( const wxChar *file_name, wxStructStat *buf );
+WXDLLEXPORT int wxAccess( const wxChar *pathname, int mode );
+WXDLLEXPORT int wxOpen( const wxChar *pathname, int flags, mode_t mode );
+#else
+    #define   wxOpen       open
+    #define   wxStat       stat
+    #define   wxAccess     access
+#endif
+
+#endif  // VC++
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// functions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxFileExists(const wxString& filename);
+
+// does the path exist? (may have or not '/' or '\\' at the end)
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxPathExists(const wxChar *pszPathName);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxIsAbsolutePath(const wxString& filename);
+
+// Get filename
+WXDLLEXPORT wxChar* wxFileNameFromPath(wxChar *path);
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxFileNameFromPath(const wxString& path);
+
+// Get directory
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxPathOnly(const wxString& path);
+
+// wxString version
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxRealPath(const wxString& path);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT void wxDos2UnixFilename(wxChar *s);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT void wxUnix2DosFilename(wxChar *s);
+
+// Strip the extension, in situ
+WXDLLEXPORT void wxStripExtension(wxChar *buffer);
+WXDLLEXPORT void wxStripExtension(wxString& buffer);
+
+// Get a temporary filename
+WXDLLEXPORT wxChar* wxGetTempFileName(const wxString& prefix, wxChar *buf = (wxChar *) NULL);
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxGetTempFileName(const wxString& prefix, wxString& buf);
+
+// Expand file name (~/ and ${OPENWINHOME}/ stuff)
+WXDLLEXPORT wxChar* wxExpandPath(wxChar *dest, const wxChar *path);
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxExpandPath(wxString& dest, const wxChar *path);
+
+// Contract w.r.t environment (</usr/openwin/lib, OPENWHOME> -> ${OPENWINHOME}/lib)
+// and make (if under the home tree) relative to home
+// [caller must copy-- volatile]
+WXDLLEXPORT wxChar* wxContractPath(const wxString& filename,
+                                   const wxString& envname = wxEmptyString,
+                                   const wxString& user = wxEmptyString);
+
+// Destructive removal of /./ and /../ stuff
+WXDLLEXPORT wxChar* wxRealPath(wxChar *path);
+
+// Allocate a copy of the full absolute path
+WXDLLEXPORT wxChar* wxCopyAbsolutePath(const wxString& path);
+
+// Get first file name matching given wild card.
+// Flags are reserved for future use.
+#define wxFILE  1
+#define wxDIR   2
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxFindFirstFile(const wxChar *spec, int flags = wxFILE);
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxFindNextFile();
+
+// Does the pattern contain wildcards?
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxIsWild(const wxString& pattern);
+
+// Does the pattern match the text (usually a filename)?
+// If dot_special is TRUE, doesn't match * against . (eliminating
+// `hidden' dot files)
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxMatchWild(const wxString& pattern,  const wxString& text, bool dot_special = TRUE);
+
+// Concatenate two files to form third
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxConcatFiles(const wxString& file1, const wxString& file2, const wxString& file3);
+
+// Copy file1 to file2
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxCopyFile(const wxString& file1, const wxString& file2,
+                            bool overwrite = TRUE);
+
+// Remove file
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxRemoveFile(const wxString& file);
+
+// Rename file
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxRenameFile(const wxString& file1, const wxString& file2);
+
+// Get current working directory.
+// If buf is NULL, allocates space using new, else
+// copies into buf.
+// IMPORTANT NOTE getcwd is know not to work under some releases
+// of Win32s 1.3, according to MS release notes!
+WXDLLEXPORT wxChar* wxGetWorkingDirectory(wxChar *buf = (wxChar *) NULL, int sz = 1000);
+// new and preferred version of wxGetWorkingDirectory
+// NB: can't have the same name because of overloading ambiguity
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxGetCwd();
+
+// Set working directory
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxSetWorkingDirectory(const wxString& d);
+
+// Make directory
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxMkdir(const wxString& dir, int perm = 0777);
+
+// Remove directory. Flags reserved for future use.
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxRmdir(const wxString& dir, int flags = 0);
+
+// compatibility defines, don't use in new code
+#define wxDirExists wxPathExists
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+    #define FileExists wxFileExists
+    #define DirExists wxDirExists
+    #define IsAbsolutePath wxIsAbsolutePath
+    #define FileNameFromPath wxFileNameFromPath
+    #define PathOnly wxPathOnly
+    #define Dos2UnixFilename wxDos2UnixFilename
+    #define Unix2DosFilename wxUnix2DosFilename
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// separators in file names
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// between file name and extension
+#define wxFILE_SEP_EXT        wxT('.')
+
+// between drive/volume name and the path
+#define wxFILE_SEP_DSK        wxT(':')
+
+// between the path components
+#define wxFILE_SEP_PATH_DOS   wxT('\\')
+#define wxFILE_SEP_PATH_UNIX  wxT('/')
+#define wxFILE_SEP_PATH_MAC   wxT(':')
+#define wxFILE_SEP_PATH_VMS   wxT('.') // VMS also uses '[' and ']'
+
+// separator in the path list (as in PATH environment variable)
+// there is no PATH variable in Classic Mac OS so just use the
+// semicolon (it must be different from the file name separator)
+// NB: these are strings and not characters on purpose!
+#define wxPATH_SEP_DOS        wxT(";")
+#define wxPATH_SEP_UNIX       wxT(":")
+#define wxPATH_SEP_MAC        wxT(";")
+
+// platform independent versions
+#if defined(__UNIX__) && !defined(__CYGWIN__)
+  #define wxFILE_SEP_PATH     wxFILE_SEP_PATH_UNIX
+  #define wxPATH_SEP          wxPATH_SEP_UNIX
+#elif defined(__MAC__)
+  #define wxFILE_SEP_PATH     wxFILE_SEP_PATH_MAC
+  #define wxPATH_SEP          wxPATH_SEP_MAC
+#elif defined(__CYGWIN__) // Cygwin
+  #define wxFILE_SEP_PATH     wxFILE_SEP_PATH_DOS
+  #define wxPATH_SEP          wxPATH_SEP_UNIX
+#else   // Windows and OS/2
+  #define wxFILE_SEP_PATH     wxFILE_SEP_PATH_DOS
+  #define wxPATH_SEP          wxPATH_SEP_DOS
+#endif  // Unix/Windows
+
+// this is useful for wxString::IsSameAs(): to compare two file names use
+// filename1.IsSameAs(filename2, wxARE_FILENAMES_CASE_SENSITIVE)
+#if defined(__UNIX__) && !defined(__DARWIN__)
+  #define wxARE_FILENAMES_CASE_SENSITIVE  TRUE
+#else   // Windows, Mac OS and OS/2
+  #define wxARE_FILENAMES_CASE_SENSITIVE  FALSE
+#endif  // Unix/Windows
+
+// is the char a path separator?
+inline bool wxIsPathSeparator(wxChar c)
+{
+    // under DOS/Windows we should understand both Unix and DOS file separators
+#if defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__MAC__)
+    return c == wxFILE_SEP_PATH;
+#else
+    return c == wxFILE_SEP_PATH_DOS || c == wxFILE_SEP_PATH_UNIX;
+#endif
+}
+
+// does the string ends with path separator?
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxEndsWithPathSeparator(const wxChar *pszFileName);
+
+// split the full path into path (including drive for DOS), name and extension
+// (understands both '/' and '\\')
+WXDLLEXPORT void wxSplitPath(const wxChar *pszFileName,
+                             wxString *pstrPath,
+                             wxString *pstrName,
+                             wxString *pstrExt);
+
+// find a file in a list of directories, returns false if not found
+WXDLLEXPORT bool wxFindFileInPath(wxString *pStr, const wxChar *pszPath, const wxChar *pszFile);
+
+// Get the OS directory if appropriate (such as the Windows directory).
+// On non-Windows platform, probably just return the empty string.
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxGetOSDirectory();
+
+// Get file modification time
+WXDLLEXPORT time_t wxFileModificationTime(const wxString& filename);
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// classes
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Path searching
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPathList : public wxStringList
+{
+public:
+    // Adds all paths in environment variable
+    void AddEnvList(const wxString& envVariable);
+
+    void Add(const wxString& path);
+    // Avoid compiler warning
+    wxNode *Add(const wxChar *s) { return wxStringList::Add(s); }
+    // Find the first full path for which the file exists
+    wxString FindValidPath(const wxString& filename);
+    // Find the first full path for which the file exists; ensure it's an
+    // absolute path that gets returned.
+    wxString FindAbsoluteValidPath(const wxString& filename);
+    // Given full path and filename, add path to list
+    void EnsureFileAccessible(const wxString& path);
+    // Returns TRUE if the path is in the list
+    bool Member(const wxString& path);
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxPathList)
+};
+
+#endif
+  // _WX_FILEFN_H_

include/wx/filename.h

@@ -0,0 +1,427 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/filename.h
+// Purpose:     wxFileName - encapsulates a file path
+// Author:      Robert Roebling, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     28.12.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Robert Roebling
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef   _WX_FILENAME_H_
+#define   _WX_FILENAME_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "filename.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef WX_PRECOMP
+    #include  "wx/string.h"
+#endif
+
+/*
+    TODO:
+
+    1. support for drives under Windows
+    2. more file operations:
+        a) chmod()
+        b) [acm]time() - get and set
+        c) file size
+        d) file permissions with readable accessors for most common bits
+           such as IsReadable() &c
+        e) rename()?
+    3. SameFileAs() function to compare inodes under Unix
+ */
+
+// ridiculously enough, this will replace DirExists with wxDirExists etc
+#include "wx/filefn.h"
+#include "wx/datetime.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFile;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// the various values for the path format: this mainly affects the path
+// separator but also whether or not the path has the drive part (as under
+// Windows)
+enum wxPathFormat
+{
+    wxPATH_NATIVE = 0,      // the path format for the current platform
+    wxPATH_UNIX,
+    wxPATH_MAC,
+    wxPATH_DOS,
+    wxPATH_VMS,
+
+    wxPATH_BEOS = wxPATH_UNIX,
+    wxPATH_WIN = wxPATH_DOS,
+    wxPATH_OS2 = wxPATH_DOS
+};
+
+// the kind of normalization to do with the file name: these values can be
+// or'd together to perform several operations at once
+enum wxPathNormalize
+{
+    wxPATH_NORM_ENV_VARS = 0x0001,  // replace env vars with their values
+    wxPATH_NORM_DOTS     = 0x0002,  // squeeze all .. and . and prepend cwd
+    wxPATH_NORM_TILDE    = 0x0004,  // Unix only: replace ~ and ~user
+    wxPATH_NORM_CASE     = 0x0008,  // if case insensitive => tolower
+    wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE = 0x0010,  // make the path absolute
+    wxPATH_NORM_LONG =     0x0020,  // make the path the long form
+    wxPATH_NORM_ALL      = 0x003f
+};
+
+// what exactly should GetPath() return?
+enum
+{
+    wxPATH_GET_VOLUME    = 0x0001,  // include the volume if applicable
+    wxPATH_GET_SEPARATOR = 0x0002   // terminate the path with the separator
+};
+
+// MkDir flags
+enum
+{
+    wxPATH_MKDIR_FULL    = 0x0001   // create directories recursively
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileName: encapsulates a file path
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileName
+{
+public:
+    // constructors and assignment
+
+        // the usual stuff
+    wxFileName() { Clear(); }
+    wxFileName( const wxFileName &filepath ) { Assign(filepath); }
+
+        // from a full filename: if it terminates with a '/', a directory path
+        // is contructed (the name will be empty), otherwise a file name and
+        // extension are extracted from it
+    wxFileName( const wxString& fullpath, wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE )
+        { Assign( fullpath, format ); }
+
+        // from a directory name and a file name
+    wxFileName(const wxString& path,
+               const wxString& name,
+               wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE)
+        { Assign(path, name, format); }
+
+        // from a volume, directory name, file base name and extension
+    wxFileName(const wxString& volume,
+               const wxString& path,
+               const wxString& name,
+               const wxString& ext,
+               wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE)
+        { Assign(volume, path, name, ext, format); }
+
+        // from a directory name, file base name and extension
+    wxFileName(const wxString& path,
+               const wxString& name,
+               const wxString& ext,
+               wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE)
+        { Assign(path, name, ext, format); }
+
+        // the same for delayed initialization
+
+    void Assign(const wxFileName& filepath);
+
+    void Assign(const wxString& fullpath,
+                wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+    void Assign(const wxString& volume,
+                const wxString& path,
+                const wxString& name,
+                const wxString& ext,
+                wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+    void Assign(const wxString& path,
+                const wxString& name,
+                wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+    void Assign(const wxString& path,
+                const wxString& name,
+                const wxString& ext,
+                wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE)
+    {
+        // empty volume
+        Assign(_T(""), path, name, ext, format);
+    }
+
+    void AssignDir(const wxString& dir, wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+        // assorted assignment operators
+
+    wxFileName& operator=(const wxFileName& filename)
+        { Assign(filename); return *this; }
+
+    wxFileName& operator=(const wxString& filename)
+        { Assign(filename); return *this; }
+
+        // reset all components to default, uninitialized state
+    void Clear();
+
+        // static pseudo constructors
+    static wxFileName FileName(const wxString& file);
+    static wxFileName DirName(const wxString& dir);
+
+    // file tests
+
+        // is the filename valid at all?
+    bool IsOk() const { return !m_dirs.IsEmpty() || !m_name.IsEmpty(); }
+
+        // does the file with this name exists?
+    bool FileExists() const;
+    static bool FileExists( const wxString &file );
+
+        // does the directory with this name exists?
+    bool DirExists() const;
+    static bool DirExists( const wxString &dir );
+
+        // VZ: also need: IsDirWritable(), IsFileExecutable() &c (TODO)
+
+    // time functions
+#if wxUSE_DATETIME
+        // set the file last access/mod and creation times
+        // (any of the pointers may be NULL)
+    bool SetTimes(const wxDateTime *dtAccess,
+                  const wxDateTime *dtMod,
+                  const wxDateTime *dtCreate);
+
+        // set the access and modification times to the current moment
+    bool Touch();
+
+        // return the last access, last modification and create times
+        // (any of the pointers may be NULL)
+    bool GetTimes(wxDateTime *dtAccess,
+                  wxDateTime *dtMod,
+                  wxDateTime *dtCreate) const;
+
+        // convenience wrapper: get just the last mod time of the file
+    wxDateTime GetModificationTime() const
+    {
+        wxDateTime dtMod;
+        (void)GetTimes(NULL, &dtMod, NULL);
+        return dtMod;
+    }
+#endif // wxUSE_DATETIME
+
+#ifdef __WXMAC__
+    bool MacSetTypeAndCreator( wxUint32 type , wxUint32 creator ) ;
+    bool MacGetTypeAndCreator( wxUint32 *type , wxUint32 *creator ) ;
+    // gets the 'common' type and creator for a certain extension
+    static bool MacFindDefaultTypeAndCreator( const wxString& ext , wxUint32 *type , wxUint32 *creator ) ;
+    // registers application defined extensions and their default type and creator
+    static void MacRegisterDefaultTypeAndCreator( const wxString& ext , wxUint32 type , wxUint32 creator ) ;
+    // looks up the appropriate type and creator from the registration and then sets
+    bool MacSetDefaultTypeAndCreator() ;
+#endif
+
+    // various file/dir operations
+
+        // retrieve the value of the current working directory
+    void AssignCwd(const wxString& volume = wxEmptyString);
+    static wxString GetCwd(const wxString& volume = wxEmptyString);
+
+        // change the current working directory
+    bool SetCwd();
+    static bool SetCwd( const wxString &cwd );
+
+        // get the value of user home (Unix only mainly)
+    void AssignHomeDir();
+    static wxString GetHomeDir();
+
+        // get a temp file name starting with the specified prefix and open the
+        // file passed to us using this name for writing (atomically if
+        // possible)
+    void AssignTempFileName(const wxString& prefix, wxFile *fileTemp = NULL);
+    static wxString CreateTempFileName(const wxString& prefix,
+                                       wxFile *fileTemp = NULL);
+
+    // directory creation and removal.
+    // if full is TRUE, will try to make each directory in the path.
+    bool Mkdir( int perm = 0777, int flags = 0);
+    static bool Mkdir( const wxString &dir, int perm = 0777, int flags = 0 );
+
+    bool Rmdir();
+    static bool Rmdir( const wxString &dir );
+
+    // operations on the path
+
+        // normalize the path: with the default flags value, the path will be
+        // made absolute, without any ".." and "." and all environment
+        // variables will be expanded in it
+        //
+        // this may be done using another (than current) value of cwd
+    bool Normalize(int flags = wxPATH_NORM_ALL,
+                   const wxString& cwd = wxEmptyString,
+                   wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+        // get a path path relative to the given base directory, i.e. opposite
+        // of Normalize
+        //
+        // pass an empty string to get a path relative to the working directory
+        //
+        // returns TRUE if the file name was modified, FALSE if we failed to do
+        // anything with it (happens when the file is on a different volume,
+        // for example)
+    bool MakeRelativeTo(const wxString& pathBase = _T(""),
+                        wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+        // make the path absolute
+        //
+        // this may be done using another (than current) value of cwd
+    bool MakeAbsolute(const wxString& cwd = wxEmptyString,
+                      wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE)
+        { return Normalize(wxPATH_NORM_DOTS | wxPATH_NORM_ABSOLUTE |
+                           wxPATH_NORM_TILDE, cwd, format); }
+
+    // Comparison
+
+        // compares with the rules of the given platforms format
+    bool SameAs(const wxFileName& filepath,
+                wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
+
+        // compare with another filename object
+    bool operator==(const wxFileName& filename) const
+        { return SameAs(filename); }
+    bool operator!=(const wxFileName& filename) const
+        { return !SameAs(filename); }
+
+        // compare with a filename string interpreted as a native file name
+    bool operator==(const wxString& filename) const
+        { return SameAs(wxFileName(filename)); }
+    bool operator!=(const wxString& filename) const
+        { return !SameAs(wxFileName(filename)); }
+
+        // are the file names of this type cases sensitive?
+    static bool IsCaseSensitive( wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE );
+
+        // is this filename absolute?
+    bool IsAbsolute(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
+
+        // is this filename relative?
+    bool IsRelative(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const
+        { return !IsAbsolute(format); }
+
+    // Information about path format
+
+    // get the string separating the volume from the path for this format,
+    // return an empty string if this format doesn't support the notion of
+    // volumes at all
+    static wxString GetVolumeSeparator(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+    // get the string of path separators for this format
+    static wxString GetPathSeparators(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+    // get the canonical path separator for this format
+    static wxChar GetPathSeparator(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE)
+        { return GetPathSeparators(format)[0u]; }
+
+    // is the char a path separator for this format?
+    static bool IsPathSeparator(wxChar ch, wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+    // Dir accessors
+    void AppendDir( const wxString &dir );
+    void PrependDir( const wxString &dir );
+    void InsertDir( int before, const wxString &dir );
+    void RemoveDir( int pos );
+    size_t GetDirCount() const { return m_dirs.GetCount(); }
+
+    // Other accessors
+    void SetExt( const wxString &ext )          { m_ext = ext; }
+    wxString GetExt() const                     { return m_ext; }
+    bool HasExt() const                         { return !m_ext.empty(); }
+
+    void SetName( const wxString &name )        { m_name = name; }
+    wxString GetName() const                    { return m_name; }
+    bool HasName() const                        { return !m_name.empty(); }
+
+    void SetVolume( const wxString &volume )    { m_volume = volume; }
+    wxString GetVolume() const                  { return m_volume; }
+    bool HasVolume() const                      { return !m_volume.empty(); }
+
+    // full name is the file name + extension (but without the path)
+    void SetFullName(const wxString& fullname);
+    wxString GetFullName() const;
+
+    const wxArrayString& GetDirs() const        { return m_dirs; }
+
+    // flags are combination of wxPATH_GET_XXX flags
+    wxString GetPath(int flags = 0, wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE) const;
+
+    // Replace current path with this one
+    void SetPath( const wxString &path, wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE );
+
+    // Construct full path with name and ext
+    wxString GetFullPath( wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE ) const;
+
+    // Return the short form of the path (returns identity on non-Windows platforms)
+    wxString GetShortPath() const;
+
+    // Return the long form of the path (returns identity on non-Windows platforms)
+    wxString GetLongPath() const;
+
+    // Is this a file or directory (not necessarily an existing one)
+    bool IsDir() const { return m_name.empty() && m_ext.empty(); }
+
+    // various helpers
+
+        // get the canonical path format for this platform
+    static wxPathFormat GetFormat( wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE );
+
+        // split a fullpath into the volume, path, (base) name and extension
+        // (all of the pointers can be NULL)
+    static void SplitPath(const wxString& fullpath,
+                          wxString *volume,
+                          wxString *path,
+                          wxString *name,
+                          wxString *ext,
+                          wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+        // compatibility version
+    static void SplitPath(const wxString& fullpath,
+                          wxString *path,
+                          wxString *name,
+                          wxString *ext,
+                          wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE);
+
+
+    // deprecated methods, don't use any more
+    // --------------------------------------
+
+#ifndef __DIGITALMARS__
+    wxString GetPath( bool withSep, wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE ) const
+        { return GetPath(withSep ? wxPATH_GET_SEPARATOR : 0, format); }
+#endif
+    wxString GetPathWithSep(wxPathFormat format = wxPATH_NATIVE ) const
+        { return GetPath(wxPATH_GET_SEPARATOR, format); }
+
+private:
+    // the drive/volume/device specification (always empty for Unix)
+    wxString        m_volume;
+
+    // the path components of the file
+    wxArrayString   m_dirs;
+
+    // the file name and extension (empty for directories)
+    wxString        m_name,
+                    m_ext;
+
+    // when m_dirs is empty it may mean either that we have no path at all or
+    // that our path is '/', i.e. the root directory
+    //
+    // we use m_relative to distinguish between these two cases, it will be
+    // TRUE in the former and FALSE in the latter
+    //
+    // NB: the path is not absolute just because m_relative is FALSE, it still
+    //     needs the drive (i.e. volume) in some formats (Windows)
+    bool            m_relative;
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_FILENAME_H_
+

include/wx/filesys.h

@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        filesys.h
+// Purpose:     class for opening files - virtual file system
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef __FILESYS_H__
+#define __FILESYS_H__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "filesys.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/setup.h"
+
+#if !wxUSE_STREAMS
+#error You cannot compile virtual file systems without wxUSE_STREAMS
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_HTML && !wxUSE_FILESYSTEM
+#error You cannot compile wxHTML without virtual file systems
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_FILESYSTEM
+
+#include "wx/stream.h"
+#include "wx/url.h"
+#include "wx/datetime.h"
+#include "wx/filename.h"
+
+class wxFSFile;
+class wxFileSystemHandler;
+class wxFileSystem;
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFSFile
+//                  This class is a file opened using wxFileSystem. It consists of
+//                  input stream, location, mime type & optional anchor
+//                  (in 'index.htm#chapter2', 'chapter2' is anchor)
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFSFile : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxFSFile(wxInputStream *stream, const wxString& loc,
+             const wxString& mimetype, const wxString& anchor
+#if wxUSE_DATETIME
+             , wxDateTime modif
+#endif // wxUSE_DATETIME
+             )
+    {
+        m_Stream = stream;
+        m_Location = loc;
+        m_MimeType = mimetype; m_MimeType.MakeLower();
+        m_Anchor = anchor;
+#if wxUSE_DATETIME
+        m_Modif = modif;
+#endif // wxUSE_DATETIME
+    }
+
+    virtual ~wxFSFile() { if (m_Stream) delete m_Stream; }
+
+    // returns stream. This doesn't _create_ stream, it only returns
+    // pointer to it.
+    wxInputStream *GetStream() const {return m_Stream;}
+
+    // returns file's mime type
+    const wxString& GetMimeType() const {return m_MimeType;}
+
+    // returns the original location (aka filename) of the file
+    const wxString& GetLocation() const {return m_Location;}
+
+    const wxString& GetAnchor() const {return m_Anchor;}
+
+#if wxUSE_DATETIME
+    wxDateTime GetModificationTime() const {return m_Modif;}
+#endif // wxUSE_DATETIME
+
+private:
+    wxInputStream *m_Stream;
+    wxString m_Location;
+    wxString m_MimeType;
+    wxString m_Anchor;
+#if wxUSE_DATETIME
+    wxDateTime m_Modif;
+#endif // wxUSE_DATETIME
+
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxFSFile)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFSFile)
+};
+
+
+
+
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileSystemHandler
+//                  This class is FS handler for wxFileSystem. It provides
+//                  interface to access certain
+//                  kinds of files (HTPP, FTP, local, tar.gz etc..)
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileSystemHandler : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxFileSystemHandler() : wxObject() {}
+
+    // returns TRUE if this handler is able to open given location
+    virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location) = 0;
+
+    // opens given file and returns pointer to input stream.
+    // Returns NULL if opening failed.
+    // The location is always absolute path.
+    virtual wxFSFile* OpenFile(wxFileSystem& fs, const wxString& location) = 0;
+
+    // Finds first/next file that matches spec wildcard. flags can be wxDIR for restricting
+    // the query to directories or wxFILE for files only or 0 for either.
+    // Returns filename or empty string if no more matching file exists
+    virtual wxString FindFirst(const wxString& spec, int flags = 0);
+    virtual wxString FindNext();
+
+protected:
+    // returns protocol ("file", "http", "tar" etc.) The last (most right)
+    // protocol is used:
+    // {it returns "tar" for "file:subdir/archive.tar.gz#tar:/README.txt"}
+    wxString GetProtocol(const wxString& location) const;
+
+    // returns left part of address:
+    // {it returns "file:subdir/archive.tar.gz" for "file:subdir/archive.tar.gz#tar:/README.txt"}
+    wxString GetLeftLocation(const wxString& location) const;
+
+    // returns anchor part of address:
+    // {it returns "anchor" for "file:subdir/archive.tar.gz#tar:/README.txt#anchor"}
+    // NOTE:  anchor is NOT a part of GetLeftLocation()'s return value
+    wxString GetAnchor(const wxString& location) const;
+
+    // returns right part of address:
+    // {it returns "/README.txt" for "file:subdir/archive.tar.gz#tar:/README.txt"}
+    wxString GetRightLocation(const wxString& location) const;
+
+    // Returns MIME type of the file - w/o need to open it
+    // (default behaviour is that it returns type based on extension)
+    wxString GetMimeTypeFromExt(const wxString& location);
+
+    DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxFileSystemHandler)
+};
+
+
+
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFileSystem
+//                  This class provides simple interface for opening various
+//                  kinds of files (HTPP, FTP, local, tar.gz etc..)
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFileSystem : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxFileSystem() : wxObject() {m_Path = m_LastName = wxEmptyString; m_Handlers.DeleteContents(TRUE); m_FindFileHandler = NULL;}
+
+    // sets the current location. Every call to OpenFile is
+    // relative to this location.
+    // NOTE !!
+    // unless is_dir = TRUE 'location' is *not* the directory but
+    // file contained in this directory
+    // (so ChangePathTo("dir/subdir/xh.htm") sets m_Path to "dir/subdir/")
+    void ChangePathTo(const wxString& location, bool is_dir = FALSE);
+
+    wxString GetPath() const {return m_Path;}
+
+    // opens given file and returns pointer to input stream.
+    // Returns NULL if opening failed.
+    // It first tries to open the file in relative scope
+    // (based on ChangePathTo()'s value) and then as an absolute
+    // path.
+    wxFSFile* OpenFile(const wxString& location);
+
+    // Finds first/next file that matches spec wildcard. flags can be wxDIR for restricting
+    // the query to directories or wxFILE for files only or 0 for either.
+    // Returns filename or empty string if no more matching file exists
+    wxString FindFirst(const wxString& spec, int flags = 0);
+    wxString FindNext();
+
+    // Adds FS handler.
+    // In fact, this class is only front-end to the FS hanlers :-)
+    static void AddHandler(wxFileSystemHandler *handler);
+
+    // remove all items from the m_Handlers list
+    static void CleanUpHandlers();
+
+    // Returns the native path for a file URL
+    static wxFileName URLToFileName(const wxString& url);
+
+    // Returns the file URL for a native path
+    static wxString FileNameToURL(const wxFileName& filename);
+
+
+protected:
+    wxString m_Path;
+            // the path (location) we are currently in
+            // this is path, not file!
+            // (so if you opened test/demo.htm, it is
+            // "test/", not "test/demo.htm")
+    wxString m_LastName;
+            // name of last opened file (full path)
+    static wxList m_Handlers;
+            // list of FS handlers
+    wxFileSystemHandler *m_FindFileHandler;
+            // handler that succeed in FindFirst query
+
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxFileSystem)
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFileSystem)
+};
+
+
+/*
+
+'location' syntax:
+
+To determine FS type, we're using standard KDE notation:
+file:/absolute/path/file.htm
+file:relative_path/xxxxx.html
+/some/path/x.file               ('file:' is default)
+http://www.gnome.org
+file:subdir/archive.tar.gz#tar:/README.txt
+
+special characters :
+  ':' - FS identificator is before this char
+  '#' - separator. It can be either HTML anchor ("index.html#news")
+            (in case there is no ':' in the string to the right from it)
+        or FS separator
+            (example : http://www.wxhtml.org/wxhtml-0.1.tar.gz#tar:/include/wxhtml/filesys.h"
+             this would access tgz archive stored on web)
+  '/' - directory (path) separator. It is used to determine upper-level path.
+        HEY! Don't use \ even if you're on Windows!
+
+*/
+
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxLocalFSHandler : public wxFileSystemHandler
+{
+public:
+    virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location);
+    virtual wxFSFile* OpenFile(wxFileSystem& fs, const wxString& location);
+    virtual wxString FindFirst(const wxString& spec, int flags = 0);
+    virtual wxString FindNext();
+
+    // wxLocalFSHandler will prefix all filenames with 'root' before accessing
+    // files on disk. This effectively makes 'root' the top-level directory
+    // and prevents access to files outside this directory.
+    // (This is similar to Unix command 'chroot'.)
+    static void Chroot(const wxString& root) { ms_root = root; }
+
+protected:
+    static wxString ms_root;
+};
+
+
+
+#endif
+  // wxUSE_FILESYSTEM
+
+#endif
+  // __FILESYS_H__

include/wx/fmappriv.h

@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/fmappriv.h
+// Purpose:     private wxFontMapper stuff, not to be used by the library users
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     21.06.2003 (extracted from common/fontmap.cpp)
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999-2003 Vadim Zeitlin <vadim@wxwindows.org>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FMAPPRIV_H_
+#define _WX_FMAPPRIV_H_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// a special pseudo encoding which means "don't ask me about this charset
+// any more" -- we need it to avoid driving the user crazy with asking him
+// time after time about the same charset which he [presumably] doesn't
+// have the fonts for
+enum { wxFONTENCODING_UNKNOWN = -2 };
+
+// the config paths we use
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+#define FONTMAPPER_ROOT_PATH wxT("/wxWindows/FontMapper")
+#define FONTMAPPER_CHARSET_PATH wxT("Charsets")
+#define FONTMAPPER_CHARSET_ALIAS_PATH wxT("Aliases")
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFontMapperPathChanger: change the config path during our lifetime
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+class wxFontMapperPathChanger
+{
+public:
+    wxFontMapperPathChanger(wxFontMapperBase *fontMapper, const wxString& path)
+    {
+        m_fontMapper = fontMapper;
+        m_ok = m_fontMapper->ChangePath(path, &m_pathOld);
+    }
+
+    bool IsOk() const { return m_ok; }
+
+    ~wxFontMapperPathChanger()
+    {
+        if ( IsOk() )
+            m_fontMapper->RestorePath(m_pathOld);
+    }
+
+private:
+    // the fontmapper object we're working with
+    wxFontMapperBase *m_fontMapper;
+
+    // the old path to be restored if m_ok
+    wxString m_pathOld;
+
+    // have we changed the path successfully?
+    bool m_ok;
+
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFontMapperPathChanger)
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+#endif // _WX_FMAPPRIV_H_
+

include/wx/font.h

@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/font.h
+// Purpose:     wxFontBase class: the interface of wxFont
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     20.09.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FONT_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_FONT_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "fontbase.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"        // for wxDEFAULT &c
+#include "wx/fontenc.h"     // the font encoding constants
+#include "wx/gdiobj.h"      // the base class
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// forward declarations
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontData;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontBase;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFont;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// font constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// standard font families: these may be used only for the font creation, it
+// doesn't make sense to query an existing font for its font family as,
+// especially if the font had been created from a native font description, it
+// may be unknown
+enum wxFontFamily
+{
+    wxFONTFAMILY_DEFAULT = wxDEFAULT,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_DECORATIVE = wxDECORATIVE,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_ROMAN = wxROMAN,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_SCRIPT = wxSCRIPT,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_SWISS = wxSWISS,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_MODERN = wxMODERN,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_TELETYPE = wxTELETYPE,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_MAX,
+    wxFONTFAMILY_UNKNOWN = wxFONTFAMILY_MAX
+};
+
+// font styles
+enum wxFontStyle
+{
+    wxFONTSTYLE_NORMAL = wxNORMAL,
+    wxFONTSTYLE_ITALIC = wxITALIC,
+    wxFONTSTYLE_SLANT = wxSLANT,
+    wxFONTSTYLE_MAX
+};
+
+// font weights
+enum wxFontWeight
+{
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_NORMAL = wxNORMAL,
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_LIGHT = wxLIGHT,
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_BOLD = wxBOLD,
+    wxFONTWEIGHT_MAX
+};
+
+// the font flag bits for the new font ctor accepting one combined flags word
+enum
+{
+    // no special flags: font with default weight/slant/anti-aliasing
+    wxFONTFLAG_DEFAULT          = 0,
+
+    // slant flags (default: no slant)
+    wxFONTFLAG_ITALIC           = 1 << 0,
+    wxFONTFLAG_SLANT            = 1 << 1,
+
+    // weight flags (default: medium)
+    wxFONTFLAG_LIGHT            = 1 << 2,
+    wxFONTFLAG_BOLD             = 1 << 3,
+
+    // anti-aliasing flag: force on or off (default: the current system default)
+    wxFONTFLAG_ANTIALIASED      = 1 << 4,
+    wxFONTFLAG_NOT_ANTIALIASED  = 1 << 5,
+
+    // underlined/strikethrough flags (default: no lines)
+    wxFONTFLAG_UNDERLINED       = 1 << 6,
+    wxFONTFLAG_STRIKETHROUGH    = 1 << 7,
+
+    // the mask of all currently used flags
+    wxFONTFLAG_MASK = wxFONTFLAG_ITALIC             |
+                      wxFONTFLAG_SLANT              |
+                      wxFONTFLAG_LIGHT              |
+                      wxFONTFLAG_BOLD               |
+                      wxFONTFLAG_ANTIALIASED        |
+                      wxFONTFLAG_NOT_ANTIALIASED    |
+                      wxFONTFLAG_UNDERLINED         |
+                      wxFONTFLAG_STRIKETHROUGH
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFontBase represents a font object
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontRefData;
+struct WXDLLEXPORT wxNativeFontInfo;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontBase : public wxGDIObject
+{
+public:
+    // creator function
+    virtual ~wxFontBase();
+
+    // from the font components
+    static wxFont *New(
+        int pointSize,              // size of the font in points
+        int family,                 // see wxFontFamily enum
+        int style,                  // see wxFontStyle enum
+        int weight,                 // see wxFontWeight enum
+        bool underlined = FALSE,    // not underlined by default
+        const wxString& face = wxEmptyString,              // facename
+        wxFontEncoding encoding = wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT); // ISO8859-X, ...
+
+    // from the font components but using the font flags instead of separate
+    // parameters for each flag
+    static wxFont *New(int pointSize,
+                       wxFontFamily family,
+                       int flags = wxFONTFLAG_DEFAULT,
+                       const wxString& face = wxEmptyString,
+                       wxFontEncoding encoding = wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT);
+
+    // from the (opaque) native font description object
+    static wxFont *New(const wxNativeFontInfo& nativeFontDesc);
+
+    // from the string representation of wxNativeFontInfo
+    static wxFont *New(const wxString& strNativeFontDesc);
+
+    // was the font successfully created?
+    bool Ok() const { return m_refData != NULL; }
+
+    // comparison
+    bool operator == (const wxFont& font) const;
+    bool operator != (const wxFont& font) const;
+
+    // accessors: get the font characteristics
+    virtual int GetPointSize() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetFamily() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetStyle() const = 0;
+    virtual int GetWeight() const = 0;
+    virtual bool GetUnderlined() const = 0;
+    virtual wxString GetFaceName() const = 0;
+    virtual wxFontEncoding GetEncoding() const = 0;
+    virtual wxNativeFontInfo *GetNativeFontInfo() const;
+
+    virtual bool IsFixedWidth() const;
+
+    wxString GetNativeFontInfoDesc() const;
+    wxString GetNativeFontInfoUserDesc() const;
+
+    // change the font characteristics
+    virtual void SetPointSize( int pointSize ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetFamily( int family ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetStyle( int style ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetWeight( int weight ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetFaceName( const wxString& faceName ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetUnderlined( bool underlined ) = 0;
+    virtual void SetEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding) = 0;
+    void SetNativeFontInfo(const wxNativeFontInfo& info)
+        { DoSetNativeFontInfo(info); }
+
+    void SetNativeFontInfo(const wxString& info);
+    void SetNativeFontInfoUserDesc(const wxString& info);
+
+    // translate the fonts into human-readable string (i.e. GetStyleString()
+    // will return "wxITALIC" for an italic font, ...)
+    wxString GetFamilyString() const;
+    wxString GetStyleString() const;
+    wxString GetWeightString() const;
+
+    // Unofficial API, don't use
+    virtual void SetNoAntiAliasing( bool WXUNUSED(no) = TRUE ) {  }
+    virtual bool GetNoAntiAliasing() { return FALSE; }
+
+    // the default encoding is used for creating all fonts with default
+    // encoding parameter
+    static wxFontEncoding GetDefaultEncoding() { return ms_encodingDefault; }
+    static void SetDefaultEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding);
+
+protected:
+    // get the internal data
+    wxFontRefData *GetFontData() const
+        { return (wxFontRefData *)m_refData; }
+
+    // the function called by both overloads of SetNativeFontInfo()
+    virtual void DoSetNativeFontInfo(const wxNativeFontInfo& info);
+
+private:
+    // the currently default encoding: by default, it's the default system
+    // encoding, but may be changed by the application using
+    // SetDefaultEncoding() to make all subsequent fonts created without
+    // specifing encoding parameter using this encoding
+    static wxFontEncoding ms_encodingDefault;
+};
+
+// include the real class declaration
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    #include "wx/x11/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    #include "wx/mgl/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/cocoa/font.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/font.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// macros
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define M_FONTDATA GetFontData()
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_FONT_H_BASE_

include/wx/fontdlg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/fontdlg.h
+// Purpose:     common interface for different wxFontDialog classes
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     12.05.02
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1997-2002 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FONTDLG_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_FONTDLG_H_BASE_
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"            // for wxUSE_FONTDLG
+
+#if wxUSE_FONTDLG
+
+#include "wx/dialog.h"          // the base class
+#include "wx/cmndata.h"         // wxFontData
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFontDialog interface
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontDialogBase : public wxDialog
+{
+public:
+    // create the font dialog
+    wxFontDialogBase() { }
+    wxFontDialogBase(wxWindow *parent) { m_parent = parent; }
+    wxFontDialogBase(wxWindow *parent, const wxFontData& data)
+        { m_parent = parent; InitFontData(&data); }
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent)
+        { return DoCreate(parent); }
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent, const wxFontData& data)
+        { InitFontData(&data); return Create(parent); }
+
+    virtual ~wxFontDialogBase();
+
+    // retrieve the font data
+    const wxFontData& GetFontData() const { return m_fontData; }
+    wxFontData& GetFontData() { return m_fontData; }
+
+    // deprecated interface, for compatibility only, don't use
+    wxFontDialogBase(wxWindow *parent, const wxFontData *data)
+        { m_parent = parent; InitFontData(data); }
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent, const wxFontData *data)
+        { InitFontData(data); return Create(parent); }
+
+protected:
+    virtual bool DoCreate(wxWindow *parent) { m_parent = parent; return TRUE; }
+
+    void InitFontData(const wxFontData *data = NULL)
+        { if ( data ) m_fontData = *data; }
+
+    wxFontData m_fontData;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// platform-specific wxFontDialog implementation
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) || defined(__WXMOTIF__) || defined(__WXMAC__) || defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+    #include "wx/generic/fontdlgg.h"
+    #define wxFontDialog wxGenericFontDialog
+    #define sm_classwxFontDialog sm_classwxGenericFontDialog
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include "wx/msw/fontdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/fontdlg.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/fontdlg.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global public functions
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// get the font from user and return it, returns wxNullFont if the dialog was
+// cancelled
+wxFont WXDLLEXPORT
+wxGetFontFromUser(wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *)NULL,
+                  const wxFont& fontInit = wxNullFont);
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FONTDLG
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_FONTDLG_H_BASE_

include/wx/fontenc.h

@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/fontenc.h
+// Purpose:     wxFontEncoding constants
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29.03.00
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FONTENC_H_
+#define _WX_FONTENC_H_
+
+#include "wx/string.h"
+
+// font encodings
+enum wxFontEncoding
+{
+    wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM = -1,     // system default
+    wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT,         // current default encoding
+
+    // ISO8859 standard defines a number of single-byte charsets
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_1,       // West European (Latin1)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_2,       // Central and East European (Latin2)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_3,       // Esperanto (Latin3)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_4,       // Baltic (old) (Latin4)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_5,       // Cyrillic
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_6,       // Arabic
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_7,       // Greek
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_8,       // Hebrew
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_9,       // Turkish (Latin5)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_10,      // Variation of Latin4 (Latin6)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_11,      // Thai
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_12,      // doesn't exist currently, but put it
+                                    // here anyhow to make all ISO8859
+                                    // consecutive numbers
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_13,      // Baltic (Latin7)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_14,      // Latin8
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_15,      // Latin9 (a.k.a. Latin0, includes euro)
+    wxFONTENCODING_ISO8859_MAX,
+
+    // Cyrillic charset soup (see http://czyborra.com/charsets/cyrillic.html)
+    wxFONTENCODING_KOI8,            // we don't support any of KOI8 variants
+    wxFONTENCODING_ALTERNATIVE,     // same as MS-DOS CP866
+    wxFONTENCODING_BULGARIAN,       // used under Linux in Bulgaria
+
+    // what would we do without Microsoft? They have their own encodings
+        // for DOS
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP437,           // original MS-DOS codepage
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP850,           // CP437 merged with Latin1
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP852,           // CP437 merged with Latin2
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP855,           // another cyrillic encoding
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP866,           // and another one
+        // and for Windows
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP874,           // WinThai
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP932,           // Japanese (shift-JIS)
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP936,           // Chinese simplified (GB)
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP949,           // Korean (Hangul charset)
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP950,           // Chinese (traditional - Big5)
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1250,          // WinLatin2
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1251,          // WinCyrillic
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1252,          // WinLatin1
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1253,          // WinGreek (8859-7)
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1254,          // WinTurkish
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1255,          // WinHebrew
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1256,          // WinArabic
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP1257,          // WinBaltic (same as Latin 7)
+    wxFONTENCODING_CP12_MAX,
+
+    wxFONTENCODING_UTF7,            // UTF-7 Unicode encoding
+    wxFONTENCODING_UTF8,            // UTF-8 Unicode encoding
+
+    // Far Eastern encodings
+        // Chinese
+    wxFONTENCODING_GB2312 = wxFONTENCODING_CP936, // Simplified Chinese
+    wxFONTENCODING_BIG5 = wxFONTENCODING_CP950,   // Traditional Chinese
+
+        // Japanese (see http://zsigri.tripod.com/fontboard/cjk/jis.html)
+    wxFONTENCODING_SHIFT_JIS = wxFONTENCODING_CP932,  // Shift JIS
+    wxFONTENCODING_EUC_JP = wxFONTENCODING_UTF8 + 1,  // Extended Unix Codepage
+                                                      // for Japanese
+
+    wxFONTENCODING_UNICODE,         // Unicode (for wxEncodingConverter only)
+
+    wxFONTENCODING_MAX
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// types
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+
+// This private structure specifies all the parameters needed to create a font
+// with the given encoding on this platform.
+//
+// Under X, it contains the last 2 elements of the font specifications
+// (registry and encoding).
+//
+// Under Windows, it contains a number which is one of predefined CHARSET_XXX
+// values.
+//
+// Under all platforms it also contains a facename string which should be
+// used, if not empty, to create fonts in this encoding (this is the only way
+// to create a font of non-standard encoding (like KOI8) under Windows - the
+// facename specifies the encoding then)
+
+struct WXDLLEXPORT wxNativeEncodingInfo
+{
+    wxString facename;          // may be empty meaning "any"
+    wxFontEncoding encoding;    // so that we know what this struct represents
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__) || defined(__WXPM__) || defined(__WXMAC__) || defined(__WXCOCOA__) // FIXME: __WXCOCOA__
+    wxNativeEncodingInfo()
+        : facename()
+        , encoding(wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM)
+        , charset(0) /* ANSI_CHARSET */
+    { }
+
+    int      charset;
+#elif defined(_WX_X_FONTLIKE)
+    wxString xregistry,
+             xencoding;
+#elif defined(__WXGTK20__)
+    // No way to specify this in Pango as this
+    // seems to be handled internally.
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    int      mglEncoding;
+#else
+    #error "Unsupported toolkit"
+#endif
+
+    // this struct is saved in config by wxFontMapper, so it should know to
+    // serialise itself (implemented in platform-specific code)
+    bool FromString(const wxString& s);
+    wxString ToString() const;
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+#endif // _WX_FONTENC_H_

include/wx/fontenum.h

@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        fontenum.h
+// Purpose:     wxFontEnumerator class for getting available fonts
+// Author:      Julian Smart, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by: extended to enumerate more than just font facenames and works
+//              not only on Windows now (VZ)
+// Created:     04/01/98
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart, Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FONTENUM_H_
+#define _WX_FONTENUM_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "fontenum.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/fontenc.h"
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFontEnumerator enumerates all available fonts on the system or only the
+// fonts with given attributes
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontEnumerator
+{
+public:
+    wxFontEnumerator() : m_Facenames(NULL), m_Encodings(NULL) { }
+
+    // start enumerating font facenames (either all of them or those which
+    // support the given encoding) - will result in OnFacename() being
+    // called for each available facename (until they are exhausted or
+    // OnFacename returns FALSE)
+    virtual bool EnumerateFacenames
+                 (
+                    wxFontEncoding encoding = wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM, // all
+                    bool fixedWidthOnly = FALSE
+                 );
+
+    // enumerate the different encodings either for given font facename or for
+    // all facenames - will result in OnFontEncoding() being called for each
+    // available (facename, encoding) couple
+    virtual bool EnumerateEncodings(const wxString& facename = wxT(""));
+
+    // callbacks which are called after one of EnumerateXXX() functions from
+    // above is invoked - all of them may return FALSE to stop enumeration or
+    // TRUE to continue with it
+
+    // called by EnumerateFacenames
+    virtual bool OnFacename(const wxString& facename)
+        { 
+            if (m_Facenames == NULL) m_Facenames = new wxArrayString;
+            m_Facenames -> Add(facename);
+            return TRUE;
+        }
+
+    // called by EnumerateEncodings
+    virtual bool OnFontEncoding(const wxString& WXUNUSED(facename),
+                                const wxString& encoding)
+        { 
+            if (m_Encodings == NULL) m_Encodings = new wxArrayString;
+            m_Encodings -> Add(encoding);
+            return TRUE;
+        }
+        
+    // convenience function that returns array of facenames. Cannot be called
+    // before EnumerateFacenames.
+    wxArrayString *GetFacenames() 
+        { return m_Facenames; }
+
+    // convenience function that returns array of encodings.
+    // Cannot be called before EnumerateEncodings.
+    wxArrayString *GetEncodings() 
+        { return m_Encodings; }
+        
+    // virtual dtor for the base class
+    virtual ~wxFontEnumerator() 
+        { 
+            if (m_Facenames) delete m_Facenames;
+            if (m_Encodings) delete m_Encodings;
+        }
+    
+private:
+    wxArrayString *m_Facenames, *m_Encodings;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFontEnumerator)
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_FONTENUM_H_

include/wx/fontmap.h

@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/fontmap.h
+// Purpose:     wxFontMapper class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     04.11.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Vadim Zeitlin
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FONTMAPPER_H_
+#define _WX_FONTMAPPER_H_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+#include "wx/fontenc.h"         // for wxFontEncoding
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    #include "wx/fontutil.h"    // for wxNativeEncodingInfo
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxConfigBase;
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontMapper;
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    class WXDLLEXPORT wxWindow;
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+
+// ============================================================================
+// wxFontMapper manages user-definable correspondence between wxWindows font
+// encodings and the fonts present on the machine.
+//
+// This is a singleton class, font mapper objects can only be accessed using
+// wxFontMapper::Get().
+// ============================================================================
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFontMapperBase: this is a non-interactive class which just uses its built
+//                   in knowledge of the encodings equivalence
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontMapperBase
+{
+public:
+    // constructtor and such
+    // ---------------------
+
+    // default ctor
+    wxFontMapperBase();
+
+    // virtual dtor for any base class
+    virtual ~wxFontMapperBase();
+
+    // return instance of the wxFontMapper singleton
+    static wxFontMapper *Get();
+
+    // set the sigleton to 'mapper' instance and return previous one
+    static wxFontMapper *Set(wxFontMapper *mapper);
+
+
+    // translates charset strings to encoding
+    // --------------------------------------
+
+    // returns the encoding for the given charset (in the form of RFC 2046) or
+    // wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM if couldn't decode it
+    //
+    // interactive parameter is ignored in the base class, we behave as if it
+    // were always false
+    virtual wxFontEncoding CharsetToEncoding(const wxString& charset,
+                                             bool interactive = true);
+
+
+    // information about supported encodings
+    // -------------------------------------
+
+    // get the number of font encodings we know about
+    static size_t GetSupportedEncodingsCount();
+
+    // get the n-th supported encoding
+    static wxFontEncoding GetEncoding(size_t n);
+
+    // return internal string identifier for the encoding (see also
+    // GetEncodingDescription())
+    static wxString GetEncodingName(wxFontEncoding encoding);
+
+    // return user-readable string describing the given encoding
+    //
+    // NB: hard-coded now, but might change later (read it from config?)
+    static wxString GetEncodingDescription(wxFontEncoding encoding);
+
+
+    // functions which allow to configure the config object used: by default,
+    // the global one (from wxConfigBase::Get() will be used) and the default
+    // root path for the config settings is the string returned by
+    // GetDefaultConfigPath()
+    // ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+    // set the config object to use (may be NULL to use default)
+    void SetConfig(wxConfigBase *config) { m_config = config; }
+
+    // set the root config path to use (should be an absolute path)
+    void SetConfigPath(const wxString& prefix);
+
+    // return default config path
+    static const wxChar *GetDefaultConfigPath();
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+
+protected:
+#if wxUSE_CONFIG
+    // get the config object we're using -- if it wasn't set explicitly, this
+    // function will use wxConfig::Get() to get the global one
+    wxConfigBase *GetConfig();
+
+    // gets the root path for our settings -- if it wasn't set explicitly, use
+    // GetDefaultConfigPath()
+    const wxString& GetConfigPath();
+
+    // change to the given (relative) path in the config, return true if ok
+    // (then GetConfig() will return something !NULL), false if no config
+    // object
+    //
+    // caller should provide a pointer to the string variable which should be
+    // later passed to RestorePath()
+    bool ChangePath(const wxString& pathNew, wxString *pathOld);
+
+    // restore the config path after use
+    void RestorePath(const wxString& pathOld);
+
+    // config object and path (in it) to use
+    wxConfigBase *m_config;
+    bool m_configIsDummy;
+
+    wxString m_configRootPath;
+#endif // wxUSE_CONFIG
+
+private:
+    // the global fontmapper object or NULL
+    static wxFontMapper *sm_instance;
+
+    friend class wxFontMapperPathChanger;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFontMapperBase)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFontMapper: interactive extension of wxFontMapperBase
+//
+// The default implementations of all functions will ask the user if they are
+// not capable of finding the answer themselves and store the answer in a
+// config file (configurable via SetConfigXXX functions). This behaviour may
+// be disabled by giving the value of false to "interactive" parameter.
+// However, the functions will always consult the config file to allow the
+// user-defined values override the default logic and there is no way to
+// disable this -- which shouldn't be ever needed because if "interactive" was
+// never true, the config file is never created anyhow.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontMapper : public wxFontMapperBase
+{
+public:
+    // default ctor
+    wxFontMapper();
+
+    // virtual dtor for a base class
+    virtual ~wxFontMapper();
+
+    // working with the encodings
+    // --------------------------
+
+    // returns the encoding for the given charset (in the form of RFC 2046) or
+    // wxFONTENCODING_SYSTEM if couldn't decode it
+    virtual wxFontEncoding CharsetToEncoding(const wxString& charset,
+                                             bool interactive = true);
+
+    // find an alternative for the given encoding (which is supposed to not be
+    // available on this system). If successful, return true and fill info
+    // structure with the parameters required to create the font, otherwise
+    // return false
+    virtual bool GetAltForEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding,
+                                   wxNativeEncodingInfo *info,
+                                   const wxString& facename = wxEmptyString,
+                                   bool interactive = true);
+
+    // version better suitable for 'public' use. Returns wxFontEcoding
+    // that can be used it wxFont ctor
+    bool GetAltForEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding,
+                           wxFontEncoding *alt_encoding,
+                           const wxString& facename = wxEmptyString,
+                           bool interactive = true);
+
+    // checks whether given encoding is available in given face or not.
+    // If no facename is given, 
+    virtual bool IsEncodingAvailable(wxFontEncoding encoding,
+                                     const wxString& facename = wxEmptyString);
+
+
+    // configure the appearance of the dialogs we may popup
+    // ----------------------------------------------------
+
+    // the parent window for modal dialogs
+    void SetDialogParent(wxWindow *parent) { m_windowParent = parent; }
+
+    // the title for the dialogs (note that default is quite reasonable)
+    void SetDialogTitle(const wxString& title) { m_titleDialog = title; }
+
+
+protected:
+    // GetAltForEncoding() helper: tests for the existence of the given
+    // encoding and saves the result in config if ok - this results in the
+    // following (desired) behaviour: when an unknown/unavailable encoding is
+    // requested for the first time, the user is asked about a replacement,
+    // but if he doesn't choose any and the default logic finds one, it will
+    // be saved in the config so that the user won't be asked about it any
+    // more
+    bool TestAltEncoding(const wxString& configEntry,
+                         wxFontEncoding encReplacement,
+                         wxNativeEncodingInfo *info);
+
+    // the title for our dialogs
+    wxString m_titleDialog;
+
+    // the parent window for our dialogs
+    wxWindow *m_windowParent;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFontMapper)
+};
+
+#else // !wxUSE_GUI
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontMapper : public wxFontMapperBase
+{
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI/!wxUSE_GUI
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global variables
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// the default font mapper for wxWindows programs do NOT use! This is for
+// backward compatibility, use wxFontMapper::Get() instead
+#define wxTheFontMapper (wxFontMapper::Get())
+
+#else // !wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+    // wxEncodingToCodepage (utils.cpp) needs wxGetNativeFontEncoding
+    #include "wx/fontutil.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FONTMAP/!wxUSE_FONTMAP
+
+#endif // _WX_FONTMAPPER_H_
+

include/wx/fontutil.h

@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/fontutil.h
+// Purpose:     font-related helper functions
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     05.11.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// General note: this header is private to wxWindows and is not supposed to be
+// included by user code. The functions declared here are implemented in
+// msw/fontutil.cpp for Windows, unix/fontutil.cpp for GTK/Motif &c.
+
+#ifndef _WX_FONTUTIL_H_
+#define _WX_FONTUTIL_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "fontutil.h"
+#endif
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#include "wx/font.h"        // for wxFont and wxFontEncoding
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #include <windows.h>
+    #include "wx/msw/winundef.h"
+#endif
+
+#if defined(_WX_X_FONTLIKE)
+
+// the symbolic names for the XLFD fields (with examples for their value)
+//
+// NB: we suppose that the font always starts with the empty token (font name
+//     registry field) as we never use nor generate it anyhow
+enum wxXLFDField
+{
+    wxXLFD_FOUNDRY,     // adobe
+    wxXLFD_FAMILY,      // courier, times, ...
+    wxXLFD_WEIGHT,      // black, bold, demibold, medium, regular, light
+    wxXLFD_SLANT,       // r/i/o (roman/italique/oblique)
+    wxXLFD_SETWIDTH,    // condensed, expanded, ...
+    wxXLFD_ADDSTYLE,    // whatever - usually nothing
+    wxXLFD_PIXELSIZE,   // size in pixels
+    wxXLFD_POINTSIZE,   // size in points
+    wxXLFD_RESX,        // 72, 75, 100, ...
+    wxXLFD_RESY,
+    wxXLFD_SPACING,     // m/p/c (monospaced/proportional/character cell)
+    wxXLFD_AVGWIDTH,    // average width in 1/10 pixels
+    wxXLFD_REGISTRY,    // iso8859, rawin, koi8, ...
+    wxXLFD_ENCODING,    // 1, r, r, ...
+    wxXLFD_MAX
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_X_FONTLIKE
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// types
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// wxNativeFontInfo is platform-specific font representation: this struct
+// should be considered as opaque font description only used by the native
+// functions, the user code can only get the objects of this type from
+// somewhere and pass it somewhere else (possibly save them somewhere using
+// ToString() and restore them using FromString())
+//
+// NB: it is a POD currently for max efficiency but if it continues to grow
+//     further it might make sense to make it a real class with virtual methods
+struct WXDLLEXPORT wxNativeFontInfo
+{
+#if wxUSE_PANGO
+    PangoFontDescription *description;
+#elif defined(_WX_X_FONTLIKE)
+    // the members can't be accessed directly as we only parse the
+    // xFontName on demand
+private:
+    // the components of the XLFD
+    wxString     fontElements[wxXLFD_MAX];
+
+    // the full XLFD
+    wxString     xFontName;
+
+    // true until SetXFontName() is called
+    bool         m_isDefault;
+
+    // return true if we have already initialized fontElements
+    inline bool HasElements() const;
+
+public:
+    // init the elements from an XLFD, return TRUE if ok
+    bool FromXFontName(const wxString& xFontName);
+
+    // return false if we were never initialized with a valid XLFD
+    bool IsDefault() const { return m_isDefault; }
+
+    // return the XLFD (using the fontElements if necessary)
+    wxString GetXFontName() const;
+
+    // get the given XFLD component
+    wxString GetXFontComponent(wxXLFDField field) const;
+
+    // change the font component
+    void SetXFontComponent(wxXLFDField field, const wxString& value);
+
+    // set the XFLD
+    void SetXFontName(const wxString& xFontName);
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    LOGFONT      lf;
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    // OS/2 native structures that define a font
+    FATTRS       fa;
+    FONTMETRICS  fm;
+    FACENAMEDESC fn;
+#else // other platforms
+    //
+    //  This is a generic implementation that should work on all ports
+    //  without specific support by the port.
+    //
+    #define wxNO_NATIVE_FONTINFO
+
+    int           pointSize;
+    wxFontFamily  family;
+    wxFontStyle   style;
+    wxFontWeight  weight;
+    bool          underlined;
+    wxString      faceName;
+    wxFontEncoding encoding;
+#endif // platforms
+
+    // default ctor (default copy ctor is ok)
+    wxNativeFontInfo() { Init(); }
+
+    // reset to the default state
+    void Init();
+
+    // accessors and modifiers for the font elements
+    int GetPointSize() const;
+    wxFontStyle GetStyle() const;
+    wxFontWeight GetWeight() const;
+    bool GetUnderlined() const;
+    wxString GetFaceName() const;
+    wxFontFamily GetFamily() const;
+    wxFontEncoding GetEncoding() const;
+
+    void SetPointSize(int pointsize);
+    void SetStyle(wxFontStyle style);
+    void SetWeight(wxFontWeight weight);
+    void SetUnderlined(bool underlined);
+    void SetFaceName(wxString facename);
+    void SetFamily(wxFontFamily family);
+    void SetEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding);
+
+    // it is important to be able to serialize wxNativeFontInfo objects to be
+    // able to store them (in config file, for example)
+    bool FromString(const wxString& s);
+    wxString ToString() const;
+
+    // we also want to present the native font descriptions to the user in some
+    // human-readable form (it is not platform independent neither, but can
+    // hopefully be understood by the user)
+    bool FromUserString(const wxString& s);
+    wxString ToUserString() const;
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// font-related functions (common)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// translate a wxFontEncoding into native encoding parameter (defined above),
+// returning TRUE if an (exact) macth could be found, FALSE otherwise (without
+// attempting any substitutions)
+extern bool wxGetNativeFontEncoding(wxFontEncoding encoding,
+                                    wxNativeEncodingInfo *info);
+
+// test for the existence of the font described by this facename/encoding,
+// return TRUE if such font(s) exist, FALSE otherwise
+extern bool wxTestFontEncoding(const wxNativeEncodingInfo& info);
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// font-related functions (X and GTK)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef _WX_X_FONTLIKE
+    #include "wx/unix/fontutil.h"
+#endif // X || GDK
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// font-related functions (MGL)
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef __WXMGL__
+    #include "wx/mgl/fontutil.h"
+#endif // __WXMGL__
+
+#endif // _WX_FONTUTIL_H_

include/wx/frame.h

@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/frame.h
+// Purpose:     wxFrame class interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     15.11.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FRAME_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_FRAME_H_BASE_
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "framebase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/toplevel.h"      // the base class
+
+// the default names for various classs
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxFrameNameStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxStatusLineNameStr;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxToolBarNameStr;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFrame;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMenuBar;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxStatusBar;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxToolBar;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxFrame is a top-level window with optional menubar, statusbar and toolbar
+//
+// For each of *bars, a frame may have several of them, but only one is
+// managed by the frame, i.e. resized/moved when the frame is and whose size
+// is accounted for in client size calculations - all others should be taken
+// care of manually. The CreateXXXBar() functions create this, main, XXXBar,
+// but the actual creation is done in OnCreateXXXBar() functions which may be
+// overridden to create custom objects instead of standard ones when
+// CreateXXXBar() is called.
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFrameBase : public wxTopLevelWindow
+{
+public:
+    // construction
+    wxFrameBase();
+    virtual ~wxFrameBase();
+
+    wxFrame *New(wxWindow *parent,
+                 wxWindowID winid,
+                 const wxString& title,
+                 const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                 const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                 long style = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE,
+                 const wxString& name = wxFrameNameStr);
+
+    // frame state
+    // -----------
+
+    // get the origin of the client area (which may be different from (0, 0)
+    // if the frame has a toolbar) in client coordinates
+    virtual wxPoint GetClientAreaOrigin() const;
+
+    // sends a size event to the window using its current size -- this has an
+    // effect of refreshing the window layout
+    //
+    // currently it is only implemented under MSW but is declared here to make
+    // it possible to call it in portable code without using #ifdef's
+    virtual void SendSizeEvent() { }
+
+    // menu bar functions
+    // ------------------
+
+#if wxUSE_MENUS
+    virtual void SetMenuBar(wxMenuBar *menubar);
+    virtual wxMenuBar *GetMenuBar() const { return m_frameMenuBar; }
+#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
+
+#ifdef WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+    // call this to simulate a menu command
+    bool Command(int winid) { return ProcessCommand(winid); }
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2_2
+
+    // process menu command: returns TRUE if processed
+    bool ProcessCommand(int winid);
+
+    // status bar functions
+    // --------------------
+#if wxUSE_STATUSBAR
+    // create the main status bar by calling OnCreateStatusBar()
+    virtual wxStatusBar* CreateStatusBar(int number = 1,
+                                         long style = wxST_SIZEGRIP,
+                                         wxWindowID winid = 0,
+                                         const wxString& name =
+                                            wxStatusLineNameStr);
+    // return a new status bar
+    virtual wxStatusBar *OnCreateStatusBar(int number,
+                                           long style,
+                                           wxWindowID winid,
+                                           const wxString& name);
+    // get the main status bar
+    virtual wxStatusBar *GetStatusBar() const { return m_frameStatusBar; }
+
+    // sets the main status bar
+    void SetStatusBar(wxStatusBar *statBar) { m_frameStatusBar = statBar; }
+
+    // forward these to status bar
+    virtual void SetStatusText(const wxString &text, int number = 0);
+    virtual void SetStatusWidths(int n, const int widths_field[]);
+    void PushStatusText(const wxString &text, int number = 0);
+    void PopStatusText(int number = 0);
+
+    // set the status bar pane the help will be shown in
+    void SetStatusBarPane(int n) { m_statusBarPane = n; }
+    int GetStatusBarPane() const { return m_statusBarPane; }
+#endif // wxUSE_STATUSBAR
+
+    // toolbar functions
+    // -----------------
+#if wxUSE_TOOLBAR
+    // create main toolbar bycalling OnCreateToolBar()
+    virtual wxToolBar* CreateToolBar(long style = wxNO_BORDER|wxTB_HORIZONTAL,
+                                     wxWindowID winid = -1,
+                                     const wxString& name = wxToolBarNameStr);
+    // return a new toolbar
+    virtual wxToolBar *OnCreateToolBar(long style,
+                                       wxWindowID winid,
+                                       const wxString& name );
+
+    // get/set the main toolbar
+    virtual wxToolBar *GetToolBar() const { return m_frameToolBar; }
+    virtual void SetToolBar(wxToolBar *toolbar) { m_frameToolBar = toolbar; }
+#endif // wxUSE_TOOLBAR
+
+    // implementation only from now on
+    // -------------------------------
+
+    // event handlers
+    void OnIdle(wxIdleEvent& event);
+    void OnMenuHighlight(wxMenuEvent& event);
+
+#if wxUSE_MENUS
+    // send wxUpdateUIEvents for all menu items (called from OnIdle())
+    void DoMenuUpdates();
+    void DoMenuUpdates(wxMenu* menu, wxWindow* focusWin);
+#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
+
+    // if there is no real wxTopLevelWindow on this platform we have to define
+    // some wxTopLevelWindowBase pure virtual functions here to avoid breaking
+    // old ports (wxMotif) which don't define them in wxFrame
+#ifndef wxTopLevelWindowNative
+    virtual bool ShowFullScreen(bool WXUNUSED(show),
+                                long WXUNUSED(style) = wxFULLSCREEN_ALL)
+        { return FALSE; }
+    virtual bool IsFullScreen() const
+        { return FALSE; }
+#endif // no wxTopLevelWindowNative
+
+    // show help text (typically in the statusbar); show is FALSE
+    // if you are hiding the help, TRUE otherwise
+    virtual void DoGiveHelp(const wxString& text, bool show);
+
+protected:
+    // the frame main menu/status/tool bars
+    // ------------------------------------
+
+    // this (non virtual!) function should be called from dtor to delete the
+    // main menubar, statusbar and toolbar (if any)
+    void DeleteAllBars();
+
+    // test whether this window makes part of the frame
+    virtual bool IsOneOfBars(const wxWindow *win) const;
+
+#if wxUSE_MENUS
+    // override to update menu bar position when the frame size changes
+    virtual void PositionMenuBar() { }
+
+    // override to do something special when the menu bar is being removed
+    // from the frame
+    virtual void DetachMenuBar();
+
+    // override to do something special when the menu bar is attached to the
+    // frame
+    virtual void AttachMenuBar(wxMenuBar *menubar);
+
+    wxMenuBar *m_frameMenuBar;
+#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
+
+#if wxUSE_STATUSBAR
+    // override to update status bar position (or anything else) when
+    // something changes
+    virtual void PositionStatusBar() { }
+
+    // show the help string for this menu item in the given status bar: the
+    // status bar pointer can be NULL; return TRUE if help was shown
+    bool ShowMenuHelp(wxStatusBar *statbar, int helpid);
+
+    wxStatusBar *m_frameStatusBar;
+#endif // wxUSE_STATUSBAR
+
+
+    int m_statusBarPane;
+
+#if wxUSE_TOOLBAR
+    // override to update status bar position (or anything else) when
+    // something changes
+    virtual void PositionToolBar() { }
+
+    wxToolBar *m_frameToolBar;
+#endif // wxUSE_TOOLBAR
+
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxFrameBase)
+};
+
+// include the real class declaration
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__) // && !defined(__WXMICROWIN__)
+    #include "wx/univ/frame.h"
+#else // !__WXUNIVERSAL__
+    #if defined(__WXMSW__)
+        #include "wx/msw/frame.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+        #include "wx/gtk/frame.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+        #include "wx/motif/frame.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+        #include "wx/mac/frame.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+        #include "wx/cocoa/frame.h"
+    #elif defined(__WXPM__)
+        #include "wx/os2/frame.h"
+    #endif
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_FRAME_H_BASE_

include/wx/fs_inet.h

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        fs_inet.h
+// Purpose:     HTTP and FTP file system
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
+// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+/*
+
+REMARKS :
+
+This FS creates local cache (in /tmp directory). The cache is freed
+on program exit.
+
+Size of cache is limited to cca 1000 items (due to GetTempFileName
+limitation)
+
+
+*/
+#ifndef _WX_FS_INET_H_
+#define _WX_FS_INET_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "fs_inet.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_FILESYSTEM && wxUSE_FS_INET && wxUSE_STREAMS && wxUSE_SOCKETS
+
+#ifndef WXPRECOMP
+    #include "wx/hash.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/filesys.h"
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxInternetFSHandler
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxInternetFSHandler : public wxFileSystemHandler
+{
+    private:
+        wxHashTable m_Cache;
+
+    public:
+        virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location);
+        virtual wxFSFile* OpenFile(wxFileSystem& fs, const wxString& location);
+        ~wxInternetFSHandler();
+};
+
+#endif
+  // wxUSE_FILESYSTEM && wxUSE_FS_INET && wxUSE_STREAMS && wxUSE_SOCKETS
+
+#endif // _WX_FS_INET_H_
+

include/wx/fs_mem.h

@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        fs_mem.h
+// Purpose:     in-memory file system
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Copyright:   (c) 2000 Vaclav Slavik
+// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FS_MEM_H_
+#define _WX_FS_MEM_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "fs_mem.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/wxprec.h"
+
+#ifdef __BORLANDC__
+#pragma hdrstop
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_FILESYSTEM
+
+#include "wx/filesys.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmap;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxImage;
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxMemoryFSHandler
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMemoryFSHandlerBase : public wxFileSystemHandler
+{
+public:
+    wxMemoryFSHandlerBase();
+    ~wxMemoryFSHandlerBase();
+
+    // Add file to list of files stored in memory. Stored data (bitmap, text or
+    // raw data) will be copied into private memory stream and available under
+    // name "memory:" + filename
+    static void AddFile(const wxString& filename, const wxString& textdata);
+    static void AddFile(const wxString& filename, const void *binarydata, size_t size);
+
+    // Remove file from memory FS and free occupied memory
+    static void RemoveFile(const wxString& filename);
+
+    virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location);
+    virtual wxFSFile* OpenFile(wxFileSystem& fs, const wxString& location);
+    virtual wxString FindFirst(const wxString& spec, int flags = 0);
+    virtual wxString FindNext();
+
+protected:
+    static bool CheckHash(const wxString& filename);
+    static wxHashTable *m_Hash;
+};
+
+class wxMemoryFSHandler : public wxMemoryFSHandlerBase
+{
+public:
+#if wxUSE_GUI
+#if wxUSE_IMAGE
+    static void AddFile(const wxString& filename, wxImage& image, long type);
+#endif // wxUSE_IMAGE
+    static void AddFile(const wxString& filename, const wxBitmap& bitmap, long type);
+#endif // wxUSE_GUI
+};
+
+#endif // wxUSE_FILESYSTEM
+
+#endif // _WX_FS_MEM_H_
+

include/wx/fs_zip.h

@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        fs_zip.h
+// Purpose:     ZIP file system
+// Author:      Vaclav Slavik
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vaclav Slavik
+// CVS-ID:      $Id$
+// Licence:     wxWindows Licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_FS_ZIP_H_
+#define _WX_FS_ZIP_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "fs_zip.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/wxprec.h"
+
+#ifdef __BORLANDC__
+#pragma hdrstop
+#endif
+
+#if wxUSE_FILESYSTEM && wxUSE_FS_ZIP && wxUSE_STREAMS
+
+#include "wx/filesys.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxHashTableLong;
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxZipFSHandler
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxZipFSHandler : public wxFileSystemHandler
+{
+    public:
+        wxZipFSHandler();
+        virtual bool CanOpen(const wxString& location);
+        virtual wxFSFile* OpenFile(wxFileSystem& fs, const wxString& location);
+        virtual wxString FindFirst(const wxString& spec, int flags = 0);
+        virtual wxString FindNext();
+        ~wxZipFSHandler();
+
+    private:
+        // these vars are used by FindFirst/Next:
+        void *m_Archive;
+        wxString m_Pattern, m_BaseDir, m_ZipFile;
+        bool m_AllowDirs, m_AllowFiles;
+        wxHashTableLong *m_DirsFound;
+
+        wxString DoFind();
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxZipFSHandler)
+};
+
+
+#endif
+  // wxUSE_FILESYSTEM && wxUSE_FS_ZIP && wxUSE_STREAMS
+
+#endif // _WX_FS_ZIP_H_
+

include/wx/gauge.h

@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/gauge.h
+// Purpose:     wxGauge interface
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     20.02.01
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1996-2001 wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_GAUGE_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_GAUGE_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "gaugebase.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/defs.h"
+
+#if wxUSE_GAUGE
+
+#include "wx/control.h"
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxGaugeNameStr;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxGauge: a progress bar
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxGaugeBase : public wxControl
+{
+public:
+    virtual ~wxGaugeBase();
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                wxWindowID id,
+                int range,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                long style = wxGA_HORIZONTAL,
+                const wxValidator& validator = wxDefaultValidator,
+                const wxString& name = wxGaugeNameStr);
+
+    // set/get the control range
+    virtual void SetRange(int range);
+    virtual int GetRange() const;
+
+    // position
+    virtual void SetValue(int pos);
+    virtual int GetValue() const;
+
+    // appearance params (not implemented for most ports)
+
+    virtual void SetShadowWidth(int w);
+    virtual int GetShadowWidth() const;
+
+    virtual void SetBezelFace(int w);
+    virtual int GetBezelFace() const;
+
+    // overriden base class virtuals
+    virtual bool AcceptsFocus() const { return FALSE; }
+
+protected:
+    // the max position
+    int m_rangeMax;
+
+    // the current position
+    int m_gaugePos;
+};
+
+#if defined(__WXUNIVERSAL__)
+    #include "wx/univ/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+    #ifdef __WIN95__
+        #include "wx/msw/gauge95.h"
+        #define wxGauge wxGauge95
+        #define sm_classwxGauge sm_classwxGauge95
+    #else // !__WIN95__
+        // Gauge no longer supported on 16-bit Windows
+    #endif
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    #include "wx/motif/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    #include "wx/gtk/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    #include "wx/mac/gauge.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    #include "wx/os2/gauge.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // wxUSE_GAUGE
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_GAUGE_H_BASE_

include/wx/gdicmn.h

@@ -0,0 +1,566 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        gdicmn.h
+// Purpose:     Common GDI classes, types and declarations
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c)
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_GDICMNH__
+#define _WX_GDICMNH__
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// headers
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "gdicmn.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/setup.h"
+#include "wx/list.h"
+#include "wx/string.h"
+#include "wx/fontenc.h"
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// forward declarations
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmap;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBrush;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxColour;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCursor;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFont;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxIcon;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPalette;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPen;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxRegion;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxString;
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// constants
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Bitmap flags
+enum wxBitmapType
+{
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_INVALID,          // should be == 0 for compatibility!
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_BMP,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_BMP_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_RESOURCE = wxBITMAP_TYPE_BMP_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICO_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_CUR_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_XBM_DATA,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM_DATA,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_TIF,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_TIF_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_GIF_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PNG,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PNG_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_JPEG,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_JPEG_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PNM,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PNM_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PCX,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PCX_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PICT,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_PICT_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICON,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_ICON_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_ANI,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_IFF,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_MACCURSOR,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_MACCURSOR_RESOURCE,
+    wxBITMAP_TYPE_ANY = 50
+};
+
+// Standard cursors
+enum wxStockCursor
+{
+    wxCURSOR_NONE,          // should be 0
+    wxCURSOR_ARROW,
+    wxCURSOR_RIGHT_ARROW,
+    wxCURSOR_BULLSEYE,
+    wxCURSOR_CHAR,
+    wxCURSOR_CROSS,
+    wxCURSOR_HAND,
+    wxCURSOR_IBEAM,
+    wxCURSOR_LEFT_BUTTON,
+    wxCURSOR_MAGNIFIER,
+    wxCURSOR_MIDDLE_BUTTON,
+    wxCURSOR_NO_ENTRY,
+    wxCURSOR_PAINT_BRUSH,
+    wxCURSOR_PENCIL,
+    wxCURSOR_POINT_LEFT,
+    wxCURSOR_POINT_RIGHT,
+    wxCURSOR_QUESTION_ARROW,
+    wxCURSOR_RIGHT_BUTTON,
+    wxCURSOR_SIZENESW,
+    wxCURSOR_SIZENS,
+    wxCURSOR_SIZENWSE,
+    wxCURSOR_SIZEWE,
+    wxCURSOR_SIZING,
+    wxCURSOR_SPRAYCAN,
+    wxCURSOR_WAIT,
+    wxCURSOR_WATCH,
+    wxCURSOR_BLANK,
+#ifdef __WXGTK__
+    wxCURSOR_DEFAULT, // standard X11 cursor
+#endif
+#ifdef __WXMAC__
+	wxCURSOR_COPY_ARROW , // MacOS Theme Plus arrow 
+#endif
+#ifdef __X__
+    // Not yet implemented for Windows
+    wxCURSOR_CROSS_REVERSE,
+    wxCURSOR_DOUBLE_ARROW,
+    wxCURSOR_BASED_ARROW_UP,
+    wxCURSOR_BASED_ARROW_DOWN,
+#endif // X11
+
+    wxCURSOR_ARROWWAIT,
+
+    wxCURSOR_MAX
+};
+
+#ifndef __WXGTK__
+    #define wxCURSOR_DEFAULT wxCURSOR_ARROW
+#endif
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// macros
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/* Useful macro for creating icons portably, for example:
+
+    wxIcon *icon = new wxICON(mondrian);
+
+  expands into:
+
+    wxIcon *icon = new wxIcon("mondrian");      // On wxMSW
+    wxIcon *icon = new wxIcon(mondrian_xpm);    // On wxGTK
+ */
+
+#ifdef __WXMSW__
+    // Load from a resource
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon(wxT(#X))
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+    // Load from a resource
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon(wxT(#X))
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+    // Initialize from an included XPM
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon( (const char**) X##_xpm )
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+    // Initialize from an included XPM
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon( (const char**) X##_xpm )
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+    // Initialize from an included XPM
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon( (const char**) X##_xpm )
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+    // Initialize from an included XPM
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon( X##_xpm )
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+    // Initialize from an included XPM
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon( X##_xpm )
+#else
+    // This will usually mean something on any platform
+    #define wxICON(X) wxIcon(wxT(#X))
+#endif // platform
+
+/* Another macro: this one is for portable creation of bitmaps. We assume that
+   under Unix bitmaps live in XPMs and under Windows they're in ressources.
+ */
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__) || defined(__WXPM__)
+    #define wxBITMAP(name) wxBitmap(wxT(#name), wxBITMAP_TYPE_RESOURCE)
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__) || defined(__WXMOTIF__) || defined(__WXX11__) || defined(__WXMAC__) || defined(__WXMGL__)
+    // Initialize from an included XPM
+    #define wxBITMAP(name) wxBitmap( (const char**) name##_xpm )
+#else // other platforms
+    #define wxBITMAP(name) wxBitmap(name##_xpm, wxBITMAP_TYPE_XPM)
+#endif // platform
+
+// ===========================================================================
+// classes
+// ===========================================================================
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxSize
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxSize
+{
+public:
+    // members are public for compatibility, don't use them directly.
+    int x, y;
+
+    // constructors
+    wxSize() : x(0), y(0) { }
+    wxSize(int xx, int yy) : x(xx), y(yy) { }
+
+    // no copy ctor or assignment operator - the defaults are ok
+
+    bool operator==(const wxSize& sz) const { return x == sz.x && y == sz.y; }
+    bool operator!=(const wxSize& sz) const { return x != sz.x || y != sz.y; }
+
+    // FIXME are these really useful? If they're, we should have += &c as well
+    wxSize operator+(const wxSize& sz) { return wxSize(x + sz.x, y + sz.y); }
+    wxSize operator-(const wxSize& sz) { return wxSize(x - sz.x, y - sz.y); }
+
+    // accessors
+    void Set(int xx, int yy) { x = xx; y = yy; }
+    void SetWidth(int w) { x = w; }
+    void SetHeight(int h) { y = h; }
+
+    int GetWidth() const { return x; }
+    int GetHeight() const { return y; }
+
+    // compatibility
+    int GetX() const { return x; }
+    int GetY() const { return y; }
+};
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Point classes: with real or integer coordinates
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxRealPoint
+{
+public:
+    double x;
+    double y;
+
+    wxRealPoint() : x(0.0), y(0.0) { }
+    wxRealPoint(double xx, double yy) : x(xx), y(yy) { }
+
+    wxRealPoint operator+(const wxRealPoint& pt) const { return wxRealPoint(x + pt.x, y + pt.y); }
+    wxRealPoint operator-(const wxRealPoint& pt) const { return wxRealPoint(x - pt.x, y - pt.y); }
+
+    bool operator==(const wxRealPoint& pt) const { return x == pt.x && y == pt.y; }
+    bool operator!=(const wxRealPoint& pt) const { return x != pt.x || y != pt.y; }
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPoint
+{
+public:
+    int x, y;
+
+    wxPoint() : x(0), y(0) { }
+    wxPoint(int xx, int yy) : x(xx), y(yy) { }
+
+    // no copy ctor or assignment operator - the defaults are ok
+
+    // comparison
+    bool operator==(const wxPoint& p) const { return x == p.x && y == p.y; }
+    bool operator!=(const wxPoint& p) const { return !(*this == p); }
+
+    // arithmetic operations (component wise)
+    wxPoint operator+(const wxPoint& p) const { return wxPoint(x + p.x, y + p.y); }
+    wxPoint operator-(const wxPoint& p) const { return wxPoint(x - p.x, y - p.y); }
+
+    wxPoint& operator+=(const wxPoint& p) { x += p.x; y += p.y; return *this; }
+    wxPoint& operator-=(const wxPoint& p) { x -= p.x; y -= p.y; return *this; }
+};
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+    #define wxIntPoint wxPoint
+    #define wxRectangle wxRect
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxRect
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxRect
+{
+public:
+    wxRect()
+        : x(0), y(0), width(0), height(0)
+        { }
+    wxRect(int xx, int yy, int ww, int hh)
+        : x(xx), y(yy), width(ww), height(hh)
+        { }
+    wxRect(const wxPoint& topLeft, const wxPoint& bottomRight);
+    wxRect(const wxPoint& pos, const wxSize& size);
+
+    // default copy ctor and assignment operators ok
+
+    int GetX() const { return x; }
+    void SetX(int xx) { x = xx; }
+
+    int GetY() const { return y; }
+    void SetY(int yy) { y = yy; }
+
+    int GetWidth() const { return width; }
+    void SetWidth(int w) { width = w; }
+
+    int GetHeight() const { return height; }
+    void SetHeight(int h) { height = h; }
+
+    wxPoint GetPosition() const { return wxPoint(x, y); }
+    void SetPosition( const wxPoint &p ) { x = p.x; y = p.y; }
+
+    wxSize GetSize() const { return wxSize(width, height); }
+    void SetSize( const wxSize &s ) { width = s.GetWidth(); height = s.GetHeight(); }
+
+    int GetLeft()   const { return x; }
+    int GetTop()    const { return y; }
+    int GetBottom() const { return y + height - 1; }
+    int GetRight()  const { return x + width - 1; }
+
+    void SetLeft(int left) { x = left; }
+    void SetRight(int right) { width = right - x + 1; }
+    void SetTop(int top) { y = top; }
+    void SetBottom(int bottom) { height = bottom - y + 1; }
+
+    // operations with rect
+    wxRect& Inflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy);
+    wxRect& Inflate(wxCoord d) { return Inflate(d, d); }
+    wxRect Inflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) const
+    {
+        wxRect r = *this;
+        r.Inflate(dx, dy);
+        return r;
+    }
+
+    wxRect& Deflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) { return Inflate(-dx, -dy); }
+    wxRect& Deflate(wxCoord d) { return Inflate(-d); }
+    wxRect Deflate(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) const
+    {
+        wxRect r = *this;
+        r.Deflate(dx, dy);
+        return r;
+    }
+
+    void Offset(wxCoord dx, wxCoord dy) { x += dx; y += dy; }
+    void Offset(const wxPoint& pt) { Offset(pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    wxRect& Intersect(const wxRect& rect);
+    wxRect Intersect(const wxRect& rect) const
+    {
+        wxRect r = *this;
+        r.Intersect(rect);
+        return r;
+    }
+
+    wxRect operator+(const wxRect& rect) const;
+    wxRect& operator+=(const wxRect& rect);
+
+    // compare rectangles
+    bool operator==(const wxRect& rect) const;
+    bool operator!=(const wxRect& rect) const { return !(*this == rect); }
+
+    // return TRUE if the point is (not strcitly) inside the rect
+    bool Inside(int x, int y) const;
+    bool Inside(const wxPoint& pt) const { return Inside(pt.x, pt.y); }
+
+    // return TRUE if the rectangles have a non empty intersection
+    bool Intersects(const wxRect& rect) const;
+
+public:
+    int x, y, width, height;
+};
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Management of pens, brushes and fonts
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+typedef wxInt8 wxDash;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxPenList : public wxList
+{
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxPenList)
+
+public:
+    wxPenList() { }
+    ~wxPenList();
+
+    void AddPen(wxPen *pen);
+    void RemovePen(wxPen *pen);
+    wxPen *FindOrCreatePen(const wxColour& colour, int width, int style);
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBrushList : public wxList
+{
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxBrushList)
+
+public:
+    wxBrushList() { }
+    ~wxBrushList();
+
+    void AddBrush(wxBrush *brush);
+    void RemoveBrush(wxBrush *brush);
+    wxBrush *FindOrCreateBrush(const wxColour& colour, int style);
+};
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxEmptyString;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxFontList : public wxList
+{
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxFontList)
+
+public:
+    wxFontList() { }
+    ~wxFontList();
+
+    void AddFont(wxFont *font);
+    void RemoveFont(wxFont *font);
+    wxFont *FindOrCreateFont(int pointSize, int family, int style, int weight,
+                             bool underline = FALSE,
+                             const wxString& face = wxEmptyString,
+                             wxFontEncoding encoding = wxFONTENCODING_DEFAULT);
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxColourDatabase : public wxList
+{
+    DECLARE_CLASS(wxColourDatabase)
+
+public:
+    wxColourDatabase(int type);
+    ~wxColourDatabase() ;
+
+    // Not const because it may add a name to the database
+    wxColour *FindColour(const wxString& colour) ;
+    wxString FindName(const wxColour& colour) const;
+    void Initialize();
+#ifdef __WXPM__
+    // PM keeps its own type of colour table
+    long*                           m_palTable;
+    size_t                          m_nSize;
+#endif
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxBitmapList : public wxList
+{
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxBitmapList)
+
+public:
+    wxBitmapList();
+    ~wxBitmapList();
+
+    void AddBitmap(wxBitmap *bitmap);
+    void RemoveBitmap(wxBitmap *bitmap);
+};
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxResourceCache: public wxList
+{
+public:
+    wxResourceCache() { }
+    wxResourceCache(const unsigned int keyType) : wxList(keyType) { }
+    ~wxResourceCache();
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxResourceCache)
+};
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global variables
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Lists of GDI objects
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPenList*)   wxThePenList;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrushList*)   wxTheBrushList;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxFontList*)    wxTheFontList;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBitmapList*)  wxTheBitmapList;
+
+// Stock objects
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxFont*)      wxNORMAL_FONT;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxFont*)      wxSMALL_FONT;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxFont*)      wxITALIC_FONT;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxFont*)      wxSWISS_FONT;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxRED_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxCYAN_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxGREEN_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxBLACK_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxWHITE_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxTRANSPARENT_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxBLACK_DASHED_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxGREY_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxMEDIUM_GREY_PEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen*)      wxLIGHT_GREY_PEN;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxBLUE_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxGREEN_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxWHITE_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxBLACK_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxGREY_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxMEDIUM_GREY_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxLIGHT_GREY_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxTRANSPARENT_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxCYAN_BRUSH;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush*)    wxRED_BRUSH;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour*)    wxBLACK;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour*)    wxWHITE;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour*)    wxRED;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour*)    wxBLUE;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour*)    wxGREEN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour*)    wxCYAN;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour*)    wxLIGHT_GREY;
+
+// 'Null' objects
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBitmap)     wxNullBitmap;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxIcon)       wxNullIcon;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxCursor)     wxNullCursor;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPen)        wxNullPen;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxBrush)      wxNullBrush;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxPalette)     wxNullPalette;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxFont)       wxNullFont;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColour)     wxNullColour;
+
+// Stock cursors types
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxCursor*)    wxSTANDARD_CURSOR;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxCursor*)    wxHOURGLASS_CURSOR;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxCursor*)    wxCROSS_CURSOR;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxColourDatabase*)  wxTheColourDatabase;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxChar*) wxPanelNameStr;
+
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxSize) wxDefaultSize;
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern const wxPoint) wxDefaultPosition;
+
+// The list of objects which should be deleted
+WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern wxList) wxPendingDelete;
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// global functions
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// resource management
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxInitializeStockObjects();
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxInitializeStockLists();
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxDeleteStockObjects();
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxDeleteStockLists();
+
+// is the display colour (or monochrome)?
+extern bool WXDLLEXPORT wxColourDisplay();
+
+// Returns depth of screen
+extern int WXDLLEXPORT wxDisplayDepth();
+#define wxGetDisplayDepth wxDisplayDepth
+
+// get the display size
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxDisplaySize(int *width, int *height);
+extern wxSize WXDLLEXPORT wxGetDisplaySize();
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxDisplaySizeMM(int *width, int *height);
+extern wxSize WXDLLEXPORT wxGetDisplaySizeMM();
+
+// Get position and size of the display workarea
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxClientDisplayRect(int *x, int *y, int *width, int *height);
+extern wxRect WXDLLEXPORT wxGetClientDisplayRect();
+
+// set global cursor
+extern void WXDLLEXPORT wxSetCursor(const wxCursor& cursor);
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_GDICMNH__

include/wx/gdiobj.h

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+#ifndef _WX_GDIOBJ_H_BASE_
+#define _WX_GDIOBJ_H_BASE_
+
+#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#include "wx/msw/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#include "wx/motif/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#include "wx/gtk/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXX11__)
+#include "wx/x11/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMGL__)
+#include "wx/mgl/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXMAC__)
+#include "wx/mac/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXCOCOA__)
+#include "wx/cocoa/gdiobj.h"
+#elif defined(__WXPM__)
+#include "wx/os2/gdiobj.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif
+    // _WX_GDIOBJ_H_BASE_

include/wx/generic/.cvsignore

@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Makefile.in
+

include/wx/generic/accel.h

@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/generic/accel.h
+// Purpose:     wxAcceleratorTable class
+// Author:      Robert Roebling
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) Robert Roebling
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_GENERIC_ACCEL_H_
+#define _WX_GENERIC_ACCEL_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "accel.h"
+#endif
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxKeyEvent;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxAcceleratorTable
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAcceleratorTable : public wxObject
+{
+public:
+    wxAcceleratorTable();
+    wxAcceleratorTable(int n, const wxAcceleratorEntry entries[]);
+    virtual ~wxAcceleratorTable();
+
+    wxAcceleratorTable(const wxAcceleratorTable& accel)
+        : wxObject()
+        { Ref(accel); }
+    wxAcceleratorTable& operator=(const wxAcceleratorTable& accel)
+      { if ( m_refData != accel.m_refData ) Ref(accel); return *this; }
+
+    bool operator==(const wxAcceleratorTable& accel) const
+        { return m_refData == accel.m_refData; } // FIXME: this is wrong (VZ)
+    bool operator!=(const wxAcceleratorTable& accel) const
+        { return !(*this == accel); }
+
+    bool Ok() const;
+
+    void Add(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry);
+    void Remove(const wxAcceleratorEntry& entry);
+
+    // implementation
+    // --------------
+
+    wxMenuItem *GetMenuItem(const wxKeyEvent& event) const;
+    int GetCommand(const wxKeyEvent& event) const;
+
+    const wxAcceleratorEntry *GetEntry(const wxKeyEvent& event) const;
+
+protected:
+    // ref counting code
+    virtual wxObjectRefData *CreateRefData() const;
+    virtual wxObjectRefData *CloneRefData(const wxObjectRefData *data) const;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxAcceleratorTable)
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_GENERIC_ACCEL_H_
+

include/wx/generic/calctrl.h

@@ -0,0 +1,308 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        generic/calctrl.h
+// Purpose:     generic implementation of date-picker control
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     29.12.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) 1999 Vadim Zeitlin <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "calctrl.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef _WX_GENERIC_CALCTRL_H
+#define _WX_GENERIC_CALCTRL_H
+
+#include "wx/control.h"         // the base class
+#include "wx/dcclient.h"        // for wxPaintDC
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxComboBox;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxStaticText;
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxSpinCtrl;
+
+#define wxCalendarNameStr _T("CalendarCtrl")
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxCalendarCtrl: a control allowing the user to pick a date interactively
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCalendarCtrl : public wxControl
+{
+friend class wxMonthComboBox;
+friend class wxYearSpinCtrl;
+
+public:
+    // construction
+    wxCalendarCtrl() { Init(); }
+    wxCalendarCtrl(wxWindow *parent,
+                   wxWindowID id,
+                   const wxDateTime& date = wxDefaultDateTime,
+                   const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                   const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                   long style = wxCAL_SHOW_HOLIDAYS | wxWANTS_CHARS,
+                   const wxString& name = wxCalendarNameStr);
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                wxWindowID id,
+                const wxDateTime& date = wxDefaultDateTime,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
+                long style = wxCAL_SHOW_HOLIDAYS | wxWANTS_CHARS,
+                const wxString& name = wxCalendarNameStr);
+
+    virtual ~wxCalendarCtrl();
+
+    virtual bool Destroy();
+
+    // set/get the current date
+    // ------------------------
+
+    bool SetDate(const wxDateTime& date); // we need to be able to control if the event should be sent in SetDateAndNotify(...)
+    const wxDateTime& GetDate() const { return m_date; }
+
+    // set/get the range in which selection can occur
+    // ---------------------------------------------
+
+    bool SetLowerDateLimit(const wxDateTime& date = wxDefaultDateTime);
+    const wxDateTime& GetLowerDateLimit() const { return m_lowdate; }
+    bool SetUpperDateLimit(const wxDateTime& date = wxDefaultDateTime);
+    const wxDateTime& GetUpperDateLimit() const { return m_highdate; }
+
+    bool SetDateRange(const wxDateTime& lowerdate = wxDefaultDateTime, const wxDateTime& upperdate = wxDefaultDateTime);
+
+    // calendar mode
+    // -------------
+
+    // some calendar styles can't be changed after the control creation by
+    // just using SetWindowStyle() and Refresh() and the functions below
+    // should be used instead for them
+
+    // corresponds to wxCAL_NO_YEAR_CHANGE bit
+    void EnableYearChange(bool enable = TRUE);
+
+    // corresponds to wxCAL_NO_MONTH_CHANGE bit
+    void EnableMonthChange(bool enable = TRUE);
+
+    // corresponds to wxCAL_SHOW_HOLIDAYS bit
+    void EnableHolidayDisplay(bool display = TRUE);
+
+    // customization
+    // -------------
+
+    // header colours are used for painting the weekdays at the top
+    void SetHeaderColours(const wxColour& colFg, const wxColour& colBg)
+    {
+        m_colHeaderFg = colFg;
+        m_colHeaderBg = colBg;
+    }
+
+    const wxColour& GetHeaderColourFg() const { return m_colHeaderFg; }
+    const wxColour& GetHeaderColourBg() const { return m_colHeaderBg; }
+
+    // highlight colour is used for the currently selected date
+    void SetHighlightColours(const wxColour& colFg, const wxColour& colBg)
+    {
+        m_colHighlightFg = colFg;
+        m_colHighlightBg = colBg;
+    }
+
+    const wxColour& GetHighlightColourFg() const { return m_colHighlightFg; }
+    const wxColour& GetHighlightColourBg() const { return m_colHighlightBg; }
+
+    // holiday colour is used for the holidays (if style & wxCAL_SHOW_HOLIDAYS)
+    void SetHolidayColours(const wxColour& colFg, const wxColour& colBg)
+    {
+        m_colHolidayFg = colFg;
+        m_colHolidayBg = colBg;
+    }
+
+    const wxColour& GetHolidayColourFg() const { return m_colHolidayFg; }
+    const wxColour& GetHolidayColourBg() const { return m_colHolidayBg; }
+
+    // an item without custom attributes is drawn with the default colours and
+    // font and without border, setting custom attributes allows to modify this
+    //
+    // the day parameter should be in 1..31 range, for days 29, 30, 31 the
+    // corresponding attribute is just unused if there is no such day in the
+    // current month
+
+    wxCalendarDateAttr *GetAttr(size_t day) const
+    {
+        wxCHECK_MSG( day > 0 && day < 32, NULL, _T("invalid day") );
+
+        return m_attrs[day - 1];
+    }
+
+    void SetAttr(size_t day, wxCalendarDateAttr *attr)
+    {
+        wxCHECK_RET( day > 0 && day < 32, _T("invalid day") );
+
+        delete m_attrs[day - 1];
+        m_attrs[day - 1] = attr;
+    }
+
+    void SetHoliday(size_t day);
+
+    void ResetAttr(size_t day) { SetAttr(day, (wxCalendarDateAttr *)NULL); }
+
+    // returns one of wxCAL_HITTEST_XXX constants and fills either date or wd
+    // with the corresponding value (none for NOWHERE, the date for DAY and wd
+    // for HEADER)
+    wxCalendarHitTestResult HitTest(const wxPoint& pos,
+                                    wxDateTime *date = NULL,
+                                    wxDateTime::WeekDay *wd = NULL);
+
+    // implementation only from now on
+    // -------------------------------
+
+    // forward these functions to all subcontrols
+    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
+    virtual bool Show(bool show = TRUE);
+
+private:
+    // common part of all ctors
+    void Init();
+
+    // event handlers
+    void OnPaint(wxPaintEvent& event);
+    void OnClick(wxMouseEvent& event);
+    void OnDClick(wxMouseEvent& event);
+    void OnChar(wxKeyEvent& event);
+    void OnMonthChange(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnYearChange(wxCommandEvent& event);
+
+    // override some base class virtuals
+    virtual wxSize DoGetBestSize() const;
+    virtual void DoGetPosition(int *x, int *y) const;
+    virtual void DoGetSize(int *width, int *height) const;
+    virtual void DoSetSize(int x, int y, int width, int height, int sizeFlags);
+    virtual void DoMoveWindow(int x, int y, int width, int height);
+
+    // (re)calc m_widthCol and m_heightRow
+    void RecalcGeometry();
+
+    // set the date and send the notification
+    void SetDateAndNotify(const wxDateTime& date);
+
+    // get the week (row, in range 1..6) for the given date
+    size_t GetWeek(const wxDateTime& date) const;
+
+    // get the date from which we start drawing days
+    wxDateTime GetStartDate() const;
+
+    // is this date shown?
+    bool IsDateShown(const wxDateTime& date) const;
+
+    // is this date in the given range?
+    bool IsDateInRange(const wxDateTime& date) const;
+
+    // range helpers
+    bool ChangeYear(wxDateTime* target) const;
+    bool ChangeMonth(wxDateTime* target) const;
+
+    // redraw the given date
+    void RefreshDate(const wxDateTime& date);
+
+    // change the date inside the same month/year
+    void ChangeDay(const wxDateTime& date);
+
+    // set the attributes for the holidays if needed
+    void SetHolidayAttrs();
+
+    // reset all holidays
+    void ResetHolidayAttrs();
+
+    // generate the given calendar event(s)
+    void GenerateEvent(wxEventType type)
+    {
+        wxCalendarEvent event(this, type);
+        (void)GetEventHandler()->ProcessEvent(event);
+    }
+
+    void GenerateEvents(wxEventType type1, wxEventType type2)
+    {
+        GenerateEvent(type1);
+        GenerateEvent(type2);
+    }
+
+    // do we allow changing the month/year?
+    bool AllowMonthChange() const
+    {
+        return (GetWindowStyle() & wxCAL_NO_MONTH_CHANGE)
+                != wxCAL_NO_MONTH_CHANGE;
+    }
+    bool AllowYearChange() const
+    {
+        return !(GetWindowStyle() & wxCAL_NO_YEAR_CHANGE);
+    }
+
+    // show the correct controls
+    void ShowCurrentControls();
+
+    // get the currently shown control for month/year
+    wxControl *GetMonthControl() const;
+    wxControl *GetYearControl() const;
+
+    // OnPaint helper-methods
+
+    // Highlight the [fromdate : todate] range using pen and brush
+    void HighlightRange(wxPaintDC* dc, const wxDateTime& fromdate, const wxDateTime& todate, wxPen* pen, wxBrush* brush);
+
+    // Get the "coordinates" for the date relative to the month currently displayed.
+    // using (day, week): upper left coord is (1, 1), lower right coord is (7, 6)
+    // if the date isn't visible (-1, -1) is put in (day, week) and false is returned
+    bool GetDateCoord(const wxDateTime& date, int *day, int *week) const;
+
+    // Set the flag for SetDate(): otherwise it would overwrite the year
+    // typed in by the user
+    void SetUserChangedYear() { m_userChangedYear = TRUE; }
+
+    // the subcontrols
+    wxStaticText *m_staticMonth;
+    wxComboBox *m_comboMonth;
+
+    wxStaticText *m_staticYear;
+    wxSpinCtrl *m_spinYear;
+
+    // the current selection
+    wxDateTime m_date;
+
+    // the date-range
+    wxDateTime m_lowdate;
+    wxDateTime m_highdate;
+
+    // default attributes
+    wxColour m_colHighlightFg,
+             m_colHighlightBg,
+             m_colHolidayFg,
+             m_colHolidayBg,
+             m_colHeaderFg,
+             m_colHeaderBg;
+
+    // the attributes for each of the month days
+    wxCalendarDateAttr *m_attrs[31];
+
+    // the width and height of one column/row in the calendar
+    wxCoord m_widthCol,
+            m_heightRow,
+            m_rowOffset;
+
+    wxRect m_leftArrowRect,
+           m_rightArrowRect;
+
+    // the week day names
+    wxString m_weekdays[7];
+
+    // TRUE if SetDate() is being called as the result of changing the year in
+    // the year control
+    bool m_userChangedYear;
+
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxCalendarCtrl)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxCalendarCtrl)
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_GENERIC_CALCTRL_H

include/wx/generic/caret.h

@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        generic/caret.h
+// Purpose:     generic wxCaret class
+// Author:      Vadim Zeitlin (original code by Robert Roebling)
+// Modified by:
+// Created:     25.05.99
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef _WX_CARET_H_
+#define _WX_CARET_H_
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+#pragma interface "caret.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/timer.h"
+
+class wxCaret;
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxCaretTimer : public wxTimer
+{
+public:
+    wxCaretTimer(wxCaret *caret);
+    virtual void Notify();
+
+private:
+    wxCaret *m_caret;
+};
+
+class wxCaret : public wxCaretBase
+{
+public:
+    // ctors
+    // -----
+        // default - use Create()
+    wxCaret() : m_timer(this) { InitGeneric(); }
+        // creates a block caret associated with the given window
+    wxCaret(wxWindowBase *window, int width, int height)
+        : wxCaretBase(window, width, height), m_timer(this) { InitGeneric(); }
+    wxCaret(wxWindowBase *window, const wxSize& size)
+        : wxCaretBase(window, size), m_timer(this) { InitGeneric(); }
+
+    virtual ~wxCaret();
+
+    // implementation
+    // --------------
+
+    // called by wxWindow (not using the event tables)
+    virtual void OnSetFocus();
+    virtual void OnKillFocus();
+
+    // called by wxCaretTimer
+    void OnTimer();
+
+protected:
+    virtual void DoShow();
+    virtual void DoHide();
+    virtual void DoMove();
+
+    // blink the caret once
+    void Blink();
+
+    // refresh the caret
+    void Refresh();
+
+    // draw the caret on the given DC
+    void DoDraw(wxDC *dc);
+    
+private:
+    // GTK specific initialization
+    void InitGeneric();
+
+    // the bitmap holding the part of window hidden by the caret when it was
+    // at (m_xOld, m_yOld)
+    wxBitmap      m_bmpUnderCaret;
+    int           m_xOld,
+                  m_yOld;
+
+    wxCaretTimer  m_timer;
+    bool          m_blinkedOut,     // TRUE => caret hidden right now
+                  m_hasFocus;       // TRUE => our window has focus
+};
+
+#endif // _WX_CARET_H_

include/wx/generic/choicdgg.h

@@ -0,0 +1,313 @@
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+// Name:        wx/generic/choicdgg.h
+// Purpose:     Generic choice dialogs
+// Author:      Julian Smart
+// Modified by: 03.11.00: VZ to add wxArrayString and multiple sel functions
+// Created:     01/02/97
+// RCS-ID:      $Id$
+// Copyright:   (c) wxWindows team
+// Licence:     wxWindows licence
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+#ifndef __CHOICEDLGH_G__
+#define __CHOICEDLGH_G__
+
+#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(__APPLE__)
+    #pragma interface "choicdgg.h"
+#endif
+
+#include "wx/dynarray.h"
+#include "wx/dialog.h"
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxListBox;
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// some (ugly...) constants
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define wxCHOICE_HEIGHT 150
+#define wxCHOICE_WIDTH 200
+
+#define wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE \
+    (wxDEFAULT_DIALOG_STYLE | wxRESIZE_BORDER | wxOK | wxCANCEL | wxCENTRE)
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxAnyChoiceDialog: a base class for dialogs containing a listbox
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxAnyChoiceDialog : public wxDialog
+{
+public:
+    wxAnyChoiceDialog() { }
+
+    wxAnyChoiceDialog(wxWindow *parent,
+                      const wxString& message,
+                      const wxString& caption,
+                      int n, const wxString *choices,
+                      long styleDlg = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                      const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                      long styleLbox = wxLB_ALWAYS_SB)
+    {
+        (void)Create(parent, message, caption, n, choices,
+                     styleDlg, pos, styleLbox);
+    }
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                const wxString& message,
+                const wxString& caption,
+                int n, const wxString *choices,
+                long styleDlg = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
+                long styleLbox = wxLB_ALWAYS_SB);
+
+protected:
+    wxListBox  *m_listbox;
+
+    DECLARE_NO_COPY_CLASS(wxAnyChoiceDialog)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxSingleChoiceDialog: a dialog with single selection listbox
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxSingleChoiceDialog : public wxAnyChoiceDialog
+{
+public:
+    wxSingleChoiceDialog()
+    {
+        m_selection = -1;
+    }
+
+    wxSingleChoiceDialog(wxWindow *parent,
+                         const wxString& message,
+                         const wxString& caption,
+                         int n,
+                         const wxString *choices,
+                         char **clientData = (char **)NULL,
+                         long style = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                         const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition);
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                const wxString& message,
+                const wxString& caption,
+                int n,
+                const wxString *choices,
+                char **clientData = (char **)NULL,
+                long style = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition);
+
+    void SetSelection(int sel);
+    int GetSelection() const { return m_selection; }
+    wxString GetStringSelection() const { return m_stringSelection; }
+
+    // obsolete function (NB: no need to make it return wxChar, it's untyped)
+    char *GetSelectionClientData() const { return (char *)m_clientData; }
+
+    // implementation from now on
+    void OnOK(wxCommandEvent& event);
+    void OnListBoxDClick(wxCommandEvent& event);
+
+    // old, deprecated methods
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+    wxSingleChoiceDialog(wxWindow *parent,
+                         const wxString& message,
+                         const wxString& caption,
+                         const wxStringList& choices,
+                         char **clientData = (char **)NULL,
+                         long style = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                         const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition);
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                const wxString& message,
+                const wxString& caption,
+                const wxStringList& choices,
+                char **clientData = (char **)NULL,
+                long style = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition);
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+
+protected:
+    int         m_selection;
+    wxString    m_stringSelection;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxSingleChoiceDialog)
+    DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wxMultiChoiceDialog: a dialog with multi selection listbox
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+class WXDLLEXPORT wxMultiChoiceDialog : public wxAnyChoiceDialog
+{
+public:
+    wxMultiChoiceDialog() { }
+
+    wxMultiChoiceDialog(wxWindow *parent,
+                        const wxString& message,
+                        const wxString& caption,
+                        int n,
+                        const wxString *choices,
+                        long style = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                        const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition)
+    {
+        (void)Create(parent, message, caption, n, choices, style, pos);
+    }
+
+    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
+                const wxString& message,
+                const wxString& caption,
+                int n,
+                const wxString *choices,
+                long style = wxCHOICEDLG_STYLE,
+                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition);
+
+    void SetSelections(const wxArrayInt& selections);
+    wxArrayInt GetSelections() const { return m_selections; }
+
+    // implementation from now on
+    virtual bool TransferDataFromWindow();
+
+protected:
+    wxArrayInt m_selections;
+
+private:
+    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxMultiChoiceDialog)
+};
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// wrapper functions which can be used to get selection(s) from the user
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// get the user selection as a string
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxGetSingleChoice(const wxString& message,
+                                       const wxString& caption,
+                                       const wxArrayString& choices,
+                                       wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                       int x = -1,
+                                       int y = -1,
+                                       bool centre = TRUE,
+                                       int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                       int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxGetSingleChoice(const wxString& message,
+                                       const wxString& caption,
+                                       int n, const wxString *choices,
+                                       wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                       int x = -1,
+                                       int y = -1,
+                                       bool centre = TRUE,
+                                       int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                       int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+// Same as above but gets position in list of strings, instead of string,
+// or -1 if no selection
+WXDLLEXPORT int wxGetSingleChoiceIndex(const wxString& message,
+                                       const wxString& caption,
+                                       const wxArrayString& choices,
+                                       wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                       int x = -1,
+                                       int y = -1,
+                                       bool centre = TRUE,
+                                       int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                       int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT int wxGetSingleChoiceIndex(const wxString& message,
+                                       const wxString& caption,
+                                       int n, const wxString *choices,
+                                       wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                       int x = -1,
+                                       int y = -1,
+                                       bool centre = TRUE,
+                                       int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                       int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+// Return client data instead or NULL if cancelled
+WXDLLEXPORT void* wxGetSingleChoiceData(const wxString& message,
+                                        const wxString& caption,
+                                        const wxArrayString& choices,
+                                        void **client_data,
+                                        wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                        int x = -1, int y = -1,
+                                        bool centre = TRUE,
+                                        int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                        int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT void* wxGetSingleChoiceData(const wxString& message,
+                                        const wxString& caption,
+                                        int n, const wxString *choices,
+                                        void **client_data,
+                                        wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                        int x = -1, int y = -1,
+                                        bool centre = TRUE,
+                                        int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                        int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+// fill the array with the indices of the chosen items, it will be empty
+// if no items were selected or Cancel was pressed - return the number of
+// selections
+WXDLLEXPORT size_t wxGetMultipleChoices(wxArrayInt& selections,
+                                        const wxString& message,
+                                        const wxString& caption,
+                                        int n, const wxString *choices,
+                                        wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                        int x = -1,
+                                        int y = -1,
+                                        bool centre = TRUE,
+                                        int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                        int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT size_t wxGetMultipleChoices(wxArrayInt& selections,
+                                        const wxString& message,
+                                        const wxString& caption,
+                                        const wxArrayString& choices,
+                                        wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                        int x = -1,
+                                        int y = -1,
+                                        bool centre = TRUE,
+                                        int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                        int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// these methods are for backwards compatibility only, not documented and
+// deprecated
+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+
+WXDLLEXPORT wxString wxGetSingleChoice(const wxString& message,
+                                       const wxString& caption,
+                                       int n, wxChar *choices[],
+                                       wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                       int x = -1,
+                                       int y = -1,
+                                       bool centre = TRUE,
+                                       int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                       int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT int wxGetSingleChoiceIndex(const wxString& message,
+                                       const wxString& caption,
+                                       int n, wxChar *choices[],
+                                       wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                       int x = -1,
+                                       int y = -1,
+                                       bool centre = TRUE,
+                                       int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                       int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+WXDLLEXPORT void* wxGetSingleChoiceData(const wxString& message,
+                                        const wxString& caption,
+                                        int n, wxChar **choices,
+                                        void **client_data,
+                                        wxWindow *parent = (wxWindow *) NULL,
+                                        int x = -1, int y = -1,
+                                        bool centre = TRUE,
+                                        int width = wxCHOICE_WIDTH,
+                                        int height = wxCHOICE_HEIGHT);
+
+
+#endif // WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY_2
+
+#endif // __CHOICEDLGH_G__
+